HTC PJ03110 Smartphone User Manual 1 of 2

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1560634
Application ID	1aCa2SvPlOVYjMC70ugLJA==
Document Description	user manual 1 of 2
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	291.24kB (3640456 bits)
Date Submitted	2011-10-14 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-04-11 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-11-03 19:02:19
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-11-03 19:02:19
Document Title	user manual 1 of 2
Document Creator	AH Formatter V5.1 MR2 (5,1,2010,0409) for Windows (x64)

Your HTC Explorer
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
/1
User guide
2
Contents
Contents
/1
Getting started
Inside the box
09
HTC Explorer
Back cover
SIM card
11
Storage card
Battery
Switching the power on or off
Finger gestures
Setting up HTC Explorer for the first time
Ways of getting contacts into HTC Explorer
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
16
17
Basics
Adjusting the volume
Sleep mode
en
Status and notifications
tia
Home screen
20
Entering your PIN
19
20
21
23
Connecting HTC Explorer to a computer
25
Copying files to or from the storage card
25
Copying text, looking up information, and sharing
26
fid
Notifications panel
on
Personalizing
TC
Making HTC Explorer truly yours
28
Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenes
28
Changing your wallpaper
29
Applying a new skin
30
Personalizing your Home screen with widgets
30
Adding icons and other shortcuts on your Home screen
31
Adding folders on your Home screen
32
Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on your Home screen
32
Rearranging the Home screen
33
Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screen
33
Using sound sets
34
Rearranging or hiding application tabs
35
Shortcuts & Clock widget
36
Phone calls
Different ways of making calls
38
Making a call on the Phone dialer screen
38
Using Speed dial
39
3
Contents
Calling a phone number in a text message
40
Calling a phone number in an email
40
Calling a phone number in a Calendar event
40
Making an emergency call
40
Receiving calls
41
What can I do during a call?
42
43
Setting up a conference call
Internet calls
44
/1
Using Call history
Using Home dialing
09
Call services
Turning Airplane mode on or off
11
Search and Web browser
Searching HTC Explorer and the Web
Using the web browser
Viewing bookmarks and previously visited pages
Setting browser options
Accounts and sync
20
Downloading from the Web
en
Managing your online accounts
tia
Adding a social network account
People
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
56
57
57
59
About the People app
60
fid
Transferring contacts from your old phone
Your contacts list
61
Setting up your profile
62
Importing contacts from your SIM card
62
Adding a new contact
63
on
TC
46
56
Synchronizing with a Google Account
About online accounts
45
Searching for contacts
63
Importing a contact from an Exchange ActiveSync account
64
Merging contact information
65
Backing up your contacts to the storage card
66
Contact information and conversations
66
Sending contact information as a vCard
68
Contact groups
69
Adding People widgets
71
Social
Facebook for HTC Sense
73
Enjoying Facebook in Friend Stream
74
Chatting in Google Talk
75
Camera
Camera basics
78
Taking a photo
79
Recording video
80
4
Contents
Adding effects
80
After capturing
80
Changing camera settings
81
Photos, videos, and music
82
Gallery
89
/1
Music
Android Market and other apps
09
Finding and installing apps from Android Market
Using the Clock
Checking Weather
11
Watching videos on YouTube
Listening to FM Radio
Recording your voice
20
Sharing games and apps
Messages
Opening Messages
Sending a text message (SMS)
tia
Resuming a draft message
Viewing and replying to a message
Forwarding a message
en
Viewing and saving an attachment from a multimedia message
Push messages
Managing message conversations
Backing up your text messages to the storage card
Email
on
Gmail
fid
Setting message options
Mail
95
98
99
100
101
102
103
103
104
Sending a multimedia message (MMS)
93
106
106
107
108
108
109
110
111
112
113
Calendar
TC
About Calendar
122
Creating an event
122
Changing Calendar views
123
Managing Calendar events
124
Accepting or declining a meeting invitation
125
Dismissing or snoozing event reminders
126
Showing or hiding calendars
126
Changing Calendar settings
126
About the Calendar widget
127
Maps and location
Location settings
128
Google Maps
128
5
Contents
HTC Sync
About HTC Sync
133
Installing HTC Sync
133
Setting up HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer
134
Getting to know the workspace
134
135
Setting up synchronization
Synchronizing HTC Explorer
138
138
/1
Installing an app from your computer to HTC Explorer
Synchronizing another device with your computer
139
139
09
Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade
HTCSense.com
11
Signing up for your HTCSense.com account
Turning on Device finder
Using HTCSense.com
20
Deleting your HTCSense.com account
Keyboard
Using the onscreen keyboard
Entering words with predictive text
Adjusting input settings
Data connection
fid
Wi-Fi
en
Internet connections
tia
Entering text by tracing
Editing text
140
141
142
143
144
146
Entering text by speaking
140
147
147
148
150
151
152
Using HTC Explorer as a modem (USB tethering)
154
Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internet through a computer (Internet Pass-through)
154
on
Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)
Bluetooth
TC
Bluetooth basics
155
Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit
155
Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth device
156
Sending information using Bluetooth
157
Receiving information using Bluetooth
158
Security
Protecting your SIM card with a PIN
160
Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lock pattern, PIN, or password
160
Encrypting data on HTC Explorer
162
Settings
Settings on HTC Explorer
163
Changing display settings
165
Changing sound settings
166
Changing the language
167
6
Contents
Optimizing battery life
168
Managing memory
169
Checking information about HTC Explorer
171
Update and reset
172
Software updates
Restarting HTC Explorer
173
/1
Resetting HTC Explorer
09
Trademarks and copyrights
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
Index
173
7
Conventions used in this guide
Conventions used in this guide
In this user guide, we use the following symbols to indicate useful and important
information:
/1
This is a note. A note often gives additional information, such as what happens
when you choose to do or not to do a certain action. A note also provides
information that may only be applicable to some situations.
11
09
This is a tip. A tip gives you an alternative way to do a particular step or procedure,
or lets you know of an option that you may find helpful.
This indicates important information that you need in order to accomplish a certain
task or to get a feature to work properly.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
This provides safety precaution information, that is, information that you need to be
careful about to prevent potential problems.
8
Getting started
Getting started
/1
Inside the box
09
You will find the following inside the box:
§ HTC Explorer
11
§ Battery
§ USB cable
§ Power adapter
20
§ Quick start guide
§ Safety and regulatory guide
tia
HTC Explorer
TC
on
fid
en
Front panel
1. Home
2. Menu
3. Back
4. Search
5. Microphone
6. Touch screen
7. Earpiece
9
Getting started
Left and right panels
1. USB connector
20
11
09
/1
2. VOLUME controls
Back panel
tia
1. 3 megapixel camera
TC
on
fid
en
2. Speaker
Top panel
1. 3.5mm headset jack
2. POWER
10
Getting started
Back cover
Removing the back cover
Remove the back cover to access the battery compartment, SIM card slot, and
storage card slot.
/1
1. Turn off HTC Explorer and hold it securely upside down with the front facing
away from you.
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
2. With your fingers, pry the bottom of the back cover away from the phone while
pressing in with your thumb against the middle of the back cover.
on
Replacing the back cover
TC
1. Insert the top half of the phone into the top of the back cover.
2. Press the bottom part of the back cover towards the phone to lock the cover in
place. You'll hear a click when the back cover is locked in place.
11
Getting started
SIM card
The SIM card contains your phone number, service details, and memory for storing
phonebook contacts and/or text messages.
Inserting the SIM card
/1
1. Take the back cover off.
09
2. Remove the battery.
en
tia
20
11
3. With the SIM card’s gold contacts facing down and its cut-off corner facing out,
insert the SIM card all the way into the SIM card slot.
fid
Removing the SIM card
Make sure to switch off HTC Explorer before removing your SIM card.
on
1. Take the back cover off.
2. Remove the battery.
TC
3. Press and hold the SIM card tab.
4. Slide the SIM card out from the SIM card slot.
12
Getting started
Storage card
Use the storage card to store your photos, videos, and music.
Inserting the storage card
/1
1. Take the back cover off.
tia
20
11
09
2. Insert the microSD card into the storage card slot with its gold contacts facing
down and slide it in until it is securely in place.
en
Removing the storage card
fid
If HTC Explorer is on you must first "unmount" the storage card before removing it
to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.
1. Take the back cover off.
on
2. Slide the storage card out from its slot.
Unmounting the storage card
TC
When you need to remove the storage card while HTC Explorer is on, unmount the
storage card first to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Storage > Unmount SD card.
13
Getting started
Battery
/1
HTC Explorer uses a rechargeable battery. How long the battery can last before it
needs recharging depends on how you use HTC Explorer.The features and accessories
you use can affect battery life. For example, leaving your Bluetooth® connection
always on uses more power. Long phone calls and frequent web browsing use up a lot
of battery power. Also, consider your location: poor signal strength from your mobile
network and extreme temperature make the battery work harder.
09
Removing the battery
11
1. Take the back cover off.
en
tia
20
2. With your thumb or finger, lift the battery from the battery compartment.
Inserting the battery
fid
Please use only original batteries that came in the box or replacements that we
recommend.
on
1. Take the back cover off.
TC
2. Insert the battery (with its exposed copper contacts first) into the battery
compartment.
14
Getting started
Charging the battery
Before you turn on and start using HTC Explorer, it is recommended that you charge
the battery.
/1
§ Only the power adapter and USB cable provided in the box must be used to
charge the battery.
09
§ Do not remove the battery from HTC Explorer while you are charging it using the
power or car adapter.
en
tia
20
11
1. Insert the small end of the USB cable into the USB connector.
2. Insert the other end of the USB cable into the power adapter.
fid
3. Plug in the power adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.
on
When you charge the battery and HTC Explorer is on, the charging battery icon
displayed in the status bar. After the battery has been fully charged, the charging
battery icon turns to a full battery icon
TC
As a safety precaution, the battery stops charging when it overheats.
Switching the power on or off
Switching the power on
Press the POWER button. Easy.
When you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll need to set it up.
is
15
Getting started
Switching the power off
1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on, then unlock the
screen.
2. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.
/1
3. When the Power options menu appears, tap Power off.
09
Entering your PIN
11
Most SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by your mobile
operator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK.
20
If you enter the wrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. No problem. Just
contact your mobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).
Finger gestures
When you want to type using the keyboard, select items onscreen such
as application and settings icons, or press onscreen buttons, simply tap
them with your finger.
Press and
hold
To open the available options for an item (for example, a contact or link
in a web page), simply press and hold the item.
Swipe or
slide
To swipe or slide means to quickly drag your finger vertically or
horizontally across the screen.
Drag
Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to drag.
While dragging, do not release your finger until you have reached the
target position.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Tap
Flick
Flicking the screen is similar to swiping, except that you need to swipe
your finger in light, quicker strokes. This finger gesture is always in a
vertical direction, such as when flicking the contacts or message list.
Rotate
For most screens, you can automatically change the screen orientation
from portrait to landscape by turning HTC Explorer sideways. When
entering text, you can turn HTC Explorer sideways to bring up a bigger
keyboard.
Pinch
In some apps, like Gallery or the web browser, you can “pinch” the screen
using two fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) to zoom in or
zoom out when viewing a picture or a web page.
16
Getting started
Setting up HTC Explorer for the first time
/1
When you switch on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll be asked to set it up. You
can choose how you want to connect to the Internet and whether you want your
current location to be automatically detected. If you still have personal contacts and
calendar events stored on your old phone, you can easily transfer them to
HTC Explorer through Bluetooth as well.
09
Be sure to sign in to your Google® Account so you can use Google apps like Gmail™
and Android Market™. You can also set up your other email accounts and Facebook®.
Just follow the onscreen instructions and you’ll be up and running in no time.
20
11
Some features that need to connect to the Internet such as location-based services
and auto-sync of your online accounts may incur extra data fees. Don’t worry. You
can enable or disable them in settings later on.
Ways of getting contacts into HTC Explorer
Sync the contacts from your old phone to your computer, and
then use HTC Sync to sync HTC Explorer with your computer's
Microsoft® Outlook®, Outlook Express or Windows® Contacts.
en
HTC Sync™
tia
There are several ways you can add contacts to HTC Explorer. You can sync
HTC Explorer with contacts from your Google Account, computer, Facebook, and
more.
Google contacts are imported to HTC Explorer after you sign in to
your Google Account. You can also create more Google contacts
right from HTC Explorer.
fid
Gmail
TC
on
Facebook
Log in to your Facebook account to import your Facebook
friends' contact information.
Phone contacts
You can choose to create and store contacts directly in
HTC Explorer or transfer existing ones from your old phone.
SIM card
Copy all your SIM contacts to HTC Explorer.
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSync®
HTC Explorer syncs your work contacts from the Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync Server in your workplace.
Transfer
Use the Transfer app to transfer not only your contacts, but also
calendar events and text messages from your old phone to
HTC Explorer.
17
Getting started
Home screen
/1
Your Home screen is where you make HTC Explorer your own. It comes with a
Shortcuts & Clock widget that contains shortcuts to your favorite apps and shows the
time and weather in your city. You can also add your favorite applications, shortcuts,
folders and widgets so they’re always just a tap away. To find out how, see
Personalizing on page 28.
09
Extended Home screen
11
As you start to do more things with HTC Explorer, you might find that one Home
screen is not enough. No problem. You can use up to six extra screens. It should be
plenty.
on
fid
en
tia
20
Slide your finger horizontally to the left or right and you’ll discover more space for
adding icons, widgets, and more.
TC
Press
to return to the main Home screen (that is, the center home screen).
18
Getting started
Using Leap view
20
11
09
/1
To jump straight to the screen that you want, press
or pinch the screen to show
the Leap view. It reveals all seven Home screens as thumbnails.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Just tap the one you want and you’ll leap right there.
19
Basics
Basics
/1
Adjusting the volume
11
09
Adjusting the ringer volume changes the volume level of the ringtone, while adjusting
the media volume changes the volume level of sound notifications and music or video
playback.
Adjusting the ringer volume
20
§ Press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button to adjust the ringer volume to
your desired level. The Ringer volume window appears on the screen to display
the volume levels.
tia
§ While in the lowest ringer volume level (Silent mode), press VOLUME DOWN
once to switch to Vibrate mode. The vibrate mode icon
appears in the status
bar.
en
§ While in Vibrate mode, press VOLUME UP once to switch to silent mode. The
speaker mute icon
displays in the status bar.
Adjusting the media volume
fid
When playing music or watching video, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN
button to adjust the volume. The Media volume window appears on the screen to
display the volume level.
on
Adjusting the earpiece volume for calls
During a call, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button.
Adjusting the volume via settings
TC
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Sound > Volume.
2. Drag the volume sliders to the left or right to adjust the volume levels of the
ringtone, media playback, alarms, and notifications. A sample tone is briefly
played with the volume being adjusted as you drag a slider.
3. If you want the same volume for your ringtone and notifications, select Use
incoming call volume for notifications.
4. When you’re done, tap OK.
20
Basics
Sleep mode
Sleep mode saves battery power by putting HTC Explorer into a low power state
while the display is off. It also stops accidental button presses when HTC Explorer is in
your bag. You’ll still receive messages and calls though.
/1
Switching to Sleep mode
09
Briefly press the POWER button to turn off the display and switch to Sleep mode.
HTC Explorer also automatically goes into Sleep mode when it’s idle for a while.
11
Waking up from Sleep mode
To wake HTC Explorer up manually, press the POWER button. You’ll need to unlock
the screen.
20
HTC Explorer automatically wakes up when you have an incoming call.
Unlocking the screen
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Pull the ring up to unlock the screen.
If you have set up a screen unlock pattern, pin, or password, you will be asked to
draw the pattern on the screen or enter the PIN or password before it unlocks.
If you've set an event reminder or an alarm, you can drag
snooze or dismiss the event or alarm.
or
to the ring to
21
Basics
Opening an app from the lock screen
/1
You can customize the lock screen in Settings > Personalize > Lock screen
shortcuts to show your four favorite apps.
09
Status and notifications
11
Status icons
20
Here’s what each icon means:
Signal strength
Battery is full
en
tia
GPRS connected
GPRS in use
fid
EDGE connected
Battery is charging
Battery is low (20% remaining)
Battery is very low (10% or less
remaining)
Silent mode
3G connected
Vibrate mode
3G in use
Microphone is mute
HSDPA connected
Speakerphone is on
HSDPA in use
Wired microphone headset
connected
Roaming
Wired headset connected
No signal
Bluetooth is on
TC
on
EDGE in use
On the lock screen, drag an app icon to the ring to unlock the screen and directly go
to the app.
Basics
Connected to a Bluetooth device
Connected to a Wi-Fi® network
Airplane mode
Data synchronizing
GPS is on
Network sharing is on
Alarm is set
/1
No SIM card installed
09
22
11
Notification icons
20
Notification icons on the status bar make it easy for you to keep on top of your
messages, calendar events, and alarms.
tia
New Gmail message
Here’s what each one means:
Call in progress
Problem with email delivery
Missed call
fid
en
New Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email
TC
on
New SMS/MMS
General notification
Call on hold
Problem with SMS/MMS delivery
Call forwarding on
New Google Talk™ instant
message
Message forwarding on
New voicemail
HTC Explorer is connected to a
computer via USB cable
Upcoming event
Wi-Fi is on and wireless networks
are available
New updates from your social
networks
Matched contacts suggestion
Uploading data (animated)
Basics
Downloading data (animated)
HTC Explorer software update
available
Waiting to upload
Song is playing
Downloaded Android Market app
installed successfully
FM Radio app in use
Update available for an app
downloaded from Android Market
Voice recording is on
Blank card
09
/1
Bluetooth pairing request
11
23
Internal storage is low
20
More (not displayed) notifications
Notifications panel
en
tia
When you get a new notification, you can open the Notifications panel to see what
event notification or new information you've received. The Notifications panel lets you
quickly switch between recently-opened apps, and also lets you easily turn on settings
such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.
If you have several notifications, you can scroll down
the screen to see them all.
TC
on
fid
To open the Notifications panel, press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger
downward.
You can also open the Notifications panel on the Home screen by pressing
then tapping Notifications.
and
24
Basics
Switching between recently opened apps
On the Notifications panel, you can easily access up to eight apps you just recently
opened.
1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open the
Notifications panel.
11
09
/1
2. In the Recent apps section, slide your finger left or right to see recently-opened
apps.
Press and hold
20
3. Tap an app to open it.
to view recently used apps.
tia
Using Quick Settings
The Quick Settings tab lets you easily turn on Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and more, and also
provides a quick shortcut to all HTC Explorer settings.
en
1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open the
Notifications panel.
fid
2. Tap the Quick Settings tab.
TC
on
3. Tap the check box next to an item to turn it off or on.
Closing the Notifications panel
Press and hold the bottom bar of the Notifications panel, then slide your finger up the
screen. Or just press
25
Basics
Connecting HTC Explorer to a computer
Whenever you connect HTC Explorer to a computer using the USB cable, the Choose
a connection type screen opens and lets you choose the type of USB connection.
Select one of the following choices, and then tap Done:
Select this option if you only want to charge the battery while
connected to your computer.
Disk drive
This mode is available only when there’s a storage card installed on
HTC Explorer. Select this mode when you want to copy files between
the storage card and your computer.
11
09
/1
Charge only
When Disk drive mode is enabled while HTC Explorer is connected to
the computer, you will not be able to use apps on HTC Explorer to
access the storage card.
Select this option to synchronize contacts, calendar, and other
information between your computer and HTC Explorer.
USB
tethering
When you do not have an Internet connection on your computer, you
can select this mode to share the mobile data connection of
HTC Explorer with your computer.
tia
20
HTC Sync
en
Internet pass- If you don’t have a data plan or you don’t have access to a Wi-Fi
through
network, you can select this mode to share your computer’s Internet
connection with HTC Explorer.
fid
Copying files to or from the storage card
You can copy your music, photos, and other files to the storage card.
on
1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the supplied USB cable.
2. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Disk drive, and then tap Done.
On your computer, the storage card is recognized as a removable disk.
3. Navigate to the removable disk and open it.
TC
4. Do one of the following:
§ Copy the files from the computer to the storage card’s root folder.
§ Copy the files from the storage card to a folder in your computer.
5. After copying the files, unmount the removable disk (that is, the connected
HTC Explorer) as required by your computer’s operating system to safely
remove HTC Explorer.
6. Do one of the following:
§ Disconnect HTC Explorer from the computer.
§ If you want to keep HTC Explorer connected to the computer but want it to
be able to access the storage card, open the Notifications panel, tap Disk
drive, select an option except Disk drive, and then tap Done.
26
Basics
Copying text, looking up information, and
sharing
In apps such as the web browser and Mail, you can select text and choose what you
want to do with it.
/1
Selecting text
09
1. Press and hold on a word.
20
11
2. Drag the start and end markers to highlight the surrounding text you want to
select.
en
tia
To copy the address of a linked web page, press and hold the link, and then tap
Copy link URL.
Copying and pasting text
fid
1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy.
The selected text is then copied to the clipboard.
on
2. In a text entry field (for example while composing an email), press and hold at
the point where you want to paste the text.
3. Tap Paste.
Searching or translating text
TC
1. After you have selected the text you want to search for or translate, tap
2. Tap one of the following tabs:
Google Search
Look for related information using Google Search, based on the text that
you selected.
Wikipedia
Look for related information on Wikipedia®, based on the text that you
selected.
27
Basics
YouTube
Look for videos on YouTube®, based on the text that you selected.
Google Translate
Sharing text
09
1. After you have selected the text you want to share, tap
/1
Translate the text to another language.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
2. Choose where to paste and share the selected text, such as in an email message
or Facebook status update.
28
Personalizing
Personalizing
/1
Making HTC Explorer truly yours
, and then tap Personalize to get started.
11
On the Home screen, press
09
Make HTC Explorer look and sound just the way you want it. Personalize it with a
different wallpaper, skin, ringtone, and notification sound for events such as incoming
text, email, and calendar reminders.
20
Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenes
tia
HTC Explorer becomes multiple phones in one when you use scenes. Scenes are
personalized Home screen layouts that you can quickly apply. By switching between
scenes, you instantly turn HTC Explorer into your perfect weekend phone, travel
phone, work phone, or pure play phone.
en
Everytime you add or modify something on the Home screen, HTC Explorer
automatically saves your changes to the current scene selected.
Using a preset scene
fid
HTC Explorer features preset scenes, each preconfigured with a different wallpaper
and collection of widgets that reflect different moments in your life. You can choose a
scene that is suitable for work, play, travel, or your social life.
on
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.
3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want.
TC
4. Tap Apply.
To download more scenes, press
tap Scene > Get more.
, and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,
Creating a new scene
You’ll start with an empty Home screen when you create a new scene.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.
3. Press
, and then tap New.
, and then tap Personalize.
29
Personalizing
4. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.
5. Personalize the scene by adding widgets and other elements, arranging the
Home screen layout, and changing the skin or wallpaper. All of your changes will
be automatically saved to this scene.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
09
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.
/1
Renaming a scene
11
3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want to
rename.
4. Press and hold a scene thumbnail, then tap Rename.
5. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Deleting scenes
, and then tap Personalize.
, and then tap Delete.
tia
3. Press
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene
5. Tap Delete.
en
4. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to browse through scenes, then
tap one or more scenes you want to delete.
fid
Changing your wallpaper
on
Personalizing your wallpaper with your favorite photo is a quick and easy way to give
HTC Explorer a fresh look. Browse the collection of wallpapers included in
HTC Explorer or choose from photos that you have taken with the camera. You can
also change your Home screen to use an animated wallpaper.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
TC
2. On the Display tab, tap Wallpaper.
3. Tap one of the following:
HTC wallpapers Choose a preset wallpaper, then tap Preview > Apply.
Live wallpapers Choose from preset animated wallpapers. Tap Preview to
view the animation, and then tap Apply.
Gallery
Choose an existing photo. Crop the photo and then tap Save.
To download more wallpapers, press
, and then tap Personalize . On the Display
tab, tap Wallpaper > HTC wallpapers > Get more.
30
Personalizing
Applying a new skin
, and then tap Personalize.
/1
1. From the Home screen, press
Personalize beyond the Home screen by applying a new skin. Skins are set to give a
different look and feel to most onscreen buttons, application screens, option menus,
and other items.
2. On the Display tab, tap Skin.
09
3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the skin you want.
4. Tap Apply.
, and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,
11
To download more skins, press
tap Skin > Get more.
20
Personalizing your Home screen with widgets
tia
Widgets put at-a-glance important information and media content up front on your
Home screen. Some widgets are already added to your Home screen for your
convenience. You can add more from the available selections of widgets.
Adding a widget to your Home screen
2. Press
en
1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new widget.
, and then tap Personalize.
fid
3. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget.
4. Select a widget that you want.
on
5. Most HTC widgets are available in a variety of designs and sizes to suit your
needs. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to view the different
styles, and then tap Select to choose one.
TC
You can also add widgets that allow you to quickly switch on or off certain settings
such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Scroll down the widgets list, tap Settings, and then tap
the widget that you want.
To download more widgets, press
, and then tap Personalize. On the Add to
Home tab, tap Widget > Get more HTC widgets.
31
Personalizing
Changing the settings of a widget
You can modify basic settings of some widgets (for example, the People and Mail
widgets) from the Home screen.
/1
tia
20
11
09
2. Drag the widget to
1. Press and hold a widget on the Home screen. HTC Explorer vibrates and you’ll
see a colored box around the widget. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
en
The relevant screen where you can change some settings for this widget then
opens.
fid
3. Customize the widget settings.
on
Adding icons and other shortcuts on your
Home screen
TC
Place app icons on your Home screen to open apps quicker. You can also add
shortcuts to settings and specific information such as a bookmarked webpage,
someone’s phone number, a music playlist, route directions, and many other items, to
your Home screen.
The shortcuts available depend on the apps that are installed on HTC Explorer.
1. Go to a Home screen where there’s space to add a new icon or shortcut.
2. Press
, and then tap Personalize.
3. On the Add to Home tab, tap App to add an app icon, or Shortcut to add a
shortcut to a setting or information.
To add an app icon on the Home screen, tap
, and then press and hold an app
icon. Without lifting your finger, drag the icon to an empty area on the Home
screen, and then release it.
32
Personalizing
Adding folders on your Home screen
Use folders to group related apps and other shortcuts to keep your Home screen tidy
and organized. You can also add information folders that show up-to-date information
such as Bluetooth received files, your Facebook phonebook, and more.
/1
Creating a new folder and adding items to it
1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new folder.
, and then tap Personalize.
09
2. Press
3. On the Add to home tab, tap Folder.
11
4. Tap New Folder. The new folder appears on the Home screen.
5. Go to the Home screen where there is an app, icon, or shortcut, and then press
and hold it. HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
20
6. Drag the app, icon, or shortcut and drop it on the folder.
Renaming a folder
tia
Simply tap the folder to open it so you can access the
apps and shortcuts inside the folder.
en
1. Tap the folder to open it.
2. Press and hold the folder window’s title bar.
fid
3. Enter a new folder name and then tap OK.
on
Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on
your Home screen
TC
Rearrange the widgets and icons on your Home screen to make room for adding more
items. You can also remove widgets and icons that you don’t frequently use.
Moving a widget or icon
1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to move. HTC Explorer vibrates and
you’ll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
2. Drag the widget or icon to a new location on the screen.
§ You can pause at the left or right edge of the screen to drag the widget or icon
onto another Home screen panel.
§ When you drag an icon to a spot that’s occupied by another icon, the occupant
automatically moves away to give room.
3. When the widget or icon is where you want it, lift your finger.
33
Personalizing
Removing a widget or icon
1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to remove. HTC Explorer vibrates
and you'll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger just
yet.
2. Drag the widget or icon to
09
Rearranging the Home screen
/1
3. When the widget or icon also turns red, lift your finger.
20
11
Reorder your Home screen panels in any way that fits how you use them. For
example, move the panels with frequently-used widgets, shortcuts, and folders closer
to the main Home screen.
The main Home screen is the panel that is bordered by a thin line in Leap view.
1. Pinch the Home screen to show the Leap view.
tia
2. Press and hold the thumbnail of the home screen you want to move.
HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
TC
on
fid
en
3. Drag the thumbnail to its new position, and then lift your finger.
Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screen
You can choose what shortcuts you want for your lock screen so you can unlock the
screen straight into your favorite app.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Display tab, tap Lock screen > Choose lock screen shortcuts.
34
Personalizing
3. Tap a shortcut that you want to change, and then choose another app to
replace it .
4. Tap Done.
/1
Using sound sets
11
09
Each sound set gives you a different combination of sounds for your ringtone and
notifications such as incoming messages, email, calendar event reminders, and more.
By switching between sound sets, you can instantly make HTC Explorer ring or alert
you with fun sounds when you're out with friends or change to subtle sounds while
you're at work.
Choosing a preset sound set
, and then tap Personalize.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound sets screen, and then tap a sound set name.
3. You can tap
to listen to the different sounds for that sound set.
4. Tap Apply.
en
tia
To download more sound sets, press
tab, tap Sound set > Get more.
, and then tap Personalize . On the Sound
Creating a sound set
, and then tap Personalize.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.
3. Tap
on
4. Enter a new sound set name, and then tap Done.
The newly created sound set is then added to the list of sound sets. You can assign
different tones to the sound set to your preference.
TC
Changing your ringtone, notifications, and sounds
Change your ringtone, notification sounds, and alarms to suit your mood or lifestyle.
Choose different sounds from the preset selection or your storage card.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.
35
Personalizing
3. Choose a sound set you want to customize or create a new one, and then tap
Apply.
4. Change the ringtone, notification sound, and alarm from the Personalize screen.
/1
You can also go to the Messages, Mail, and Calendar apps to choose sounds for
new messages, email, and calendar reminders respectively.
HTC Explorer automatically saves your choices to the current sound set.
, and then tap Personalize.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
Deleting sound sets
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.
3. Press
, and then tap Delete.
20
4. Tap one or more sound sets you want to delete.
5. Tap Delete.
tia
Rearranging or hiding application tabs
en
You can rearrange the tabs of some apps to prioritize the types of information you
frequently use or remove the tabs you don’t really need.
fid
1. Open an app that has the usual tabs at the bottom of its screen.
on
2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the area where
you can rearrange icons, lift your finger.
TC
3. Do any of the following:
Add a tab
Press and hold a tab that you want to add, and then drag it
beside the other tabs.
Move a tab
Press and hold the tab you want to move, and then drag it to its
new position.
Remove a tab Press and hold a tab you want to hide, then drag it up.
4. When you’re done, press
Adding a tab back
1. Open the app from which you previously removed some tabs.
2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you some of your
hidden tabs, lift your finger.
36
Personalizing
4. When you’re done, press
20
11
09
/1
3. Press and hold the tab you want to show, then drag it down to where you want
to position it again.
tia
Shortcuts & Clock widget
Open often-used apps or preview their contents right from the Home screen.
en
From the Shortcuts & Clock widget, you can:
§ Tap the shortcut to an app to open it
§ Tap the information bar to extend it and view the contents of that app
TC
on
fid
§ Tap the preview of the content and open it
37
Personalizing
Customizing the Shortcuts & Clock widget
You can choose which shortcuts and city appear on the Shortcuts & Clock widget.
/1
2. Drag the widget to
1. On the Home screen, tap and hold the Shortcuts & Clock widget. Don't lift your
finger just yet.
3. From this screen, you can:
09
§ Tap a shortcut slot, and then choose an app or shortcut to assign to it.
§ Tap the time, and then select a city that will appear in the widget. If your
city is not included in the list, tap
to add your city.
11
4. Tap Done.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
The Shortcuts & Clock widget is updated.
38
Phone calls
Phone calls
/1
Different ways of making calls
11
09
Besides making calls from the phone dialer screen on HTC Explorer, you can tap a
number in a text message or email to call, or press a single number on the phone
dialer to quickly call a contact.
20
Most SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by your
mobile operator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK. If you enter the
wrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. Don't worry. Just contact your
mobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).
Making a call on the Phone dialer screen
tia
You can either dial a number directly, or use the Smart dial feature to search and call a
stored contact or a number from your call history.
en
1. On the Home screen, tap
fid
2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contact
name on the phone keypad. The Phone dialer screen then displays a list of
matching numbers and names.
to delete it. To erase the entire entry,
on
If you enter a wrong digit or letter, tap
press and hold
3. Slide your finger up on the filtered list to close the phone keypad and see if
there are more matching numbers or contacts.
4. To place a call, do one of the following:
TC
§ Tap a phone number or contact from the list.
§ After entering a complete number, tap Call.
§ To call a different phone number associated with the contact, you can tap
at the right side of the contact name. On the contact details screen, tap
the number you want to call.
While dialing or when the call is in progress, the status bar displays the call in progress
icon
39
Phone calls
What is Smart dial?
The phone dialer’s Smart dial feature makes it quick and easy for you to place a call.
/1
Simply enter the phone number or first few letters of the person’s name you want to
call. Smart dial automatically searches and filters your stored contacts and the phone
numbers from the call history.
09
Using Speed dial
11
Use Speed dial to call a phone number with a single tap. For example, if you assign a
contact’s number to the number 2 key, you can just press and hold 2 to dial the
number.
Assigning a speed dial key
1. On the Home screen, tap Phone.
, and then tap Speed dial >
tia
2. Press
20
The number 1 key is generally reserved for your voicemail. Press and hold this key
to call voicemail and retrieve your voicemail messages.
3. Enter the name of the contact you want to add. When the name comes up in
the list, tap the name.
fid
5. Tap Save.
en
4. On the Speed dial screen, choose the phone number of the contact to use, and a
speed dial key to assign.
TC
on
You can also set a speed dial key in People. Tap a contact, press
select Set speed dial (or More > Set speed dial).
, and then
40
Phone calls
Calling a phone number in a text message
09
/1
1. Tap the phone number within the message.
11
2. Tap Call.
20
To call the message sender, tap the received message, and then tap Call on the
options menu.
Calling a phone number in an email
tia
Want to call a number that's in an email? No problem.
1. In the email body, tap the phone number.
3. Tap Call.
en
2. Edit the number if necessary.
fid
Calling a phone number in a Calendar event
on
Tapping a phone number in a Calendar event lets you see the event details such as
conference call ID number or meeting PIN code while on the Phone dialer screen.
1. Open an event in Calendar.
2. On the Event details screen, tap the phone number.
TC
3. Tap Call.
Making an emergency call
In some regions, you can make emergency calls from HTC Explorer even if you don’t
have a SIM card installed or your SIM card has been blocked.
1. On the Home screen, tap
2. Dial the emergency number for your locale, and then tap Call.
If you’ve enabled but forgotten your lock password or lock pattern, you can still make
emergency calls by tapping Emergency call on the screen.
41
Phone calls
Receiving calls
When you receive a phone call from a contact, the Incoming call screen appears.
/1
You can use the polite ringer and pocket mode features for receiving calls. To find
out how, see Changing sound settings on page 166.
Answering a call
09
Do one of the following:
§ Tap Answer.
to the
fid
en
tia
20
11
§ If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag
ring to unlock the screen and answer the call.
Rejecting a call
on
Do one of the following:
§ Tap Decline.
§ If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag
ring on the Lock screen.
to the
TC
§ Press the POWER button twice to reject a call.
Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the call
Do one of the following:
§ Press the VOLUME DOWN or VOLUME UP button.
§ Press the POWER button.
§ Place HTC Explorer face down on a level surface.
If HTC Explorer is already facing down, it will still ring when there are subsequent
incoming calls.
42
Phone calls
HTC Caller ID
20
11
09
/1
Everytime you make a call or your friend gives you a ring, you get to see your friend’s
latest status update from social networks like Facebook or Twitter™ right on the call
screen. You also won’t miss people’s birthdays. You’ll see a birthday reminder, if your
friend’s birthday will occur sometime within the next seven days.
What can I do during a call?
en
Putting a call on hold
tia
When a call is in progress, use the buttons onscreen to mute or unmute the
microphone or to turn the speakerphone on or off. You can also press
and choose
whether to add a call, place the call on hold, mute the microphone, and more.
fid
1. Press
and then tap Hold to put the call on hold. When you put a call on hold,
the status bar displays the hold call icon
2. Press
, and then tap Unhold to resume the call.
on
Switching between calls
If you’re already on a call and accept another call, you can choose to switch between
the two calls.
2. To switch between the calls, tap the person you want to talk to on the screen.
TC
1. When you receive another call, tap Answer to accept the second call and put
the first call on hold.
3. To end the current call and return to the other call, tap End call.
43
Phone calls
Turning the speakerphone on during a call
To decrease potential damage to your hearing, do not hold HTC Explorer against
your ear when the speakerphone is on.
Do one of the following:
The speakerphone icon
09
§ On the call screen, tap
/1
§ Flip HTC Explorer over during a call (be sure that Flip for speaker is selected in
> Settings > Sound).
appears in the status bar when the speakerphone is on.
20
Muting the microphone during a call
11
To turn the speakerphone off, just flip HTC Explorer over again, facing it up. Or tap
again.
On the call screen, tap
to toggle between turning the microphone on or off.
When the microphone is turned off, the mute icon
appears in the status bar.
Ending a call
tia
Do one of the following to end the call:
en
§ On the call screen, tap End call.
If the display is off, press POWER to turn on the screen so you can tap End call.
fid
§ Slide open the Notifications panel, then tap
on
If the phone number of the person who called is not in your contacts list, you can
choose to save the number to your contacts list after you hang up.
TC
Setting up a conference call
Conference calling with your friends, family, or co-workers is easy. Make the first call
(or accept a call), and then simply dial each subsequent call to add it to the
conference.
Make sure your SIM card is enabled with conference calling service. Contact your
mobile operator for details.
1. Make a call to the first conference call participant.
2. When connected, press
, tap Add call, and then dial the number of the
second participant. The first participant is put on hold when you dial the second
participant.
3. When connected to the second participant, tap merge
44
Phone calls
4. To add another participant to the conference call, tap
on the conference call
screen, and then dial the number of the contact you want to invite to the
conference call.
to add the participant to the conference call.
and then select
/1
6. To talk to a person in the conference call in private, tap
Private call on the options menu.
5. When connected, tap
and then tap Finish this call on the options
09
To end the call with a participant, tap
menu.
11
To end the conference call, tap End call.
Internet calls
20
When you're connected to a Wi-Fi network, you can make and receive calls through
an Internet calling account.
tia
Before you add an Internet calling account, make sure that you've registered with
an Internet calling service that supports voice calls over Session Initiation Protocol
(SIP). Internet calls to phone numbers may incur additional fees.
Adding an Internet calling account
, and then tap Settings > Call.
en
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Under Internet call settings, tap Accounts.
fid
3. Tap Add account.
4. Enter your account details.
5. Press
to save your account.
on
6. To set HTC Explorer to receive Internet calls on your added account, tap the
Receive incoming calls check box.
TC
Making an Internet call
Make an Internet call to either your contact's Internet calling account or phone
number.
Call any of the following:
Internet
calling
account
§ In People, tap a contact who has an Internet calling account, and then
tap Internet call.
Phone
number
See Different ways of making calls on page 38. But first, set
HTC Explorer to use Internet calling for your outgoing calls. From the
Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Call. Tap Use Internet
calling, and then select either For all calls or Ask for each call.
§ In Call History, tap an Internet call log.
45
Phone calls
Using Call history
Use Call History to check missed calls, your dialed numbers, and received calls.
in the status bar when you miss a call.
1. Slide open the Notifications panel to check who the caller is.
/1
You will see the missed call icon
Checking a missed call
09
2. To return the call, tap the missed call notification. Then tap the caller’s name or
number on the Call History screen.
1. On the Home screen, tap
11
Checking calls in the Call History
3. On the Call History screen, you can:
20
2. Slide to the Call History tab.
§ Tap a name or number in the list to call.
§ Press and hold a name or number in the list to display the options menu.
to check only the call history of a particular contact.
tia
§ Tap
en
§ Press
, then tap View to display just a particular type of calls such as
missed calls or outgoing calls.
Adding a new phone number to your contacts from Call History
fid
1. On the Call History screen, press and hold the phone number that you want to
save, and then tap Save to People.
on
2. Choose whether to create a new contact or save the number to an existing
contact on HTC Explorer.
TC
3. Do any of the following:
§ When creating a new contact, enter the contact name, contact type, and
other information in the blank contact record that appears. The phone
number is automatically added to the mobile field in the phone section. To
store it as another type of number, for example a home number, tap the
Mobile button.
§ When saving the number to an existing contact, tap a contact stored on
HTC Explorer, and then select the number type.
4. Tap Save.
46
Phone calls
Clearing the Call History list
On the Call History screen, do one of the following:
Press and hold the name or number, and then tap Delete
from call history.
Clear the entire list
Press
, and then tap Remove call history. Tap Select all
> Delete.
09
/1
Remove one name or
number
11
Using Home dialing
20
When you're on a trip abroad, it's easy to dial friends and family from home. Your
home country code is automatically added when you make calls to your contacts on
HTC Explorer while roaming.
tia
1. On the Home screen, tap
HTC Explorer dials normally when entering phone numbers that are not saved in
People. If you want to call an unsaved phone number in your country, you still need
to enter a plus (+) sign and country code before the phone number.
en
2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contact
name on the phone keypad.
fid
3. Tap a phone number or contact from the contact list. HTC Explorer then dials
the number with your home country code.
Changing the default country code for Home dialing
, and then tap Settings.
on
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Call > Phone settings > Home dialing settings.
3. Choose the country that you want from the country code dropdown list.
TC
4. Tap OK.
Turning off Home dialing
If you prefer to manually enter complete phone numbers to call while roaming, you
can turn off Home dialing.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Call > Phone settings.
2. Clear the Home dialing check box.
47
Phone calls
Call services
HTC Explorer can directly link to the mobile phone network, and enable you to access
and change the settings of various phone services. Call services may include call
forwarding, call waiting, voicemail, and more. Contact your mobile operator to find out
about the availability of call services.
from the Home screen, and then tap Settings > Call.
/1
To open call services, press
Restrict outgoing calls to a fixed set of numbers. To enable this
feature, you must know your SIM card’s PIN2 code.
Voicemail service
Shows the current voicemail service being used.
Voicemail settings
Specify another voicemail number aside from the one specified
by your service provider.
Clear voicemail
notification
If you have a notification of a new voicemail, you can clear the
notification with this option.
Phone settings
Modify your phone settings such as automatic saving of an
unknown contact number when a call with that number ends.
Call forwarding
Select how you want to handle busy, unanswered, and
unreachable calls. You can also set the call forwarding option
for all incoming calls.
Call barring
settings
Choose whether to block various categories of incoming and
outgoing calls.
en
tia
20
11
09
Fixed Dialing
Numbers
Enable or disable operator services such as caller ID and call
waiting.
Cell broadcast
Enable or disable receipt of cell broadcast messages.
fid
Additional settings
on
Cell broadcast
settings
Accounts
Configure channels and language for cell broadcast messages.
Add, modify, or remove Internet calling accounts. You can also
choose whether to receive incoming Internet calls.
TC
Use Internet calling Select whether to use Internet calling for all calls you make or
for Internet address calls only, or to be asked which you prefer
for each call you make.
48
Phone calls
Turning Airplane mode on or off
In many countries, you are required by law to turn off wireless devices while on board
an aircraft. A way to turn off wireless functions quickly is to switch HTC Explorer to
Airplane mode.
09
/1
When you enable Airplane mode, all wireless radios on HTC Explorer are turned off,
including the call function, data services, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi. When you disable
Airplane mode, the call function is turned back on and the previous state of Bluetooth
and Wi-Fi is restored.
To turn Airplane mode on or off, press and hold POWER, and then tap Airplane mode.
is displayed in the status bar.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
When enabled, the Airplane mode icon
49
Search and Web browser
/1
Searching HTC Explorer and the Web
Search and Web browser
11
09
You can search for information on HTC Explorer and on the Web by using Google
Search. Some applications, such as People or Mail, have their own search function,
which you can use to search only within those applications.
Setting search options
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Search > Google search.
3. Choose the settings that you want.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
Display suggestions for Google web searches below the
search box as you type.
Use My Location
Include your location in searches to get local search
results.
Search history
Use suggestions from the web-based Google search
history, from your Google Account. Tap Manage search
history to view or manage the web search history
associated with your Google Account on the web browser.
fid
en
tia
Show web
suggestions
4. Press
on
5. Tap Searchable items, and then select the items you want included when doing
a search.
Performing searches on the web and HTC Explorer
TC
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Enter the search item in the search box. As you type, matching items on
HTC Explorer and suggestions from Google web search are shown as a list.
3. Do one of the following
§ To narrow your search, tap
Apps), and then tap
, select another search location (for example,
§ If what you’re searching for is in the list of suggestions, tap it in the list. The
item opens in the appropriate application.
§ To edit an item in the list, tap
where you can edit it.
. The item will appear in the search box,
to search the web. The
§ If what you’re searching for is not in the list, tap
web browser opens, displaying the results of a Google search.
50
Search and Web browser
Quickly looking up information on the Web
Quick Lookup helps you learn about something right on the spot. When you enter a
new word or phrase, you can easily look it up in popular websites or search services
such as Google Search and Wikipedia.
2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press
bottom tabs.
> Quick Lookup.
to close it first so you’ll see the
/1
1. From the Home screen, tap
11
4. Tap
09
3. Slide across the tabs to pick where you want to look up information. Then in the
search box, enter what you want to search for.
20
After looking up the item on one tab, you can slide to other tabs to automatically
look up the same term there.
Translating words to other languages
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Quick Lookup.
to close it first so you’ll see the
tia
2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press
bottom tabs.
3. Slide to the Google Translate tab.
en
4. Under From language, choose the original language, then enter the word or
phrase you want to translate.
fid
5. Under To language, choose from the languages available for translation.
on
6. Tap Translate.
Using the web browser
Do one of the following to open the web browser and start surfing the Web:
§ On the Home screen, tap Internet.
TC
§ From the Home screen, tap
> Internet.
Going to a webpage
1. On the browser screen, tap the URL box on top of the screen.
2. Enter the webpage address using the keyboard. As you enter the address,
matching webpage addresses will appear on the screen.
3. Do one of the following:
§ Tap an address to go directly to that webpage.
§ Continue typing in the webpage address, then tap
51
Search and Web browser
Changing the screen orientation
Turn HTC Explorer sideways to display the web browser in landscape orientation.
/1
If the screen orientation doesn’t change automatically, turn on automatic screen
orientation. From the Home screen, press
, tap Settings > Display, and then
select the Auto-rotate screen check box.
09
Navigating and zooming on a webpage
§ You can swipe your finger on the screen to navigate and view other areas of the
webpage.
11
§ Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly again
to zoom out. You can also use your fingers to spread or pinch the screen to
zoom in and out.
20
Selecting a link on a webpage
You can tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link for more options.
What to do
Webpage
address
(URLs)
§ Tap the link to open the webpage.
tia
Link
en
§ Press and hold the link to open a menu that allows you to open,
bookmark, copy to the clipboard, or share the link.
Email address § Tap to send an email message to the email address.
on
fid
§ Press and hold, then tap Copy on the menu to copy the email
address to the clipboard. You can paste the email address later
when creating a new contact or sending a new email message.
Selecting an address or phone number on a webpage
On a webpage, you can:
§ Tap an address to view the location on a map.
TC
§ Tap a phone number to call.
Opening a new browser window
Open multiple browser windows to make it easier for you to switch from one website
to another.
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. Tap
A new browser window opens.
and then tap Windows.
52
Search and Web browser
Switching between browser windows
1. While viewing a webpage, do one of the following:
§ Press
and then tap Windows.
§ Pinch the screen (zoom out) until you see the other browser windows.
20
11
09
/1
2. Slide your finger until the webpage you want to view appears.
to close a webpage.
en
Tap
tia
3. Tap a webpage to display it in full screen.
fid
Downloading from the Web
on
Do more than just browsing the Web. You can download files such as photos and
music as well as apps using the web browser.
Before downloading an app, check first its compatibility with HTC Explorer to make
sure it can be installed.
TC
Downloading apps from the Web
You can download apps directly from your favorite websites. Apps downloaded from
the Web can be from unknown sources. To protect HTC Explorer and your personal
data, we strongly recommend that you download and install only apps you trust.
1. Open your web browser, then go to the website where you can download the
app you want.
2. Follow the website's instructions for downloading the app.
Before you can install the downloaded app, you need to set HTC Explorer to allow
installation of third-party apps. From the Home screen, press
, then tap Settings >
Applications > Unknown sources.
53
Search and Web browser
Viewing your downloads
While viewing a webpage, press
and then tap More > Downloads.
/1
Viewing bookmarks and previously visited
pages
09
You can store as many bookmarks as you want on HTC Explorer. You can also access
a convenient list of the sites you have visited, or quickly view the pages that you
access most often.
11
Bookmarking a webpage
1. While viewing a webpage, press
, and then tap Add > Add bookmark.
20
2. To bookmark the web page under a certain category (such as sports or dining),
tap Add tags and enter a tag name. This groups similar web pages so you can
easily locate them.
tia
Opening a bookmark
3. Edit the bookmark name if needed, and then tap Done.
1. While viewing a webpage, press
, and then tap Bookmarks.
en
2. Do one of the following:
§ On the Bookmarks tab
and then tap it.
, navigate to the bookmark you want to open,
fid
§ On the Tags tab
, open a tag group, navigate to the bookmark you want
to open, and then tap it.
on
Editing a bookmark
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. On the Bookmarks tab
TC
3. Tap
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, press
and then tap Edit.
at the right of the bookmark you want to edit.
4. Enter your changes, and then tap Done.
Viewing a previously visited page
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. On the History tab
page.
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, navigate to the page you want to view and then tap the
Clearing the list of previously visited pages
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. On the History tab
, press
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, and then tap Clear history.
54
Search and Web browser
Viewing a page that you often visit
1. While viewing a webpage, press
, navigate to the page you want to view, and then
Clearing the list of most visited pages
2. On the Most visited tab
, press
, and then tap Bookmarks.
09
1. While viewing a webpage, press
/1
2. On the Most visited tab
tap the page.
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, and then tap Clear all.
1. While viewing a webpage, press
11
Changing the view of bookmarks or most visited pages
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, press
, and then tap
20
2. On the Bookmarks tab
or the Most visited tab
Thumbnails, List, or Grid to change the view.
For example, if you are in Thumbnails view and you want to view bookmarks in
and tap List, then press
and tap Grid.
a grid, press
tia
Setting browser options
en
Customize the web browser to suit your browsing style. Set display, privacy, and
security options when using the web browser.
fid
From the browser screen, press
, and then tap More > Settings.
Setting your home page
, and then tap More > Settings > Set home
on
1. From the browser screen, press
page.
2. Select the home page you want to use.
TC
Browsing full versions of all websites
Some websites display a mobile version of their pages on phone web browsers. You
can choose to view the full version of all pages, even for these sites.
From the browser screen, press
view check box.
, tap More > Settings, and then clear the Mobile
55
Search and Web browser
Choosing when to show Adobe Flash content
Choose which Adobe® Flash® content you want to see on a webpage, and when you
want to view it.
, and then tap More > Settings > Enable
1. From the browser screen, press
plugins.
/1
2. Tap On demand.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
After selecting On demand, you can show the Adobe Flash content by tapping
the webpage.
on
56
Accounts and sync
About online accounts
09
HTC Explorer can sync with your Facebook and email accounts.
/1
Accounts and sync
The information you can get includes:
11
§ Gmail, Exchange ActiveSync, and other POP3/IMAP email.
§ Google and Exchange ActiveSync contacts, as well as your friends’ contact
information in Facebook.
20
§ Calendar events from your Google Account(s), from Exchange ActiveSync, and
from your Facebook account.
§ Status updates and links shared by your friends and yourself on Facebook.
tia
§ Facebook photo uploads.
en
You can set up your Exchange ActiveSync and POP3/IMAP email accounts on
HTC Explorer either in the Mail app or the Accounts & sync settings.
Synchronizing with a Google Account
on
fid
Signing in to your Google Account lets you sync Gmail and your Google contacts and
calendars between HTC Explorer and the Web. You also need to sign in to a Google
Account to use Google apps such as Google Talk and Android Market.
TC
If you skipped adding a Google Account when you first set up HTC Explorer, you
may encounter problems when using some Google apps. If these problems persist,
you may need to factory reset HTC Explorer and enter your Google Account details
when you set up HTC Explorer again.
Adding more Google Accounts
You can add more than one Google Account. However, subsequent Google Accounts
can only sync contacts, emails, and calendar events. Other Google services use the
first Google Account you added.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Add account > Google.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign in to an account or create a new
account.
57
Accounts and sync
Forgot your Google Account password?
If you have forgotten your Google Account password, you can try to recover it
by going to the Google website.
/1
1. On HTC Explorer or on your computer, open your web browser and go
to https://www.google.com/accounts/ForgotPasswd.
09
2. Enter the email address or username that you use to sign in to your
Google Account and click Submit.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to reset your password.
20
11
If you don’t have an alternate email address or cannot access the email
account you used to create your Google Account, you can reset your Google
Account after 24 hours by answering the security question for password
recovery.
tia
Adding a social network account
en
If you skipped signing in to your social network account (such as Facebook) when
you first turned on and set up HTC Explorer, you can still add the account in the
settings.
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Add account, and then tap the account type you want to add.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter the account information.
on
Your social network account is then added to the list on the Accounts & sync screen.
Depending on how you configured the account, the new information may start
synchronizing with HTC Explorer.
TC
Managing your online accounts
Changing general sync settings
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Select or clear the following:
Background
data
If this is selected, apps can send and receive online account
information even if you are not currently using them.
Auto-sync
If this is selected, apps can use the sync schedule defined in
the account settings. If this is cleared, you will need to sync
accounts manually.
58
Accounts and sync
Synchronizing an account manually
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap the account that you want to sync.
3. Tap Sync now.
/1
Changing account settings
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
You can change settings such as the sync frequency and the types of information
synchronized, the kinds of notification you receive, and the way that account
information is displayed.
2. On the Accounts & sync screen, tap the account that you want to edit.
20
3. Tap the type of information you want to sync or select an item to edit its
settings.
Removing an account
tia
You can remove an account to delete it and all information associated with it from
HTC Explorer, for example email, contacts, or settings. Removing an account does not
delete information from the online service itself.
en
You cannot remove some accounts, such as the first Google account you signed
into, except by deleting all personal information from HTC Explorer with a hard
reset.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap the account that you want to remove.
TC
on
3. Tap Remove account, and then confirm that you want to remove the account.
59
People
People
/1
Transferring contacts from your old phone
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Transfer.
2. Tap Next to begin.
20
3. Choose your old phone's name and model.
11
09
Easily transfer contacts from your old phone to HTC Explorer through Bluetooth.
Depending on your old phone’s model, you may also transfer other types of data such
as calendar events and text messages to HTC Explorer.
4. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to discoverable mode.
5. On HTC Explorer, tap Next to continue. HTC Explorer automatically turns
Bluetooth on and searches for Bluetooth devices.
tia
6. From the device list, choose your old phone and then tap Next. HTC Explorer
then tries to pair with your old phone. You’ll see a security passkey on the
screen.
en
7. On your old phone, enter this passkey or simply confirm it.
fid
8. Select the Contacts check box (and other supported types of data you want to
import), and then tap Next.
TC
on
9. When HTC Explorer finishes importing data, tap Done.
60
People
About the People app
With the People app, easily manage your communications with your contacts via
phone, messaging, and email. You can also link your contacts to their social network
account such as Facebook to see their updates and events from the account all in one
place.
> People.
2. Tap one of the following tabs:
Phone
20
Launches the Phone dialer screen.
11
1. From the Home screen, tap
09
/1
And that's not all. If you have the same contacts from different sources, People lets
you merge their contact information so you won't have duplicate entries in your
contacts list.
People
Gives you access to all contacts on HTC Explorer, online accounts, and
more.
tia
Groups
en
Lets you assign contacts to groups so you can easily send an SMS, MMS,
or email message to a whole group.
Call History
TC
on
fid
Lists all your dialed numbers and received and missed calls.
61
People
Your contacts list
The People app lists all contacts stored on HTC Explorer and from the online accounts
you're logged in to. When you open People after you've just logged in to a new
account, you'll be asked whether to add contacts from that account to your contacts
list.
/1
Your contacts list also displays the contacts stored on your SIM card (usually marked
with the SIM card icon ).
09
You can:
11
§ Open your profile and edit your own contact
information.
§ Create, edit, or find contacts.
20
§ See status updates from friends in your social
network account such as Facebook.
§ Tap a contact's name to open the contact details
screen for that contact.
tia
§ See a notification icon such as
when a contact
has sent you new messages or when it's the
contact's birthday.
fid
en
§ Check out who's online in Google Talk. Online
status icons are displayed if you’re signed in to
Google Talk on HTC Explorer. For example,
means the contact is available to chat.
Filtering your contacts list
on
You can choose to only display contacts from particular account types (for example,
Google contacts or Facebook contacts).
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. On the People tab, tap
> People.
on the top bar to show a list of your online accounts.
TC
3. Choose the online accounts that contain the contacts you want to display in
your contacts list, and then press
to save your selection.
4. To set more options on sorting your contacts, press
and then tap Settings.
62
People
Setting up your profile
Store your personal contact information to easily send it to other people.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. Do one of the following:
09
/1
§ If you're logged in to any of your online accounts such as your Google
Account or Facebook for HTC Sense, tap your name or email address, and
then tap Edit my contact card.
3. Enter or edit your name and contact details.
11
§ If you're not logged in to your online accounts, tap Me, and then choose
whether to link your profile to an existing contact entry that already
contains your personal information or edit your profile.
20
4. Tap
or your photo, and then choose whether to take your self-portrait or use
another photo for your profile.
5. Tap Save.
What you can see on your profile
tia
When you tap My profile, you'll see the following tabs:
Details
en
Shows your own contact details. You'll also see your most recent posts in your
social network (such as Facebook if you're signed in to Facebook for HTC
Sense).
fid
From this tab, you can edit your profile or share it with others.
Updates and events
on
Shows the updates and events that you've posted in your social network .
Gallery
TC
Shows your Facebook albums and photos.
Importing contacts from your SIM card
When you import SIM contacts, you can either store them on HTC Explorer or add
them to your Google contacts or Exchange ActiveSync contacts, if you have set up
the relevant accounts.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Import/Export > Import from SIM card.
3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,
tap the type for the imported contacts.
63
People
4. Do one of the following:
§ Tap one or more SIM contacts you want to import.
§ To import all contacts, tap Select all.
5. Tap Save.
2. Tap
> People.
11
3. Tap the Name field, and then enter the contact name.
09
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
Adding a new contact
20
Tap
if you want to separately enter the contact's first, middle, and last name.
Depending on the contact type, you may also be able to add a name prefix (such as
Mr. or Ms.) or a name suffix (such as Ph.D., Jr, or Sr).
4. Select the Contact type, for example Google or Exchange ActiveSync. This
determines which account the contact will sync with.
tia
Some fields may not be available when you’re adding contacts to your SIM card.
5. Enter the contact information in the fields provided.
fid
6. Tap Save.
en
Press
if you want to close the onscreen keyboard first and easily scroll
through the other fields.
on
Searching for contacts
In addition to searching contacts by name or email address, you can set the People
app to search by other criteria such as by their group name or company.
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Settings > Search contacts by.
3. Choose the types of criteria to search for, and then tap Done.
When performing your search, simply enter the first few characters of the item you're
looking for in the search box. Matching contacts will then be listed.
64
People
Importing a contact from an Exchange
ActiveSync account
You can search for a work contact from your Exchange ActiveSync account, and then
copy it on HTC Explorer.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
You need to have your Exchange ActiveSync account set up on HTC Explorer first.
> People.
. Under Company contacts, matching names are listed.
11
3. Tap
09
2. In the search box, enter the first few letters of the contact's name or email
address.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
4. Tap the name of the contact you want copied on HTC Explorer, and then tap
Save to People.
65
People
Merging contact information
/1
If you have the same contacts on HTC Explorer, Google Account, and your social
network account such as Facebook, HTC Explorer will try to combine them
automatically or let you decide which contacts to combine. Combining the same
contacts avoids duplicate entries in your contacts list.
Accepting matched contacts suggestions
09
When HTC Explorer finds contacts that can be merged, you’ll see a link icon
the notifications area of the status bar.
in
fid
en
tia
20
11
1. Slide the Notifications panel down, and then tap Matched contacts suggestion.
You'll see a list of suggested contacts to merge.
2. To merge, tap
on
3. Tap OK.
If you don’t want to merge any of your contacts, tap Dismiss all.
TC
Viewing a list of all your linked contacts
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. Press
, and then tap Linked contacts (or More > Linked contacts). The All
linked contacts screen then opens where you can see the account types and
information merged.
3. You can choose to break the link of an account type or relink.
4. When you're done, tap OK.
Manually merging contact information
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) you want to link.
66
People
3. Tap
or
(if there are suggested links).
4. You can:
§ Under Suggest links, tap
to link the contact to an account.
§ Under Add contact, tap one of the options to link to another contact.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
Breaking the link
> People.
beside an account type to break
20
4. Under the Linked contacts section, tap
the link.
11
3. Tap
09
2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) whose link you want to
break.
Backing up your contacts to the storage card
, and then tap Import/Export > Export to SD card.
tia
2. Press
> People.
1. From the Home screen, tap
en
3. Select an account or type of contacts to export, then tap OK.
Importing contacts from the storage card
fid
You can only import contacts that were exported to the storage card using the
Export to SD card feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
on
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Import/Export > Import from SD card.
TC
3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,
tap the type for the imported contacts.
Contact information and conversations
When you tap a contact on the People screen, the contact details screen opens,
showing you the information you've stored or linked for that contact.
The contact details screen has the following tabs:
67
People
Details
Shows the information you have stored for the contact. Get in touch with the
contact directly by tapping any of the displayed methods. For example, if the
contact has a stored work phone number, tap Call work.
Thread
/1
Shows SMS messages and emails you've received from the contact. It also lists
all your incoming, outgoing, and missed calls to and from the contact.
09
From this tab, you can reply to a message, send an email, or call the contact.
Updates
11
Shows the contact’s updates and events from your social network account (for
example, Facebook).
20
If you see a notification of the contact’s birthday under the Events section, you
can tap the notification and choose how you want to greet your contact, such
as to write on the person's Facebook wall.
Gallery
tia
Shows the linked contact’s Facebook albums and photos.
Editing a contact’s information
> People.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and hold the contact, and then tap Edit contact.
fid
The contact details of your Facebook contacts cannot be edited.
3. Enter the new information for the contact.
on
4. Tap Save.
Deleting contacts
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Delete.
3. Select the contacts you want to remove, and then tap Delete.
4. When prompted, tap OK.
68
People
Sending contact information as a vCard
Easily share with others your own contact information or any contact from
HTC Explorer.
> People.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
2. Do the any of the following:
Do this
Someone's contact
information
Press and hold the name of the contact (not the icon or
photo) whose contact information you want to send,
and then tap Send contact as vCard.
Your contact
information
Press and hold My profile, and then tap Send my profile.
11
09
To send
20
3. From the available options, choose how you want to send the vCard.
4. Select the type of information you want to send, and then tap Send.
Sending multiple contact cards
tia
Easily share with others the contact information of several contacts from your
HTC Explorer.
2. Press
> People.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
, and then tap Send contacts.
fid
3. Select the contacts whose contact information you want to share, and then tap
Send.
on
If you can't see the Send button while the onscreen keyboard is open, press
close the keyboard.
to
4. Choose how you want to send the contact cards:
TC
Bluetooth Tap Scan for devices, and then tap the device to which you want to
send the contact cards. Follow the onscreen messages on
HTC Explorer and the other device to pair them and send the files.
Mail
Compose and send your email message, with the contact cards
attached.
69
People
Contact groups
/1
Assign contacts to groups so you can easily send a message or email to a whole
group. You can also sync groups on HTC Explorer with the groups in your Google
account, accessible via your computer’s web browser. We’ve also added the Frequent
group as a special group type that automatically stores the contacts you dial or get
calls from the most.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
3. Enter a name for the group, and then tap
11
2. On the Groups tab, tap
09
Creating a group
20
4. Select the contacts you want to add to the group, and then tap Save
If your contacts list is long, you can use the search bar to search for contacts
quickly, or press
to hide the onscreen keyboard and scroll through the list.
5. Tap
to select a photo for the group.
tia
6. Tap Save.
Editing a contact group
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. On the Group tab, press and hold the group, and then tap Edit group.
fid
3. You can:
§ Tap the group name to change the name. You can only change the name
for groups that you have created.
on
§ Tap the icon to the left of the group name to change or remove the group
photo.
§ To add contacts to the group, tap
and then tap Save.
, select the contacts you want to add,
TC
§ To remove a contact from the group, tap the box beside the contact name.
4. Tap Save.
70
People
Sending a message or email to a group
> People.
/1
1. From the Home screen, tap
You will be charged for each message sent. For example, if you send a message to
a group of five people, you will be charged for five messages.
2. On the Group tab, tap the group you want to send a message or email to.
09
3. Go to the Group action tab, and then do one of the following:
§ Tap Send group message to send a message to the group.
Rearranging your contact groups
2. On the Groups tab, press
> People.
20
1. From the Home screen, tap
11
§ Tap Send group mail to send an email to the group.
, and then tap Edit group.
on
fid
en
tia
3. Press and hold
at the end of the group you want to move. When the row is
highlighted, drag it to its new position.
4. Tap Save.
TC
Rearranging the members of a contact group
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. On the Groups tab, tap the group to see its members.
3. Press
, and then tap Edit group.
4. Press and hold
at the end of the contact’s name you want to move. When
the row is highlighted, drag it to its new position.
5. Tap Save.
71
People
Deleting groups
You can only delete groups that you have created.
> People.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
2. On the Groups tab, you can:
§ Press and hold a group you want to delete, and then tap Delete group.
Adding People widgets
11
09
§ Press
and then tap Edit groups to choose several contact groups to
remove.
on
fid
en
tia
20
Stay in touch with different circles of friends or colleagues in your life. You can add
several People widgets on the Home screen, with a different group of contacts on
each widget.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget > People.
TC
3. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
4. Select the group you want to add as a widget.
5. Repeat the above steps to add another People widget.
Setting the default communication method
Depending on how you often reach your contacts, you can choose a different
communication method for each of the contacts on the People widget.
1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.
2. Tap a contact's name or status update (not the photo) on the widget to open
the person's contact details screen.
72
People
3. Tap Set default action, and then tap the communication method you want for
the contact.
4. Press
to return to the People widget on the Home screen.
Changing the default communication method
/1
1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.
09
2. Tap a contact's name or status update on the widget to open the person’s
contact details screen.
3. Tap Set default action.
5. Press
11
4. On the Select default action screen, tap the communication method you want
for the contact.
to return to the People widget on the Home screen.
20
Getting in touch with a contact
1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.
On the People widget:
tia
2. Tap a contact's photo (not the name or status update) on the widget. The
default communication method you've set for this contact will be performed.
to open the People app and view all your contacts.
fid
§ Tap
en
§ Tap a contact's name or status update to open the contact details screen for that
contact.
Adding group members to a People widget
TC
on
You can add more members to the contact group that's on a People widget.
§ To add just one member, tap
§ To add several members, tap
73
Social
Social
/1
Facebook for HTC Sense
09
With Facebook for HTC Sense, you can:
§ See all your Facebook contacts and their instant status updates in People.
11
When you tap a contact in People, slide to the
Updates tab to see updates such as posted status
messages, uploads, and profile changes.
en
tia
20
When there is a notification of the contact’s
birthday, you can tap the notification to send a
greeting.
You can also upload one or more photos to
Facebook, then tag and add captions that go with
it.
When you’re viewing the albums of a Facebook
friend, you can also share a link to a particular
album, or comment on the album photos.
TC
on
fid
§ See Facebook photos right on the Gallery app.
§ Check your friends’ Facebook status updates in Friend Stream™.
§ View your Facebook events and your friends’ birthdays on the Calendar app.
74
Social
§ Signing in to your Facebook account from the Accounts & sync settings or the
Facebook app (preinstalled or downloaded from Android Market) automatically
signs you in to Facebook for HTC Sense.
09
Enjoying Facebook in Friend Stream
/1
§ You may need to authorize Facebook for HTC Sense to connect to your Facebook
account.
11
Post your status updates, write messages on your friends' Facebook walls, or share
your location with your social network.
Posting a message on a friend's Facebook wall
1. In Friend Stream, tap
2. Tap
20
Quickly write a wall post to your Facebook friends in Friend Stream.
> Facebook.
> My wall, and then tap a friend from the list.
to attach a photo.
tia
4. Tap
3. Enter your message.
5. Tap Post.
en
Commenting on and liking Facebook posts
TC
on
fid
Tap someone’s status update on the All updates tab, and do any of the following:
§ Tap a photo or the album name shown in the status
update to view and comment on the album photos
using the Gallery app.
§ Tap Like to like the person’s status update.
§ Tap the text box, and then enter what you think
about the person’s status update.
75
Social
Sharing your location with your Facebook friends
Eating out in your fave restaurant? Tell your friends where you are and invite them
along.
/1
§ You must be signed in to Facebook for HTC Sense to use this feature in Friend
Stream.
1. Go to the Locations tab, and then tap
09
§ In order to find your location, you also need to enable location sources in Settings
> Location.
11
2. Do any of the following:
§ Tap a place from the list.
20
§ Tap
, type in your current location name and description, and then tap
Done.
3. Tap Check in.
tia
5. When done, tap Check in.
4. On the next screen, you can add your status message and even tag the friends
you're with.
en
Chatting in Google Talk
fid
Google Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It lets you communicate with
other people that also use Google Talk. If you signed in to your Google Account when
you first set up HTC Explorer, you are already signed in to Google Talk.
> Talk.
on
To open Google Talk, on the Home screen tap
Chatting with a friend
TC
1. In Google Talk, tap a friend in the Friends list.
2. Enter your message in the text box. You can also insert a smiley by pressing
and then tapping More > Insert smiley.
3. Tap Send.
4. While chatting, press
and then tap any of these options:
Chat off
record
Your Google Talk messages are stored in the Chats folder of
your Gmail account. Tap this option if you don’t want to store
your chat messages.
Switch chats
If you have more than one chat going, tap to switch chat with
another friend.
Friends list
Return to the Friends list.
Social
Add another friend to your chat. The friend you invited and
the friend you're currently chatting will receive an invitation to
a group chat. Each one who accepts the invitation joins the
group chat.
End chat
End your current chat.
More
Clear the chat history, insert a smiley or view your friend’s
contact details.
Add to chat
09
/1
76
Accepting a chat invitation
11
When a friend sends you a Google Talk message, you receive a notification. Their
entry in the Friends list displays the message.
Do one of the following:
§ In the Friends list, tap the friend who sent you the invitation to chat.
20
§ Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the chat notification.
Changing your online status and picture
1. In Google Talk's Friends list, tap your name to open the Set Status screen.
tia
2. Enter your new status message. Or press
the list.
to choose a custom status from
en
3. Tap the online status beside your picture, and then select the status you want
on the menu.
4. Tap your picture, and then do one of the following:
fid
§ Tap Remove to remove your photo.
§ Tap Change to select another picture.
on
5. Tap Done.
TC
Your online status, message, and picture appear in your contacts' Friends list and in
other apps where your Google Talk status are displayed.
77
Social
Adding and managing friends
The Friends list is where you add and manage your friends in Google Talk.
In Google Talk's Friends list, you can:
1. Press
, and then tap Add friend.
Invite a friend
/1
2. Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or Gmail address of the
friend you want to add.
09
3. Tap Send invitation.
Initially, only those friends that you often chat with — the most
popular — are shown in the Friends list. To view all your friends,
press
, and then tap All friends. To view only friends that you
often chat with, press
, and then tap Most popular.
11
View all
friends
1. Press
You can block a friend from sending you messages. When blocked,
your friend is removed from the Friends list and is added to the
Blocked friends list.
, and then tap All friends.
tia
Block a friend
20
Make a friend 1. Press
, and then tap All friends.
popular
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Always show friend.
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Block friend.
1. Press
, and then tap More > Blocked.
en
Unblock a
friend
2. Tap the friend you want to unblock and then tap OK.
fid
View all
Press
, and then tap More > Invites. Friends who have not yet
invited friends accepted your invitation are listed on the screen.
on
Changing settings or signing out
In Google Talk's Friends list, press
and then tap:
§ Settings to change the app and notification settings.
TC
§ Sign out to sign out.
78
Camera
Camera
/1
Camera basics
09
Whether traveling for business or fun, enjoy taking photos and videos of your trip and
encounters with HTC Explorer.
from the Home
11
§ To open the camera in photo mode and take photos, tap
screen, and then tap Camera.
20
§ To open the camera directly in video mode so you can immediately start
capturing videos, tap
from the Home screen, and then tap Camcorder.
Viewfinder screen
TC
on
fid
en
tia
You’ll find the following onscreen controls on the Viewfinder screen:
Zoom bar
Photo/Video mode switch
Shutter release/Record button
Effects button
Gallery button
79
Camera
Zooming
Before taking a photo or video, you can first use the onscreen zoom bar to zoom in or
out of your subject.
11
09
/1
Simply slide your finger up or down the zoom bar to zoom in or out.
20
When you're recording video, the zoom bar is always shown onscreen. You can freely
zoom in or out while recording.
Taking your closeup shot
to open the settings menu panel.
en
1. Press
tia
Having a hard time taking your own closeup shot? With the camera, it's easy. Just set
it to automatically take your self portrait. You won't even need to tap the shutter
release button.
2. Tap Self-portrait.
to close the settings menu panel.
fid
3. Press
4. Turn the camera to face you.
on
Once the camera detects your face, it automatically focuses and takes your photo.
Taking a photo
TC
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Camera.
2. Before taking the photo, you can zoom in or out first on your subject.
3. Choose the resolution and other camera settings you want to use.
4. Choose an effect to apply to your photo.
5. Point the camera and focus on your subject.
6. When you're ready to take the photo, tap
7. Choose what you want to do with the photo you’ve just taken.
80
Camera
Recording video
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Camcorder.
2. Choose the video quality and other camera settings you want to use.
3. Choose an effect to apply to your video.
to start recording.
6. You can freely zoom in or out while recording video.
again.
11
7. To stop recording, tap
09
5. Tap
/1
4. Frame your subject on the Viewfinder screen.
8. Choose what you want to do with the video you’ve just recorded.
20
Adding effects
Want to make your photos look more interesting? Easy. Use the available camera
effects to make your photos look like they’ve been taken through special lenses and
filters. You can also add certain effects to videos.
1. Tap
tia
Choose an effect first before you start taking a photo or video.
en
2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one that you like.
fid
After capturing
on
After capturing a photo or video, the Review screen will display the photo or the
starting image of the video that you have just captured. Tap the onscreen buttons to
choose what you want to do next.
Delete the photo or video
TC
Send the photo or video to your computer or another device using Bluetooth,
send it by email, or select a social network where you want to upload it to.
Choose how you want to use the photo, such as by setting it as your wallpaper.
Watch the video.
81
Camera
Changing camera settings
Open the menu panel to access and change camera settings.
Select this option to take your own closeup shot.
/1
Self-portrait (photo
mode only)
To open the camera settings, press
09
Self-timer (photo mode Set a time delay before your camera automatically takes
only)
the photo.
Slide your finger across each of the slider bars to adjust the
exposure, contrast, saturation, and sharpness.
White balance
White balance enables the camera to capture colors more
accurately by adjusting to your current lighting
environment.
Resolution/Video
quality
Choose a photo or video resolution to use.
20
11
Image adjustments
tia
ISO (photo mode only) Choose an ISO level or set it back to Auto. Higher ISO
numbers are better for taking pictures in low light
conditions.
Set the time for a captured photo or video to be displayed
on the Review screen before the camera changes back to
the Viewfinder screen.
en
Review duration
fid
Widescreen (photo
mode only)
When this check box is selected (default), photo resolutions
available for selection are in 3:2 ratio and you can use the
entire Viewfinder screen to frame your subject. When not
selected, photo resolutions available for selection are in
standard 4:3 ratio.
TC
on
Geo-tag photos (photo Select to store GPS location in your captured photos.
mode only)
Auto enhance (photo
mode only)
Select to reduce noise when using a high ISO setting and to
automatically adjust photo brightness.
Shutter sound
Select to play a sound when you press the shutter release
or record button.
Grid (photo mode
only)
Select to display a grid on the Viewfinder screen so you can
easily frame and center your subject before taking the
photo.
Record with audio
(video mode only)
Select to record audio when capturing videos.
Reset to default
Change the camera settings back to default.
82
Photos, videos, and music
Photos, videos, and music
/1
Gallery
09
About the Gallery app
11
Relive the fun while viewing photos and videos of your latest travels or your pet’s
newest tricks. Get an audience by tagging your Facebook friends.
20
To start using Gallery, check first if you have photos or videos copied on
HTC Explorer.
What’s more, you can edit and add effects to your photos. You can also easily use a
photo as your contact icon, location icon, or wallpaper.
Selecting an album
TC
on
fid
en
tia
From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery. The Gallery app opens on the Albums screen
where your photos and videos are organized by albums for easy viewing.
83
Photos, videos, and music
Viewing photos and videos
After you’ve selected an album, you can browse through your photos and videos.
20
11
09
/1
Slide your finger up or down to scroll through the thumbnails. Tap a photo or video to
view it in full screen.
tia
While viewing a photo in full screen, you can press
, and then tap Show on map
to see the location where you took the photo. (Show on map is available when
you've enabled Geo-tag photos in Camera.)
en
Zooming in or out on a photo
There are two ways you can zoom in or out of a photo.
fid
§ Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly again
to zoom out.
TC
on
§ Press your thumb and index finger on the screen and then spread your fingers
apart to zoom in; pinch your fingers together to zoom out.
Viewing photos as a slideshow
1. Select an album that has the photos you want to view as a slideshow.
2. Tap Slideshow.
Tap the screen to show the playback controls.
84
Photos, videos, and music
Watching videos
While browsing an album, tap a video to play it.
20
11
09
§ Use the onscreen controls to play, pause, or stop the video.
from the Homescreen, and
/1
Another way to easily get to your videos is to tap
then tap Videos.
tia
Editing your photos
§ Tap More > Full screen or More > Best fit to toggle between full and best-fit
screens.
Rotating a photo
en
Do basic editing tasks on your photos such as rotate and crop. You can also enhance
your photos by applying effects such as high contrast, vintage, and more.
fid
1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.
2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to rotate.
on
3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap either Rotate left or Rotate right.
Cropping a photo
1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.
TC
2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to crop.
3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Crop. You’ll see a crop box
around the photo.
4. To adjust the crop box size, press and hold the edge of the box.
85
Photos, videos, and music
5. When directional arrows appear, drag your finger inward or outward to resize
the crop box.
6. To move the crop box to the part of the photo that you want to crop, drag the
crop box to the desired position.
/1
The cropped photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.
7. Tap Save to keep the changes.
1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.
09
Adding effects
11
2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to add effects to.
3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Effects. On the panel that opens,
you’ll see options available to you.
20
4. Tap an effect to apply on the photo.
5. Tap Save to keep the changes.
The enhanced photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.
tia
Sending your photos and videos
en
Send photos and videos via email or MMS to your computer or another device using
Bluetooth.
Sending photos or videos by email
fid
You can send several photos, videos, or both in an email message. They are added as
file attachments in your email.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
on
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
3. Tap
and then tap Gmail or Mail.
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.
TC
5. Compose your message and then tap
(Gmail) or Send (Mail).
If you selected Mail and you have multiple email accounts, the default email
account will be used.
Sending a photo or video by MMS
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
3. Tap
and then tap Messages.
86
Photos, videos, and music
4. Tap the photo or video you want to send. The photo or video is automatically
added into the MMS message.
5. To add another photo or video to your slideshow attachment, tap
tap Picture or Video.
and then
6. Compose your message and then tap Send.
/1
Sending photos or videos using Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap
09
You can select several photos, videos, or both and send them to someone’s device or
your computer using Bluetooth.
> Gallery.
3. Tap
11
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
and then tap Bluetooth.
20
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer and
connect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the files can be sent.
Sharing your photos and videos on the Web
tia
Using the Gallery app, you can share photos and videos on your social networks. And
you can post videos on YouTube.
en
You can also use the Camera or Camcorder app to share a photo or video right
after you’ve captured it.
fid
Sharing photos or videos on Facebook
on
You need to be logged in to your account to be able to upload photos or videos.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
TC
3. Tap
and then tap Facebook for HTC Sense.
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.
5. Select which album to upload to and set privacy settings for the uploaded
photos or videos.
6. Tap Add tag and description, and then enter a different caption on each photo
or video.
7. To tag friends on your photos, tap Tag this photo. You can then tap the part
where your friend is, and then select who you want to tag from the list. Repeat
this step to continue tagging friends.
87
Photos, videos, and music
8. Slide to the left to go to the next photo or video. When finished adding tags and
descriptions, tap Done.
9. Tap Done.
Sharing photos on Picasa
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
3. Tap
11
2. Tap the album that has the photos you want to share.
09
/1
You need to be signed in to a Google Account to be able to upload photos to the
Picasa™ photo organizing service.
and then tap Picasa.
4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap Next.
20
5. Enter a caption for the photos you're uploading.
6. Select the online album where you want to upload the photos, or tap
create a new album.
to
tia
Sharing videos on YouTube
7. Tap Upload.
You can share your videos by uploading them to YouTube.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that has the videos you want to share.
and then tap YouTube.
fid
3. Tap
4. Select the videos you want to share and then tap Next. Sign in to your YouTube
or Google Account, if you’re asked to do so.
on
5. Enter a title for the videos you're uploading.
6. Tap More details where you can enter information such as description and tags,
and select a privacy option.
TC
7. Tap Upload.
88
Photos, videos, and music
Viewing photos in your social networks
Right in the Gallery app, check what you and your friends have uploaded to your
social networks.
Viewing photos on Facebook
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to view Facebook photos.
> Gallery.
09
2. Tap the Facebook tab.
11
3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account on the list to view the photos in
the account.
You can view photos in your online albums in the same way as you view photos on
your storage card.
20
Commenting on photos in your social networks
Add comments to your uploaded photos as well as your friends’ photos.
1. Do one of the following:
tia
§ While browsing online albums, press and hold a photo and then tap Add
comment.
en
§ While viewing a photo in full screen, tap anywhere on the screen, and then
tap
2. Tap the box that says “Write a comment.”
TC
on
fid
3. Enter your text, and then tap Comment.
89
Photos, videos, and music
Music
Listening to music
Enjoy listening to songs and music on HTC Explorer using the Music app.
1. From the Home screen, tap
screen.
09
/1
You need to copy music files to your storage card first to use the Music app to play
music.
> Music. The Music app opens in the Now playing
11
2. Swipe your finger left or right across the screen to go to the next or previous
music album.
20
3. Tap the onscreen icons to control music playback, select a song to play, repeat
songs, and more.
Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off when
button is gray.)
on
fid
en
tia
Press and drag your finger across the
progress bar to jump to any part of the
song.
Go to the library.
Switch between showing the Now playing
list and Now playing screen. You can
rearrange songs in the Now playing list.
Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat all
songs, repeat current song, and don’t
repeat.
Playing music from the Lock screen
TC
When you’re listening to music and the screen turns off, press POWER to turn the
screen back on and control the music playback directly on the Lock screen.
If you don’t see the playback controls on the Lock screen, swipe your finger from left
to right on the box onscreen.
Photos, videos, and music
11
09
/1
90
20
You can also pause music playback right from the Notifications panel.
About the Music widget
tia
Browsing music in the library
You can use the Music widget to play music right from your Home screen.
en
1. Tap
on the Music app’s Now playing screen or Now playing list to go to the
library. In the library, your music is organized by categories such as Artists and
Albums. Choose a category by tapping one of the tabs at the bottom of the
screen.
fid
2. Tap a song in a category to play it. The Now playing list is updated with the
song list from your selected category.
on
You can add, remove, or rearrange the tabs in the library.
TC
Creating a playlist
Personalize your music experience by creating music playlists. Make a playlist
containing just your favorite songs or create one to match your mood for the day.
You can make as many playlists as you like.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap
> Music.
to go to the library.
3. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
4. Tap
5. Enter a playlist name, and then tap Add songs to playlist.
6. Choose a category.
91
Photos, videos, and music
7. Select the check boxes of songs you want to add to the playlist and then tap
Add.
8. Tap Save.
Playing the songs in a playlist
/1
1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
09
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
3. Tap the first song or any song in the playlist.
11
When you tap a song in the list to play it, the Now playing screen is updated with the
songs from your playlist.
Managing playlists
20
After creating a playlist, you can add more songs to it, rearrange their order, and
more.
3. Press
tia
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
, and then choose what you want to do:
fid
en
Add more songs to 1. Tap Add songs.
a playlist
2. Go to the Songs category or any other category.
TC
on
Rearrange songs
3. Select the songs you want to add to the playlist and
then tap Add.
1. Tap Change order.
2. Press and hold
at the end of the song title you want
to move. When the row is highlighted, drag it to its new
position, then release.
Delete songs from a 1. Tap Remove songs.
playlist
2. Select the songs you want to delete and then tap
Remove.
Change playlist
name
Tap Rename playlist.
Deleting playlists
1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
2. Press
and then tap Delete playlists.
3. Select the playlists to delete and then tap Delete.
92
Photos, videos, and music
Setting a song as a ringtone
You can set a song from the Music app's library as your regular ringtone or as
ringtone for a certain contact.
> Music.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then tap Set as ringtone (or More >
09
3. On the Now playing screen, press
Set as ringtone) .
/1
2. Browse for the song that you want to set as a ringtone and then play it back.
Checking if the song was added as a ringtone
, and then tap Settings.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
11
4. In the Set as ringtone options menu, tap Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone. If
you select Contact ringtone, you need to choose the contacts you want to
associate the song with in the next screen.
2. On the Settings screen, tap Sound > Phone ringtone.
The song should be in the ringtone list and selected.
tia
Sharing music using Bluetooth
You can choose a song from the Music app’s library and send it to someone’s device
or your computer using Bluetooth.
2. Tap
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Music.
to go to the library.
fid
3. In the library, choose the song that you want to send via Bluetooth and then
play it back.
and then tap Share (or More > Share).
on
4. On the Now playing screen, press
5. Tap Bluetooth.
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer and
connect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the music can be sent.
TC
Finding music videos on YouTube
You can find music videos of the song you’re listening to on YouTube. It’s simple. On
the Now playing screen, just press
and then tap Find videos.
93
Android Market and other apps
/1
Android Market and other
apps
11
09
Finding and installing apps from Android
Market
20
Android Market is the place to go to find new apps for HTC Explorer. Choose from a
wide variety of free and paid apps ranging from productivity apps, entertainment, to
games.
A Google Checkout™ payment method is required to purchase a paid app. You will
be asked to confirm method of payment when you purchase an app.
Finding and installing an app
en
tia
When you install apps and use them on HTC Explorer, they may require access to
your personal information or access to certain functions or settings. Download and
install only apps that you trust.
fid
Be cautious when downloading apps that have access to functions or a significant
amount of your data on HTC Explorer. You’re responsible for the results of using
downloaded apps.
You need a Google Checkout™ account to purchase items on Android Market.
on
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Market.
TC
2. Do any of the following to find an app:
Browse featured
apps
Scroll through the list of featured apps.
Browse apps by
categories
Tap Apps or Games, and then tap a category. Under a
category, you can filter the apps by Top paid, Top free
or Just in.
Search for an app
Press
, enter the name or type of app you’re looking
for, and then tap
3. When you find the app that you like, tap it and read its description and user
reviews.
94
Android Market and other apps
4. To download or purchase the app, tap FREE (for free apps) or the price button
under Buy (for paid apps).
5. Tap OK to accept the permissions for the app and begin downloading and
installing the app.
09
/1
You can uninstall an app for a refund within a limited time after your purchase. To
know more about the refund policy for paid apps, please visit the Android Market
Help site (http://market.android.com/support).
Opening an installed app
§ If you see this icon
tap the app.
11
Do one of the following:
on the status bar, open the Notifications panel, and then
§ From the Home screen, tap
tab, and then tap the app.
. On the All apps screen, slide to the Downloaded
tia
Uninstalling an app
and then tap My apps. On the
20
§ From the Home screen, tap
> Market. Press
My apps screen, tap the app, and then tap Open.
You can uninstall any app that you have downloaded and installed from Android
Market.
2. Press
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Market.
and then tap My apps.
fid
3. Tap the app you want to uninstall, and then tap Uninstall.
4. When asked, tap OK.
on
5. Choose the reason for removing the app, and then tap OK.
Getting help
TC
If you need help or have questions about Android Market, press
, and then tap
Help. The web browser will take you to the Android Market Help site.
95
Android Market and other apps
Using the Clock
About the HTC Clock widget
09
/1
Use the HTC Clock widget to see your current date, time, and location. You can also
use the Clock to show the time in another city.
11
Changing the location on the Clock widget
20
By default, the Clock widget on the Home screen displays your current weather. You
can customize the Clock widget on your Home screen to show the weather of another
location.
1. Press and hold the clock on the Home screen, and then drag it to the
2. Tap the clock to change its settings.
button.
3. Choose a city.
tia
If you don't see the city that you want, tap
en
4. Tap Done.
to search for it and add it.
Using the Clock app
fid
Get more from the Clock app than just the regular date and time. Use HTC Explorer as
a desk clock complete with weather information or as a world clock so you can see
what time it is in several cities across the globe. You can also use it as an alarm clock,
stopwatch, and countdown timer.
on
To open the Clock app, do one of the following:
§ Tap the Clock widget on the Home screen.
§ From the Home screen, tap
and then tap Clock.
TC
Tap the tabs on the bottom row or slide your finger across the tabs to switch
between the different functions of the Clock app.
Using Desk Clock
The Desk Clock displays the current date, time, and weather. It also shows an alarm
clock indicator.
Tap the weather image or information to open the Weather app where you can see
weather forecasts for the next few days.
Using World Clock
Use the Clock app's World Clock tab to check the current time in several places
around the globe. You can also set your home city, add more cities to the world clock
list, and manually set your time zone, date, and time.
96
Android Market and other apps
Setting your home city
1. On the World Clock tab, press
and then tap Home settings.
2. Enter your home city’s name. As you enter letters, the list is filtered to show
matching cities and countries.
/1
3. Scroll through the list and tap your home city.
Setting the time zone, date, and time
09
To set the time zone, date, and time on HTC Explorer manually, you need to turn off
auto time sync first.
and then tap Local time settings.
11
1. On the World Clock tab, press
20
2. Clear the Automatic check box, and then set the time zone, date, and time as
required.
From the Home screen, you can also press
to open the Date & time settings screen.
and then tap Settings > Date & time
Adding a city to the World Clock screen
tia
Add more cities to the World Clock screen so you can instantly check the date and
time in these cities.
en
1. On the World Clock tab, tap
2. Enter the city name you want to add. As you enter letters, the list is filtered to
show matching cities and countries.
fid
3. Scroll through the matching list and tap the city that you want to add.
on
Setting an alarm
You can use the Clock app's Alarms tab to set up one or more wake-up alarms.
1. On the Alarms tab, select the check box of an alarm and then tap that alarm.
TC
2. Under Set alarm, drag your finger up or down to roll the time scroll wheels and
set the alarm time.
97
Android Market and other apps
3. Choose from the available options. You can:
§ Enter the alarm Description and choose the Alarm sound to use.
§ Tap Repeat. Select which days of the week to sound the alarm, and then
tap OK.
§ Select the Vibrate check box if you want HTC Explorer to also vibrate when
the alarm goes off.
Deleting an alarm
1. On the Alarms tab, press
11
§ If you need to set more than three alarms, tap
09
§ To turn off an alarm, clear the check box of that alarm.
/1
4. After you've finished setting the alarm, tap Done.
and then tap Delete.
20
2. Select the alarms you want to delete and then tap Delete.
Changing alarm sound settings
and then tap Settings. You can change the following
Selected by default, this option allows the alarm to sound even
when the volume is set to silent. Clear this check box if you want to
silence the alarm when HTC Explorer is in silent mode.
Alarm volume
Set the volume level that you want for the alarm.
Snooze
duration
Set how long to snooze between alarms.
fid
on
TC
en
Alarm in silent
mode
Side button
behavior
tia
On the Alarms tab, press
settings:
Choose what happens to the alarm when pressing the side button
(VOLUME UP/VOLUME DOWN). You can set the button to snooze,
dismiss the alarm, or disable the button. The side button works only
when the screen is not locked.
98
Android Market and other apps
Checking Weather
/1
Use the Weather app and widget to check the current weather and weather forecasts
for the next few days. In addition to your current location, you can view weather
forecasts for other cities around the globe. Your settings in the Weather app also
control the weather information that is shown in the Clock and Calendar.
09
For HTC Explorer to detect your current location and display your local weather in
the Weather app and widget as well as in Clock and Calendar:
§ You need to connect to the Internet.
> Weather.
20
1. From the Home screen, tap
11
§ Location services must be enabled. If you didn't enable it when you first set up
HTC Explorer, you can do so in Settings > Location.
2. Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in other cities.
3. While viewing forecasts, you can:
tia
§ Tap
§ Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in other
cities.
to update the weather information at any time.
en
Adding a city to the Weather screen
fid
Add more cities to the Weather screen so you can instantly check the weather
forecasts in these cities. In addition to your current location, the Weather screen can
display up to fifteen cities.
1. On the Weather screen, tap
. Or press
and then tap Add.
on
2. Enter the location you want to add. As you type, the list is filtered to show the
possible locations based on the letters you entered.
3. Tap the desired city to select it.
TC
Changing the order of cities on the Weather screen
1. On the Weather screen, press
and then tap Rearrange.
2. Press and hold
at the end of the item you want to move. When the row is
highlighted, drag it to its new position, then release.
3. Tap Done.
Deleting cities from the Weather screen
1. On the Weather screen, press
and then tap Delete.
2. Select the cities you want to remove and then tap Delete.
99
Android Market and other apps
Changing Weather options
1. On the Weather screen, press
and then tap Settings.
2. You can change the following weather settings:
/1
Update when opened Select this check box to refresh weather updates every
time you open the Weather app.
09
Update automatically Select this check box to automatically download
weather updates.
Set an auto update schedule.
Temperature scale
Choose whether to display the temperature in Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
Sound effects
Choose whether to play sound effects related to the
weather conditions.
20
11
Update schedule
About the Weather widget
tia
Use the Weather widget to instantly check weather forecasts of your current location
and other cities without having to open the Weather app. The Weather widget comes
in different looks and styles.
en
You can add this widget to the Home screen, if it’s not yet added.
Watching videos on YouTube
fid
Use the YouTube app to check out what’s popular on the online video-sharing
website.
> YouTube.
on
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Scroll through the list of videos, and then tap a video to watch it.
3. While watching a video, you can:
TC
§ Turn HTC Explorer sideways or double-tap the screen to watch the video in
full screen.
§ Tap the video screen to pause, resume playback, or drag the slider to jump
to a different part of the video.
§ Tap a tab to learn more about the video, see related videos, or check out
what other viewers think. You can also slide your finger across the tabs to
see if there are more items available.
§ Tap the thumbs-up or thumbs-down icon to add your video rating. Tap
More to see other options.
4. Press
, and then tap Home to return to the YouTube main screen.
100
Android Market and other apps
Searching for videos
1. On the YouTube main screen, tap
2. Enter a search keyword, and then tap
3. Scroll through the results and tap a video to watch it.
09
/1
You also have the option to show results that were just recently posted. Tap All
time, and then select a time period you want.
Clearing the search history
, and then tap Settings.
11
1. On the YouTube main screen, press
2. Tap Clear search history, and then tap OK when prompted.
20
Sharing a video link
1. On the video’s watch screen, tap More > Share.
2. Choose how you want to share the video link from the available options.
tia
Capturing and sharing videos on YouTube
1. From the Home screen, tap
> YouTube.
en
Or if YouTube is already open, return to its main screen.
3. Tap
to start capturing video.
fid
2. Tap
4. When you're finished capturing, tap
again, and then tap Done.
5. Enter a title for your video.
on
6. Tap More details to select the YouTube account you want to use, add a
description, set the privacy level, and add tags or location information to your
video.
TC
7. Tap Upload.
Listening to FM Radio
Tune in and listen to your favorite radio stations using the FM Radio app.
You need to connect a headset first to the audio jack of HTC Explorer to use FM
Radio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.
From the Home screen, tap
> FM Radio.
The first time you open FM Radio, it automatically scans for available FM stations,
saves them as presets, and plays the first FM station found.
101
Android Market and other apps
Tuning in to an FM station
There are several things you can do while you’re on the FM Radio screen:
§ Tap
to view the All presets list, and then select a station you want to listen to.
to go to the next
§ Tap
to go to the previous available FM station, or
available FM station.
§ Tap
to fine tune the radio
09
§ Tap
to fine tune the radio frequency by -0.1 MHz or
frequency by +0.1 MHz.
/1
§ Drag the slider to tune in to a frequency on the FM band.
to add a preset name for the current station you are tuned into.
§ Press the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons to adjust the volume.
, and then tap Scan &
11
§ To repeat scanning and saving of FM stations, press
Save.
20
§ Press
to mute the sound or to change the sound output to Mono or Stereo.
You can also switch the sound output between the Speaker and Headset.
Closing or turning off FM Radio
To
tia
You can continue listening to the radio while using other apps on HTC Explorer or
close the FM Radio app completely.
Do this
Press
. FM Radio continues to run in the
background.
en
To close the FM Radio
screen
fid
To go back to the FM Radio screen, slide open the
Notifications panel, and then tap FM Radio.
Tap
on the FM Radio screen.
on
To turn off completely and
close FM Radio
Recording your voice
TC
Don’t just think out loud. Use Voice Recorder to quickly capture your thoughts. You
can also record your voice and set it as a ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Voice Recorder.
2. Hold the microphone near your mouth.
3. Tap
to start recording a voice clip.
Voice Recorder can run on the background while you do other things on
HTC Explorer, except when you open other apps that also use audio functions. To
go back to the Voice Recorder screen, slide open the Notifications panel, and then
tap Voice Recorder.
4. Tap
to stop recording.
5. Type a name for the voice clip and tap Save.
102
Android Market and other apps
6. To play back the voice clip, tap
7. To show options for sharing, deleting, or renaming the voice clip, press
1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
/1
2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to share, and then tap Share.
Sharing a voice clip
09
3. From the available options, choose how you want to share the voice clip.
1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
11
Setting a voice clip as a ringtone
20
2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to set as a ringtone, and then tap Set as
ringtone.
Sharing games and apps
tia
Having fun with a game or app that you found from Android Market? Share your
favorite games and apps instantly with your circle of friends.
en
For your friends to link to the app and download it from Android Market, they must
be using an Android device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
fid
2. Press
, and then tap Share. You’ll then see the list of games and apps that
you downloaded and installed from Android Market.
on
3. Tap an app, and then choose how to share it.
TC
When your friends see the link in your sent message, email, or status update, they can
simply tap the link to go directly to the game or app in Android Market to download it.
103
Messages
Messages
/1
Opening Messages
09
Keep in touch with important people in your life. Use the Messages app to compose
and send text (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS).
11
From the Home screen, tap
> Messages. The All messages screen opens, where all
your sent and received messages are neatly grouped into conversations, by contact
name or phone number.
20
§ Scroll up or down the list of conversations by
swiping your finger on the screen.
fid
en
tia
§ Tap a contact name or number to view the exchange
of messages.
on
You can also view your messages on the Home screen with the Messages widget.
Sending a text message (SMS)
TC
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap
> Messages.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
§ Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobile
number. As you type, matching names with phone numbers from your
stored contacts are displayed. Tap a name or one of the contact’s numbers.
§ Tap
, and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom you
want to send the message. You can also select contact groups as
recipients.
§ Enter the complete phone numbers directly in the To field.
104
Messages
11
09
/1
4. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.
20
§ There is a limit on the number of characters for a single text message (displayed
above the Send button). If you exceed the limit, your text message will be
delivered as one but will be billed as more than one message.
to save the message as a draft.
en
5. Tap Send, or press
tia
§ Your text message automatically becomes a multimedia message if you enter an
email address as the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item, or compose
a very long message.
fid
Sending a multimedia message (MMS)
1. From the Home screen, tap
on
2. Tap
> Messages.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
TC
§ Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobile
number. As you type, matching names with phone numbers and email
addresses from your stored contacts are displayed. Tap a contact’s number
or email address.
§ Tap
, and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom you
want to send the message. You can also select contact groups as
recipients.
§ Enter the complete phone numbers or email address directly in the To field.
4. To add a subject line, press
and then tap Add subject.
5. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.
Messages
6. Tap
and then choose the type of attachment.
Picture
Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.
Video
Record a video and attach it, or attach an existing
video.
Audio
Make a voice recording and attach it, or attach an
existing audio file.
/1
105
09
App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Market
that you want to share with others. The URL from
which the app can be downloaded will be inserted to
your message.
Add your current location (requires GPS to be turned
on), or a location you pick on a map to your message.
Contact (vCard)
Select a contact, and then select the information to
attach.
Appointment
(vCalendar)
Select the calendar event you want to attach.
20
11
Location
to save the message as a draft.
en
7. Tap Send, or press
to see options for replacing, viewing or
tia
After adding an attachment, tap
removing your attachment.
fid
Why isn't the contact's email address showing up when I enter a
contact name?
on
If only phone numbers are showing up when you're entering a contact name,
go to the Messages settings to enable displaying email addresses.
1. If you've created a new message, press
messages screen.
2. Press
first to return to the All
and then tap Settings > General.
TC
3. Select the Show email address check box.
Creating a slideshow
1. After you've added either a photo, video, or audio in the multimedia message
you’re composing, tap
> Slideshow.
2. Choose where you want to insert the next slide.
106
Messages
3. Right after adding a slide, do any of the following:
Tap
video.
, and then choose to add a photo or a
Add music or a voice
recording to a slide
Tap
> Audio.
Add a caption to a slide
Tap Add text and then enter your caption.
Edit a slide
Tap
, and then choose to replace, remove, or
set the duration of the slide.
Preview the slideshow
Press
, and then tap Preview (or More >
Preview). Tap once on the preview screen to
see playback controls.
to save the message as a draft.
20
4. When finished, tap Send, or press
11
09
/1
Add a photo or video to a
slide
Resuming a draft message
, and then tap Drafts.
tia
1. On the All messages screen, press
2. Tap the message and then resume editing it.
en
3. Tap Send.
fid
Viewing and replying to a message
TC
on
Depending on your notification settings, HTC Explorer plays a sound, vibrates, or
displays the message briefly in the status bar when you receive a new message. A
new message icon
is also displayed in the status bar.
1. To open and read the message, you can:
§ Press and hold the status bar, and then slide your finger down to open the
Notifications panel. Then tap the new message notification.
§ Go to the Messages app and open the message.
2. While reading the message, you can reply with a text or multimedia message.
You can also do the following while reading the message:
§ Call the phone number contained in the message by tapping the number.
§ Tap the email address contained in the message to send an email.
107
Messages
§ Tap a link in the message to open it in the web browser.
§ Tap the message to open the options menu and choose what you want to do
with the message (such as forward, share, and more).
Adjusting the font size of your messages
, and then tap More > Text size.
11
Replying to another phone number of the contact
09
You can also press
/1
While reading a message conversation with a contact, spread out two fingers on the
screen to zoom in and make the text size bigger. Pinch the screen to zoom out.
fid
en
tia
20
When a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on HTC Explorer, you’ll see the
particular phone number used below the contact's name.
on
Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the phone number of the latest
message you’ve received from this contact.
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
TC
2. Tap
, and then select another phone number of this contact.
3. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your reply message.
4. Tap Send.
Forwarding a message
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to view the
exchange of messages with that contact.
2. Tap the message you want to forward, and then tap Forward.
108
Messages
3. In the To field, fill in one or more recipients.
4. Tap Send.
/1
While viewing the exchange of messages with the contact, you can also press
tap Forward (or More > Forward), and then tap the message you want to forward.
09
Viewing and saving an attachment from a
multimedia message
11
If you are concerned about the size of your data downloads, check the multimedia
message size first before you download it.
20
When Auto-retrieve in MMS settings is disabled, only the message header is
downloaded. To download the entire message, tap the Download button at the
right side of the message.
§ If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or video in a received message,
tap it to view the content.
tia
§ If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it to view the contact information,
then tap Save to add to your contacts.
en
§ If the attachment is an appointment or event (vCalendar), tap it to choose the
calendar where to save it, and then tap Import.
fid
§ To save the attachment to your storage card, press and hold the multimedia
message, and then choose to save the type of attachment from the options
menu.
on
Push messages
Push messages contain a web link. Often, the link will be to download a file that you
have requested from a service provider.
TC
When you receive a push message, a notification icon
bar.
is displayed in the status
Opening and reading a new push message
1. Press and hold the status bar, and then slide the status bar down to open the
Notifications panel.
2. Tap the new message.
3. Tap Visit website.
109
Messages
Viewing all your push messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
, and then tap Push messages.
Protecting a message from deletion
11
Managing message conversations
09
/1
You can only see this option if you've previously received push messages.
2. Press
> Messages.
20
You can lock a message so that it will not be deleted even if you delete the other
messages in the conversation.
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
2. Tap the message that you want to lock.
is displayed at the right
tia
3. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock icon
hand side of the message.
en
Copying a text message to your SIM card
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
fid
2. Tap the message, and then tap Copy to SIM. A SIM card icon
the right hand side of the message.
is displayed at
on
Deleting a single message
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
TC
2. Tap the message that you want to delete.
3. If the message is locked, tap Unlock message on the options menu, and then tap
the message to display the options menu again.
4. Tap Delete message on the options menu.
5. When prompted to confirm, tap OK.
Deleting several messages within a conversation
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
2. Press
and then tap Delete (or More > Delete).
110
Messages
3. Tap Delete by selection.
You can also tap Delete by phone number if the contact used multiple phone
numbers throughout the conversation and you want to delete the messages sent
from a particular number.
/1
4. Select the messages you want to delete and then tap Delete.
09
In the settings, you can set the Messages app to auto delete old messages per
conversation.
11
Deleting a conversation
1. Do any of the following:
§ On the All messages screen, press and hold a contact (or phone number)
whose messages you want to delete, and then tap Delete
20
§ While looking at the exchange of messages in a conversation, press
then tap Delete > Delete thread (or More > Delete > Delete thread).
and
Any locked messages in the conversation thread will not be deleted unless
you select the Delete locked messages check box.
tia
2. When prompted to confirm, tap OK to delete the entire thread.
en
Deleting several conversations
1. On the All messages screen, press
and then tap Delete.
2. Select the conversation threads you want to delete.
fid
3. Tap Delete. Any locked messages will not be deleted.
on
Backing up your text messages to the storage
card
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. Press
> Messages.
, and then tap Backup SMS > Backup SMS.
3. Enter a name for your backup file, and then tap OK.
Importing text messages from the storage card
You can only import text messages that were exported to the storage card using the
Backup SMS feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
, and then tap Backup SMS > Restore from backup.
3. Tap the backup file to import.
4. Tap OK.
> Messages.
111
Messages
Setting message options
§ Receive a notification in the status bar and set HTC Explorer to
vibrate or play a sound when a message arrives or when a message
is not sent successfully, and choose a notification sound.
/1
Notifications
and then tap Settings.
On the All messages screen, press
09
§ Allow HTC Explorer to show pop-up notifications on the screen
when messages are sent successfully or not, or disable this option.
§ Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.
20
Text
messages
(SMS)
11
§ If you don't want the content of received text messages to appear
on the lock screen and status bar, clear the Notification preview
check box.
§ View or change the message service center number used. (We
recommend that you don't change the number here as it may cause
problems in receiving and sending messages.)
§ Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.
§ Receive a report whether each recipient has read the message or
deleted it without reading.
en
Multimedia
messages
(MMS)
tia
§ View or delete text messages stored on your SIM card, or copy SIM
card messages to device memory.
on
fid
§ Automatically download complete MMS messages including the
message body and attachments in your service area and when
roaming.
TC
General
§ Set the message priority and maximum file size of MMS messages.
If the MMS message file size is exceeded, the message won't be
sent.
§ Search and display the sent message history, call history, and email
addresses of stored contacts when you’re adding message
recipients.
§ Set the number of lines of text to preview for each message on the
All messages screen.
§ Choose the maximum number of text or MMS messages to store in
each conversation thread (excluding locked messages), and enable
automatic deletion of unlocked older messages when set limits are
reached.
§ Forward received text and MMS messages to another phone
number or email address. (This may incur extra fees.)
§ Add a signature to your messages.
112
Email
Email
/1
Gmail
09
Using Gmail
11
When you first set up HTC Explorer, make sure you sign into your Google Account to
use Gmail. If you didn’t do so, go to the Accounts & sync setting to sign in.
You can also set up more than one Google Account on HTC Explorer, and then switch
between accounts in Gmail.
20
Viewing your Gmail Inbox
All your received emails are delivered to your Inbox.
> Gmail. Your Gmail inbox then opens.
From the Home screen, tap
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Archive, delete or
label multiple
conversations
Tap
before the email or
conversation. Then tap the
onscreen buttons at the bottom
to choose what to do with the
selected messages or
conversations.
Display drafts, sent Tap Inbox at the top left of the
messages, and
screen, and then tap another label
other labels
(such as Sent, Drafts, or your
created label) to view its
messages and conversations.
Switch to your
other Gmail
account
Tap the current account at the
top right of the screen, and then
tap another account you want to
switch to.
Refresh the Inbox
Press
, and then tap Refresh.
Sending a new message
1. In the Gmail inbox, press
and then tap Compose.
2. If you’ve set up multiple Google Accounts on HTC Explorer, choose which Gmail
address you want to use for sending your email. Tap the box that shows your
current Gmail address, and then tap another address that you want to use for
sending.
113
Email
3. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field. If you are sending
the email to several recipients, separate the email addresses with a comma.
If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email to
other recipients, press
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc.
and then tap Attach.
7. After composing your message, tap
to save it as a draft. Or press
to discard
11
While composing the message, tap
the message.
09
6. Locate and then tap the picture you want to attach.
/1
5. If you want to attach a picture, press
4. Enter the email subject, and then compose your email.
20
Replying to or forwarding an email message
. Or, tap
3. Do one of the following:
and choose whether to Reply all or
tia
2. To reply to the sender, tap
Forward.
1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or conversation.
§ If you selected Reply or Reply all, enter your reply message.
en
§ If you selected Forward, specify the message recipients.
fid
Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new message with the received
email. But this removes any attachments or formatting in the original email.
4. Tap
on
Getting help
To find out more about using Gmail, press
, and then tap More > Help. The web
browser will take you to the Google Mobile Help site.
TC
Mail
About the Mail app
Use the Mail app to add your webmail and other POP3 or IMAP email accounts. You
can also set up and use your Exchange ActiveSync email on HTC Explorer.
You can add the Mail widget to view your POP3/IMAP or Exchange ActiveSync
emails on the Home screen.
114
Email
Adding a POP3/IMAP email account
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
2. Do one of the following:
§ If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap Other (POP3/
IMAP) on the Choose a mail provider screen.
09
/1
§ If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press
, and then tap
More > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tap
Other (POP3/IMAP).
11
3. Enter the email address and password for your email account and then tap
Next.
4. If the account type you want to set up is not in the internal database, you’ll be
asked to enter more details.
20
5. Enter the account name and your name and then tap Finish setup.
Adding a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
tia
You can add one or more Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.
You can sync with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack (SP2) or later.
You can add up to 15 Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
2. Do one of the following:
fid
§ If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync on the Choose a mail provider screen.
on
§ If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press
, and then tap
More > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tap
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
TC
3. Enter the Exchange ActiveSync account details, and then tap Next. If your
corporate Exchange Server does not support auto-detect, you’ll need to enter
your Exchange Server settings after you tap Next. Ask your Exchange Server
administrator for details.
4. Choose the types of information you want to sync. Also choose how often you
want to update and sync email to HTC Explorer, then tap Next.
5. Enter the account name, then tap Finish setup.
115
Email
Checking your Mail inbox
When you open the Mail app, it displays the inbox of one of your email accounts that
you’ve set up on HTC Explorer.
20
11
09
/1
To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows the current email account,
and then tap another account.
tia
Viewing the unified inbox of all your email accounts
en
You can view email messages from all your accounts just in one place without having
to switch to different accounts.
fid
Just tap the bar that shows the current email account, and then tap All accounts.
Email messages are color coded so you can easily distinguish which email accounts
they belong to.
on
Up to 15 email accounts can be shown in the unified inbox.
Switching between different views of your inbox
TC
If you have lots of email messages, it may take you some time to browse through the
long list and find a single email or related email messages. Use the tabs of the Mail app
to sort your emails into different categories.
To skim through your email messages easier, tap one of the following tabs to change
the view of your inbox:
Inbox
Displays email messages as individual items.
Thread
Displays email messages as conversations, grouped according to the subject
line. Tap a subject in the list to show the email conversation.
116
Email
Group
Displays all email messages from a contact group. To choose which contact
group to display, press
, tap View, and then select a group.
Unread
Displays unread messages.
/1
Marked (Exchange ActiveSync only)
09
Displays all flagged messages.
Invites or Meeting invitations (Exchange ActiveSync only)
Attachments
20
Displays all messages that have attachments.
11
Displays meeting invitations which you have not yet accepted or declined.
tia
Refreshing an email account
Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen to
show the other tabs. You can tap and hold a tab, and then drag it to where you
want it.
en
Whatever your automatic synchronization settings are, you can also synchronize your
sent and received emails manually at any time.
§ While in the account you want to synchronize, press
, and then tap Refresh.
fid
§ If you have several email accounts, you can refresh them all at the same time.
Go to the All accounts inbox first. Then press
and tap Refresh.
Sorting email messages
on
You can sort email messages by date received, priority, subject, sender, or size.
On the inbox, press
, tap Sort, and select from the sorting options.
TC
Quickly browsing your inbox
If you have a long list of email messages in your inbox, it may not be easy to browse
the list and find an email that you want. You can quickly browse through your inbox
by using finger gestures.
1. Choose a sorting order for displaying your email messages.
2. Press and hold two fingers on any email message, and then drag upward or
downward without lifting your fingers. Your screen then jumps to the set of
email messages based on your chosen sorting order.
117
Email
Managing email messages
Deleting an email message
1. On the inbox, press and hold the message you want to delete.
2. On the options menu, tap Delete.
/1
Selecting several email messages
09
1. Tap the check boxes of email messages to select them.
11
2. Choose what you want to do with the selected messages: Mark read (or mark
Mark unread), Delete, or Move to another folder.
You cannot move email messages when you’re in the unified (All accounts) inbox.
20
Moving several email messages to another folder
1. Switch to the email account you want to use.
2. Tap the check boxes of email messages you want to move.
tia
3. Tap Move to, and then tap the folder where to move the email messages.
Moving an email message after reading
en
1. While viewing the email, tap Move to.
2. Tap the folder where you want to move the email message.
fid
Deleting all messages
1. First tap the check box of any email message.
on
2. Press
, and then tap Select all.
3. Tap Delete.
Switching to other mail folders
1. Press
, and then tap Folders.
TC
2. Tap the mail folder whose messages you want to view.
Sending an email message
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
2. Switch to the email account that you want to use for sending email.
3. On the email account inbox, tap
118
Email
4. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
§ Enter email addresses directly in the To field, separating them with a
comma. As you enter email addresses, any matching addresses from your
contacts list are displayed. Tap a match to enter that address directly.
/1
§ Tap the
icon, and then choose the contacts to whom you want to send
the message. You can also select contact groups as recipients, or search
and add contacts.
09
If the contact name you entered is not found and you have an Exchange
ActiveSync account in the Mail app, you can search for the contact in your
company directory.
11
If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email to
other recipients, press
, and then tap Show Cc/Bcc.
5. Enter the subject, and then compose your message.
, tap Attach, and choose from the following
20
6. To add an attachment, press
options:
Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.
Video
Record a video and attach it, or attach an existing
video.
tia
Picture
Audio
Attach an audio file.
fid
en
App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Market
that you want to tell other people about. The URL from
which the app can be downloaded will be inserted in
your email.
TC
on
Location
You can attach location information. Send your current
location (requires GPS to be turned on) or a location
you pick on a map.
Document
Attach a PDF file or an Office document such as a text
file or a spreadsheet.
Contact (vCard)
Attach someone’s contact information.
Appointment
(vCalendar)
Attach a calendar event.
File
Attach any other file.
7. Tap Send to send the message immediately, or tap Save as draft to send it later.
If there’s no Internet connection available or Airplane mode is on when you send
your email, the email will be saved to the Outbox folder. Once there’s Internet
connection available, the saved email will be sent automatically next time
HTC Explorer syncs.
119
Email
Resuming a draft email message
1. In the email account inbox, press
, and then tap Folders > Drafts.
2. Tap the message.
3. When you finish editing the message, tap Send.
/1
Managing the recipient list
11
You must have entered contacts in the To, Cc, or Bcc field.
09
Filled up the To field but want to make changes in it? You can manage the recipient
list and change who appears in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields.
20
1. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, tap the Edit button. The names of the contacts are
listed.
2. Tap the checkbox beside the contact that you want to move to another field.
3. Tap the action that apply.
to go back to composing your
tia
4. When you are done with the changes, press
email.
en
Reading and replying to an email message
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
fid
2. Switch to the email account you want to use.
3. On the email account inbox, tap the email you want to read.
on
4. Choose an action on the bottom of the screen for your email.
TC
Press
to see options for deleting your email or marking it as unread.
Where are my unread emails?
The Unread tab contains all your unread emails. Add it if it does not appear on
your screen.
1. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the area
where you can rearrange icons, lift your finger.
2. Press and hold the Unread tab, and then drag it to its new position.
3. Press
, and then tap the Unread tab.
120
Email
Setting the priority for an email message
You can set the priority for an email message that you send.
1. While composing the message, press
2. Tap Set priority.
/1
3. Select the priority for the message.
09
If you selected High or Low priority, the priority appears below the subject line of the
message.
11
Searching and filtering emails
Search emails in all your email accounts or in a specific one. You can even refine your
search by indicating which part of the email will be searched.
20
1. Press
2. If you want to refine or filter your search, tap
and then check the options
that apply. For example, you can focus the search on a part of an email or filter
emails that have attachments or tagged as high priority.
tia
3. Tap OK.
4. Enter the first few characters of the item you're looking for in the search box.
Results will then be listed.
en
Tap a result to open the email.
Searching emails from a contact
fid
Do you remember the sender, but can't find a particular email from this contact? You
can search your mail accounts for emails from a specific contact.
on
1. Switch to the email account you want to use.
2. Press and hold an email from a contact.
3. Tap Search the mail from the sender. A list of emails from that contact appears.
TC
Working with Exchange ActiveSync email
You can read, reply, send, and manage your work email in the same easy way as with
a POP3/IMAP account. In addition, you can also use some powerful Exchange
features.
Flagging an email
§ While viewing the inbox, tap the white flag icon
that appears on the right of
an email message. The icon turns red
after you flagged the email.
§ While reading an email, you can also tap the flag icon in the email.
121
Email
Setting your Out of the office status
1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.
2. Press
and then tap More > Out of the office.
3. Tap the box, and then select Out of the office.
/1
4. Set the dates and times for the period when you will be out of the office.
09
5. Enter the auto-reply message.
11
You can also send auto-reply messages to external recipients, which are contacts
whose addresses are not in the same Microsoft Exchange server.
6. Tap Save.
Sending a meeting request
20
1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.
2. Go to the Invitations tab, and then tap
3. Enter the meeting details.
tia
4. Tap Save.
en
Changing email account settings
1. Switch to the email account whose settings you want to change.
2. Press
, and then tap More > Settings.
fid
3. Select from the following:
TC
on
Account settings
Change the email account settings such as the name,
email address, password, and description.
General settings
Set the font size when reading emails, enable, disable or
set the signature, set the account as the default email
account, and set where to save email attachments.
Send & Receive
Set the sync settings for incoming and outgoing emails
such as maximum size limit, update schedule, and more.
Notification
settings
Set email notification settings.
Delete account
Tap to delete the email account.
4. Press
to save your changes.
Deleting an email account
1. Switch to the email account you want to delete.
2. Press
, and then tap More > Settings > Delete account.
122
Calendar
Calendar
/1
About Calendar
09
Never miss an important date again. Use the Calendar app to schedule your events,
meetings, and appointments.
11
You can set up HTC Explorer to stay in sync with the following types of calendars:
§ On HTC Explorer, sign in to your Google Account so you can sync the Calendar
app with your Google Calendar online. You can add multiple Google Accounts.
20
§ If you're using Microsoft Outlook on your computer, you can set up HTC Sync
on your computer to sync Outlook Calendar with the Calendar app.
§ If you have a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account and you've added it on
HTC Explorer, you can sync the Calendar app with your Exchange ActiveSync
calendar events.
en
tia
If you've signed in to Facebook, birthdays and events of friends will appear in
Calendar.
Creating an event
fid
You can create events that sync with your Google or Exchange ActiveSync calendars,
as well as events on HTC Explorer.
on
Not signed in yet on your accounts? Your calendar events will be created under PC
Sync, which you can later sync with your computer's Outlook Calendar through
HTC Sync.
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. On any Calendar view, tap
> Calendar.
3. If you have more than one calendar, select a calendar in which to add the event.
4. If you want to invite people to your event, tap
your contacts or company directory.
and choose attendees from
5. Enter a name for the event.
6. To specify the date and time of the event, do one of the following:
§ If there is a time frame for the event, tap the From and To date and time to
set them.
§ If it is a whole-day event, such as a birthday, set the From and To date, then
select the All day check box.
7. Enter the event location and description.
123
Calendar
8. Set the reminder time.
You can add another reminder time in a Google Calendar event. Press
tap Add reminder.
and then
9. If the event occurs on a regular basis, tap the Repetition box and then choose
how often the event occurs.
09
/1
10. Tap Save.
Changing Calendar views
11
Easily switch between different calendar views by tapping the onscreen buttons.
Day view
20
Week view
tia
Agenda view
Month view
en
Meeting invitations
fid
§ In Day, Week, and Agenda views, events are color coded to indicate which
account or type of calendar they belong to. To find out what each color
represents, tap
on
§ Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen to
show the other tabs. You can press and hold a tab, and then drag it to where you
want it.
Using month view
In month view, you will see markers on days that have events.
TC
Do any of the following in month view:
§ Tap a day to view the events for that day.
§ Press and hold a day to open an options menu from which you can also choose
to create an event or switch to either day or agenda view.
§ Slide your finger up or down the screen to view earlier or later months.
124
Calendar
Using day and agenda views
Day view shows your events per day, whereas agenda view displays all your events in
chronological order.
When in day view:
/1
§ Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later days.
§ Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.
Using week view
11
Week view displays a chart of the events of one week.
09
§ You can also see the day's weather, but only if it's within the five-day forecast.
When in week view, you can:
§ Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.
20
§ Tap an event (shown as colored blocks) to view its details.
§ Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later weeks.
Viewing an event
tia
Managing Calendar events
en
You can view your own events as well as events that other people have shared with
you.
fid
1. In day view or agenda view, tap an event. The Event details screen then opens
and shows the summary of the event.
2. Depending on the event information, do any of the following:
on
§ Find the event’s location in Maps.
§ Call any phone number included in the event location or description.
§ Check the participants of the event.
TC
§ If the event was sent as a meeting invitation, respond to the invitation.
§ If it’s an Exchange ActiveSync calendar event, reply by email to the
organizer or to all the guests. Press
, and then tap Reply or Reply all (or
More > Reply or Reply all).
§ Select any text and look it up on the Web.
§ Tap the reminder time to change it. Press
You can return to the current date by tapping
to save changes.
125
Calendar
Editing an event
You can edit events that you have created.
1. While viewing an event, tap
2. Make your changes to the event.
/1
3. When you’re done editing, tap Save.
09
Deleting an event
Do any of the following:
and
11
§ While viewing the summary of an event on the Event details screen, press
then tap Delete event.
§ In day, agenda or week view, press and hold an event and then tap Delete event.
§ When editing an event, tap Delete.
20
If the event repeats, you’ll be asked whether you want to delete just that occurrence
or all occurrences from Calendar.
Sharing an event (vCalendar)
tia
You can share a calendar event as a vCalendar using Bluetooth or by sending it as a
file attachment with your email or message.
, and then tap Forward.
en
1. While viewing an event, press
2. Do one of the following:
fid
§ Tap Bluetooth. You’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer and
connect to the receiving Bluetooth device.
on
§ Tap Mail. A new message window opens and automatically includes the
vCalendar as an attachment. Your default email account will be used to
send the message.
§ Tap Message. A new message window opens and automatically includes
the vCalendar as a multimedia attachment.
TC
Accepting or declining a meeting invitation
1. If you're using an Exchange ActiveSync account on HTC Explorer, tap the
Invites tab in Calendar to see meeting invitations which you have not yet
accepted or declined.
2. Tap a meeting invitation, and then do one of the following:
§ Accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation or propose a new time.
§ Press
more.
to see options for replying, moving the invitation to a folder, and
126
Calendar
Dismissing or snoozing event reminders
/1
1. Tap the status bar, then slide your finger down the screen to open the
Notifications panel.
If you have set at least one reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon
will
appear in the notifications area of the status bar to remind you of the upcoming
event.
09
2. Do one of the following:
§ Tap Clear to dismiss event reminders and all other notifications.
11
§ After sliding open the Notifications panel, tap the calendar event reminder.
You’ll then see a list of all pending event reminders. Tap Snooze all to
snooze all event reminders for five minutes, or tap Dismiss all to dismiss all
event reminders.
20
§ Press
to keep the reminders pending in the notifications area of the
status bar.
, and then select or clear a calendar to show or hide it.
tia
In any Calendar view, tap
Showing or hiding calendars
en
Calendars are kept synchronized on HTC Explorer, whether or not you hide them.
fid
Changing Calendar settings
on
You can change Calendar settings to specify how it displays events and how it notifies
you of upcoming events.
In any Calendar view, press
and then tap Settings (or More > Settings).
TC
Reminder settings
All calendars
Select this check box to use the same event reminder settings
for all types of calendars. If you clear this check box, you can
set different reminder settings for each calendar.
Set alerts &
notifications
Configure event reminders to open an alert, send you a
notification, or turn off event notifications on HTC Explorer.
Default reminder
time
Choose how soon before an event you want to be notified.
Select ringtone
Choose a ringtone to sound when you receive an event
reminder.
Hide declined events Choose whether to show or hide events for which you've
declined invitations.
127
Calendar
Calendar view settings
First day of
week
Set the month and week views to start on a Sunday or Monday.
Include weather Select this check box to show weather information in the day view
events list.
If weather is included, by default, day view displays your current
location's weather. You can change it to display the weather of
another city.
11
About the Calendar widget
09
/1
City
20
You can add a Calendar widget to your Home screen. The widgets offer different
calendar views.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Tapping a day or event on the widget brings you to the Calendar app.
128
Maps and location
Maps and location
/1
Location settings
09
Turning on location services
In order to find your location on HTC Explorer, you need to enable location sources.
and then tap Settings > Location.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Select one or both of the following:
Uses Wi-Fi or your mobile data connection to find your
approximate location.
Use GPS satellites
Finds your exact GPS location. This requires a clear view
of the sky and more battery power.
en
Google Maps
tia
20
Use wireless
networks
About Google Maps
fid
Google Maps™ lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,
and receive detailed directions to your destination.
on
It also provides a search tool where you can locate places of interest or an address on
a map, or view locations at street level.
§ You need to connect to the Internet to use Google Maps.
§ To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.
TC
§ The Google Maps app does not cover every country or city.
129
Maps and location
Getting around maps
When you open Google Maps, you can easily find your location on the map or check
out nearby places by panning and zooming in and out on the map.
> Maps.
2. Tap
to show your current location. The blue marker
location on the map.
shows your current
11
3. Do any of the following:
09
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.
Swipe your finger to any direction on the screen to view
nearby places on the map.
Use Compass
mode
Tap
to switch to Compass mode. In Compass mode, the
map changes to an angled view and automatically orients
itself depending on the direction you're facing.
Zoom in
§ Place your thumb and index fingers on top of the area that
you want to zoom in, and then spread your fingers across
the map.
tia
20
Move around
§ Tap
fid
Zoom out
en
§ Double-tap the area on the map that you want to zoom in.
§ Pinch your thumb and index finger on the map to zoom
out.
§ Tap
TC
on
View
1. Press and hold a location on the map. A balloon opens over
information for a
the location, with the address and a thumbnail from street
random location
view (if available).
2. Tap the balloon to see more information.
You can get directions to the location, check for nearby
places of interest, and more.
130
Maps and location
Searching for a location
In Google Maps, you can search for a location, such as an address or a type of
business or establishment (for example, museums).
1. In Maps, enter the place you want to search for in the search box.
/1
2. Tap
to search for the location you entered or tap a suggested search item.
The search results are displayed as markers on the map.
§ Tap a marker
is.
to see if that is what you’re looking for, tap the balloon if it
to show the search results as a list, and then tap the location.
11
§ Tap
09
3. Do any of the following:
Details about the selected location displays on the screen.
20
4. Do any of the following:
§ Tap the onscreen buttons to view the location on a map, get directions,
view the location in Street View, if available, and more. Scroll down the
screen to view more options.
tia
§ Swipe left or right across the screen to view the information for the next or
previous search result.
Clearing the map
Press
en
After searching on a map, you can clear away the various markers drawn on it.
, and then tap Clear Map.
fid
Searching for a place of interest near you
on
Use Places to find places of interest near your current location. Places uses Google
Maps to search common places that you would want to find, such as the nearest gas
station or ATM kiosk.
TC
Before using Places, you need to enable location sources.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Places.
2. Tap the type of place you want to search.
3. Do any of the following:
§ When one or two places of interest are found, the search results are
displayed as markers on the map. You can tap the marker, and then tap the
balloon to view more information about the place.
§ When several places are found, the search results display in a list. Tap a
place to view more information.
131
Maps and location
Getting directions
Get detailed directions to your destination. Google Maps can provide directions for
travel by foot, public transportation, or car.
, and then tap Directions.
1. While viewing a map, press
/1
2. Do any of the following:
to select an address from your contacts or a point that you tap on a
20
11
§ Tap
map.
09
§ Use your current location as the starting point, or enter a location from
where to start in the first text box. Then enter your destination in the
second text box.
3. Choose how you want to get to your destination by tapping the car, public
transit, bike, or walk button.
tia
4. Tap Get directions. The next screen displays the directions to your destination in
a list.
en
If the place you’ve set as your destination has several locations available, choose
which one to go to.
fid
5. Tap an item to view the directions on the map.
6. Tap the arrow buttons on the map to follow the directions.
TC
on
When you’re finished viewing or following the directions, press
and then tap Clear
Map to reset the map. Your destination is automatically saved in the Google Maps
history.
132
Maps and location
Getting help
Get help and more information about Maps.
To open the help, press
, and then tap More > Help. The web browser opens and
takes you to the Google Maps Help site.
/1
Finding your friends with Google Latitude (available by country)
09
Google Latitude® user location service lets you and your friends share locations and
status messages with each other. It also lets you get directions to your friends’
locations, send your location details by email, and more.
11
Your location is not shared automatically. You must join Latitude, and then invite your
friends to view your location or accept their invitations. Only friends that you have
explicitly invited or accepted can see your location.
20
Opening and joining Latitude
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Maps.
2. While viewing a map, press
and then tap Join Latitude.
§ Tap
tia
3. After you’ve joined Latitude and closed the application, you can do any of the
following to open it from the Home screen:
> Latitude.
TC
on
fid
en
§ Open Maps, press
, and then tap Latitude.
133
HTC Sync
HTC Sync
/1
About HTC Sync
09
You have your new vacation photos on HTC Explorer while your business calendar is
on your computer. Why not make your files and information available on both
devices?
11
With HTC Sync, you can:
20
§ Sync your contacts between your Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express or
Windows Contacts on your computer and HTC Explorer.
§ Sync your calendar events between the Outlook or Windows Calendar on your
computer and HTC Explorer.
§ Bring your photos, videos, documents, songs, and playlists to HTC Explorer and
enjoy them on the go.
tia
§ Easily import your captured photos and videos from HTC Explorer to your
computer.
en
§ Store the same web bookmarks on both your computer and HTC Explorer.
§ Install third-party mobile apps from your computer.
fid
You need a storage card inserted into HTC Explorer to be able to sync multimedia
files and documents.
on
Installing HTC Sync
TC
§ HTC Sync requires USB 2.0 on your computer to connect and sync with
HTC Explorer.
§ For trouble-free installation, first quit all running programs and temporarily exit
from your anti-virus program before you start installing HTC Sync.
Do either of the following:
§ Check and copy the HTC Sync installer from the storage card (if available), and
then install it on your computer.
§ Download the HTC Sync software for HTC Explorer from our support website
(www.htc.com/support/) and install it on your computer.
134
HTC Sync
Setting up HTC Sync to recognize
HTC Explorer
1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the USB cable that came in the
box.
09
3. On the Device setup screen, enter a name for HTC Explorer.
/1
2. When HTC Explorer prompts you to choose a type of USB connection, tap HTC
Sync, and then tap Done. Wait for HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer.
11
4. Click Save. The Device panel then opens.
To change the name of HTC Explorer later, click Overview > Device setup.
20
Getting to know the workspace
On the Device panel, you can set your sync options, see general information about
HTC Explorer, check the used and available storage space, and begin synchronization.
tia
The available categories and options depend on the device you've connected to
your computer.
en
§ You can click a category of items to see its sync options on the right side of the
Device panel.
fid
Clicking Overview displays basic software information and storage usage, and
lets you change the name of HTC Explorer, or install third-party applications to
HTC Explorer.
on
§ The Sync now button lets you start syncing the categories and options you've
selected.
TC
§ The estimated storage usage bar beside the Sync now button shows you the
estimated storage space that will be used when there are new items to be
synchronized and added to HTC Explorer.
135
HTC Sync
Setting up synchronization
You can choose the types of files and information you want to sync between
HTC Explorer and your computer.
Music sync options
09
/1
Bring the music tracks and songs you play on your computer to HTC Explorer. If you
have playlists created in iTunes® or Windows Media® Player, you can sync these too
and enjoy them on the go.
11
You can sync audio files in these formats: *.aac, *.amr, *.m4a, *.mid, *.midi, *.mp3,
*.wav, *.wma
20
1. On the Device panel, click Music, and then click the On button. Turning Music
sync on means you want this category included every time you sync your
computer and HTC Explorer.
2. Select Sync music files from, and then click Add.
3. Choose a folder that contains your audio files, and then click OK.
en
Gallery sync options
tia
4. Select Sync music files from iTunes and Windows Media Player if you're using
either of these software on your computer, and then choose the playlists you
want to sync on HTC Explorer.
fid
You can automatically sync photos and videos between HTC Explorer and a
computer.
You can sync photos and videos in these formats:
on
§ Photos: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpeg, *.jpg, *.png
§ Videos: *.3gp, *.3g2, *.mp4, *.wmv
TC
1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click the On button. Turning Gallery
sync on means you want this category included every time you sync your
computer and HTC Explorer.
2. To automatically import your camera shots to your computer during
synchronization, select Copy device Camera Shots to PC. Photos and videos
from HTC Explorer will be saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shots
folder on your computer.
3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click Add.
4. Choose a folder that contains your multimedia files, and then click OK. All
supported image and video files added to this folder will be copied to
HTC Explorer during synchronization.
136
HTC Sync
Calendar sync options
HTC Explorer can sync appointments and events with your calendar in Outlook
(Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook 2007) or Windows Calendar.
2. Select the application you want to sync calendar events with.
/1
1. On the Device panel, click Calendar, and then click the On button. Turning
Calendar sync on means you want this category included every time you sync
your computer and HTC Explorer.
09
3. Choose from which point you want to start synchronizing your calendar events.
11
4. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and the
computer, choose which information you want to keep.
20
Only the calendar fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.
People sync options
Sync HTC Explorer contacts with your Outlook (Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook
2007), Outlook Express, or Windows Contacts.
tia
If you have contacts to sync from your SIM card, you have to import these first to
HTC Explorer storage.
en
1. On the Device panel, click People, and then click the On button. Turning People
sync on means you want this category included every time you sync your
computer and HTC Explorer.
fid
2. Choose the application you want to sync your contacts with.
on
3. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and the
computer, choose which information you want to keep.
TC
Only the contact fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.
137
HTC Sync
Bookmarks sync options
Sync web browser bookmarks between HTC Explorer and a computer.
/1
If you are using Google Chrome™ or Firefox® Internet browser and have selected it
to sync with HTC Explorer, make sure to close all browser windows before you
begin synchronization.
09
1. Using your favorite web browser on your computer, create a favorites folder
named HTC bookmarks. Make sure to save your favorite bookmarks in this
folder to be able to sync them with HTC Explorer.
11
2. On HTC Sync's Device panel, click Bookmarks, and then click the On button.
Turning Bookmarks sync on means you want this category included every time
you sync your computer and HTC Explorer.
20
3. Choose the web browser that stores the bookmarks to sync with HTC Explorer.
tia
Documents sync options
When conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and computer, HTC
Sync keeps the information from your computer.
en
You can sync files and documents from your computer to HTC Explorer. You can also
sync email attachments that you stored on HTC Explorer to your computer.
§ To open a document on HTC Explorer, you'll need a compatible app.
on
fid
§ To sync email attachments stored on HTC Explorer to your computer, you must
set up an Exchange ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email account from the Mail app on
HTC Explorer.
1. On the Device panel, click Documents, and then click the On button. Turning
Documents sync on means you want this category included every time you sync
your computer and HTC Explorer.
TC
2. To sync email attachments that you've stored on HTC Explorer, select Copy all
download Mail documents to PC.
3. Select Sync PC documents from, and then click Add.
4. Choose a folder that contains the documents you want to sync on
HTC Explorer, and then click OK.
Email attachments will be saved on the \My Documents\ folder.
138
HTC Sync
Synchronizing HTC Explorer
Check the estimated usage bar beside the Sync now button for the estimated file size
of new items to sync on HTC Explorer.
/1
1. After selecting and customizing the categories you want to sync, click Sync
now.
2. After synchronization is complete, click Disconnect.
09
3. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.
11
The next time you connect HTC Explorer to your computer, synchronization
automatically begins based on your sync settings.
20
Installing an app from your computer to
HTC Explorer
tia
If you have application files (*.apk) on your computer, you can use HTC Sync to
install them to HTC Explorer. We strongly recommend you install only applications
that you trust.
en
Before you begin, make sure that HTC Explorer is set to allow applications from
your computer to be installed toHTC Explorer. To do this, press
while on the
Home screen, tap Settings > Applications, and then select the Unknown sources
check box.
fid
1. On the Device panel, click Overview.
2. Click Application installer.
on
3. Browse for the application file on your computer, and then click Open. The
installation process starts on HTC Explorer.
4. Check the screen on HTC Explorer to see if there are additional instructions to
complete the installation.
TC
5. After installation is complete, you can click Disconnect.
6. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.
139
HTC Sync
Synchronizing another device with your
computer
You can switch from one device to another, if you have more than one device to sync.
/1
1. Connect another device to your computer, then set up HTC Sync to recognize
it.
09
2. Click the device you want to set up or begin synchronization. The Device panel
then opens, where you can separately customize your sync settings for this
device.
11
To switch to another device to sync, click Devices, and then click the device's name or
image.
20
Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade
Visit the HTC support website (www.htc.com/support/) from time to time to check
for the most recent HTC Sync upgrade so you can download and install it on your
computer.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
After installing the latest upgrade, set up HTC Sync again to recognize and sync with
HTC Explorer.
140
HTCSense.com
HTCSense.com
/1
Signing up for your HTCSense.com account
09
You can sign up for your HTCSense.com account on HTC Explorer or your computer’s
web browser.
1. From the Home screen, press
11
Signing up from HTC Explorer
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
20
2. Tap Add account > HTC Sense.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.
Signing up from your computer
tia
Make sure you have HTC Explorer close by. You’ll need it to complete the sign-up
process.
1. On your computer, open your web browser.
en
2. Go to www.htcsense.com.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.
fid
After signing up to HTCSense.com on the Web, you have to sign in using the same
account credentials on HTC Explorer.
on
Updating your HTCSense.com account details
1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.com
account.
2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.
TC
3. Update your account details, and then click Save Changes.
Turning on Device finder
Some features of HTCSense.com require that the Device finder option on
HTC Explorer is selected.
1. On HTC Explorer, from the Home screen, press
2. Tap Location.
3. Select the Device finder check box.
, and then tap Settings.
141
HTCSense.com
Using HTCSense.com
Forgot HTC Explorer at home or you can’t find it? Or worse, it slipped out of your
pocket while riding the train. Use HTCSense.com to communicate with HTC Explorer
so you can forward calls and messages to a different number, make HTC Explorer
ring, lock it, and even erase its contents.
09
/1
To use these features, you'll need to sign in to HTCSense.com on a computer web
browser.
Making HTC Explorer ring
On HTCSense.com, click Ring.
Forwarding calls and messages
20
11
You know HTC Explorer is somewhere in your home but you just can’t find it. Make
HTC Explorer ring, even if it’s on mute, so that you can find it. Hopefully, it’s just
buried under some clothes in the hamper.
tia
You can forward calls and messages to another phone if you don’t have HTC Explorer
with you.
en
Before turning on Forward calls or Forward messages, you need to customize
settings first such as specifying an alternate phone number or email address.
fid
§ To forward calls, click the Forward calls On/Off switch. (Be sure that Enable call
forwarding is selected in Settings.)
on
§ To forward messages, click the Forward messages On/Off switch. (You should
select Forward messages to device or Forward messages to an email address in
Settings.)
Locating HTC Explorer
TC
Left HTC Explorer somewhere while doing your errands? You can use HTCSense.com
to find its approximate location.
You must have the Phone finder option selected in Settings > Location on
HTC Explorer for this feature to work.
On HTCSense.com, check the map to see where HTC Explorer is. Click Refresh
location to refresh the map.
142
HTCSense.com
Locking HTC Explorer
Lost HTC Explorer? Lock HTC Explorer and show a message onscreen so if somebody
finds it, they can contact you.
1. On HTCSense.com, click Lock device.
/1
2. Enter a PIN, an alternate phone number to call if somebody finds HTC Explorer,
and a short message to show onscreen.
09
The alternate number is shown on the screen. If somebody happens to find
HTC Explorer, that person can simply tap it to call that number using HTC Explorer.
Erasing the contents of HTC Explorer
11
3. Click Save.
20
If there’s no chance of getting HTC Explorer back, you can erase the contents of
HTC Explorer and the installed storage card so no one sees sensitive information on
HTC Explorer.
tia
There’s no way to recover HTC Explorer and storage card data after you erase the
contents so be absolutely sure before you proceed.
1. On HTCSense.com, click Erase device.
en
2. When asked to confirm, click Erase device.
fid
Deleting your HTCSense.com account
on
1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.com
account.
2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.
3. Click Click here to delete your HTCSense account.
TC
Deleting your HTCSense.com account will also delete your data on HTCSense.com
servers.
143
Keyboard
Keyboard
/1
Using the onscreen keyboard
11
09
When you start an app or select a field that requires text or numbers, the onscreen
keyboard becomes available. After entering your text, you can tap
or press
to
close the onscreen keyboard.
Selecting a keyboard layout
You can choose from three different keyboard layouts to suit your typing style.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
20
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
2. Tap Keyboard types, and then select the keyboard layout that you want to use.
Phone
tia
Standard This layout is similar to a desktop computer keyboard. This is the
default keyboard layout.
This layout resembles the traditional mobile phone keypad.
fid
en
Compact This layout features two letters on each key. The key size is slightly
bigger than on the Standard layout.
Entering text
on
Use the following keys while entering text using the onscreen keyboard:
Press and hold keys with gray characters at the top to enter numbers, symbols,
or accented letters. The gray character displayed on the key is the character that
will be inserted when you press and hold that key. Some keys have multiple
characters or accents associated with them.
TC
Shift key. Tap to enter an uppercase letter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.
Tap to switch to the numeric and symbol keyboard.
Enter key. Tap to create a new line.
Backspace key. Tap to delete the previous character.
Language key. The key you see depends on the keyboard language you are
currently using. Tap to switch to another keyboard language. You can also
access onscreen keyboard settings.
144
Keyboard
Tap to toggle between Multitap and XT9 predictive modes when using the
Compact or Phone keyboard layout.
Tap to hide the onscreen keyboard.
/1
Enabling multiple keyboard languages
09
If there are multiple keyboard languages available on HTC Explorer, you can choose
which languages to enable in the onscreen keyboard so that you can switch to these
languages and use them to enter text.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
11
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
2. Tap International keyboard.
20
3. Choose the languages you want.
Available languages depend on the region where you purchased HTC Explorer.
tia
Changing to the landscape onscreen keyboard
When entering text, you can choose to use the landscape orientation of the onscreen
keyboard. Turn HTC Explorer sideways to use a larger keyboard for easy typing.
en
§ Select the Auto-rotate screen check box in
the screen orientation to automatically change.
> Settings > Display to allow
fid
§ The landscape orientation keyboard is not supported in all apps.
on
Entering words with predictive text
TC
The onscreen keyboard has predictive text to help you type quickly and accurately.
Predictive text input is enabled by default, and word suggestions are displayed as you
type.
To enter a word in predictive mode, do any of the following:
§ If you see the word you want highlighted in green or orange, just tap the space
bar to insert the word into your text.
§ If you see the word you want shown in the suggestions before you have finished
typing the entire word, tap the word to insert it into your text.
§ If an arrow is shown to the right of the suggestion list, tap the arrow to see more
suggestions.
145
Keyboard
Setting a second language for the keyboard
Aside from the keyboard language you are currently using, you can set the predictive
text to be bilingual. As you type, you’ll get word suggestions in two languages that
you’ve selected.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
/1
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
Adding a word to the predictive text dictionary
09
2. Tap Bilingual prediction, and then choose the language you want.
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
20
You can also add a word to the list manually.
11
HTC Explorer comes with a list of words that it references for predictive text
suggestions. While entering text using the Standard keyboard layout, if you tap any
word on the suggestion list, it is automatically added to the predictive text dictionary
if it was not in the dictionary already.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary >
tia
3. Enter the word to add, and then tap OK.
en
Editing or deleting a word in the predictive text dictionary
You can edit or remove words that you previously added to the predictive text
dictionary.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
on
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary.
§ To edit a word, tap the word itself.
§ To delete words from the dictionary, press
the words to remove and tap Delete.
and tap Delete. Then choose
TC
Backing up your personal dictionary to your storage card
If you have a storage card installed, you can back up the new words you’ve added to
the predictive text dictionary.
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Copy to storage card.
3. When prompted, tap OK.
146
Keyboard
Importing your personal dictionary from your storage card
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Restore from storage
card.
09
/1
3. When prompted, tap OK.
Entering text by speaking
11
No time to type? Try speaking the words to enter them in most text fields that let you
use the onscreen keyboard.
20
§ First make sure to select the language you’ll be using in the Voice input & output
settings.
§ Since HTC Explorer uses Google’s speech-recognition service, you need to be
connected to the Internet to enter text by speaking.
tia
1. Press and hold the language key. HTC Explorer cues you to speak.
en
2. Tell HTC Explorer what you want to be typed in.
Setting the voice input language
, then tap Settings > Voice input & output >
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
Voice recognizer settings.
on
2. Tap Language, then choose the language you want.
TC
Available languages depend on the voice input languages supported by Google.
147
Keyboard
Entering text by tracing
/1
Trace keyboard in Settings > Language & keyboard > Touch Input > Trace
keyboard must be selected for you to use the Trace keyboard.
Instead of tapping the keys on the onscreen keyboard, you can "trace" to type words.
en
Editing text
tia
20
11
09
To trace, slide your finger on the onscreen keyboard to enter words. For example, if
you want to type “the”, put your finger on the “t” key, and then trace the word (by
sliding your finger) “the” on the onscreen keyboard.
fid
It's easy to cut, copy, and paste text using the keyboard.
Some apps may offer their own way of selecting or copying text.
on
Selecting text
Highlight the text that you want to copy or cut.
TC
1. Press and hold the text field that contains the text to select until the magnifier
appears.
2. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to a letter within the text that you
want to select.
148
Keyboard
3. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu then
pops up.
4. Do one of the following:
11
§ Tap Select all to select everything in the text field.
09
/1
§ Tap Select word. When the word where you’ve placed the text cursor is
highlighted, drag the start and end markers to select the text you want.
Copying and pasting text
20
1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy or Cut. The
selected text is then copied to the clipboard.
2. Press and hold a text field in the same or other app until the magnifier appears.
3. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to where you want to paste the text.
tia
4. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu then
pops up.
en
5. Tap Paste.
Adjusting input settings
fid
Open the Touch Input settings by doing one of the following:
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
on
§ From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
§ On the onscreen keyboard, tap the language key (for example, tap
if you’re
currently using the English onscreen keyboard). Then on the International
keyboard options menu, tap Settings.
TC
You must have more than two keyboard languages selected before you can access
Touch Input settings using the language key.
Keyboard types
Select the keyboard layout to use.
International
keyboard
Add or remove languages from the onscreen keyboard
language list.
Bilingual prediction
Select a secondary keyboard language to use.
Text input
§ Turn on or off predictive text, spell correction, and word
completion.
§ Enable audible or vibration feedback when typing.
§ Calibrate the touch keyboard accuracy.
149
Keyboard
Learn how to use the onscreen keyboard with this interactive
tutorial.
Trace keyboard
Turn on Trace keyboard and set options when tracing to
enter text.
Personal dictionary
Add, edit, or remove words in the predictive text dictionary.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
/1
Tutorial
150
Internet connections
Internet connections
/1
Data connection
1. From the Home screen, press
11
Checking the data connection you're using
09
When you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, it will be automatically set up to use
your mobile operator's data connection (if the SIM card is inserted).
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
20
2. Tap Mobile networks > Network operators or Access Point Names.
Turning the data connection on or off
tia
Turning your data connection off can help save battery life and save money on data
charges. However, if you don’t have data connection turned on and you’re also not
connected to a Wi-Fi network, you won’t receive automatic updates to your email,
social network accounts, and other synchronized information.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
en
1. From the Home screen, press
fid
2. Select the Mobile network check box to turn on the data connection; clear the
check box to turn off the data connection.
Adding a new access point
on
Before you add another data connection, have the access point name and settings
(including username and password if required) from your mobile operator ready.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Mobile networks > Access Point Names.
TC
3. On the APNs screen, press
and then tap New APN.
4. On the Edit access point screen, enter the APN settings. Tap an APN setting
item to edit it.
5. Press
and then tap Save.
151
Internet connections
Enabling data roaming
Connect to your mobile operator’s partner networks and access data services when
you’re out of your mobile operator’s coverage area.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
09
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
Using data services while roaming will be costly. Check with your mobile operator
for data roaming rates before you use data roaming.
2. Tap Mobile networks, and then select the Data roaming check box.
11
Select the Data roaming sound check box if you’d like HTC Explorer to play a sound
so you’ll know when it’s connecting to a roaming network.
20
Wi-Fi
To use Wi-Fi, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot”. The availability
and strength of the Wi-Fi signal will vary depending on objects, such as buildings or
simply a wall between rooms, the Wi-Fi signal has to pass through.
tia
Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a wireless network
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
en
2. Select the Wi-Fi check box to turn Wi-Fi on.
HTC Explorer then scans for available wireless networks.
fid
3. Tap Wi-Fi settings.
Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
on
If the wireless network that you want is not listed, tap Add Wi-Fi network to
manually add it.
4. Tap the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to.
TC
If you selected a secured network, you'll be asked to enter the network key or
password.
5. Tap Connect.
When HTC Explorer is connected to the wireless network, the Wi-Fi icon
appears
in the status bar and tells you the approximate signal strength (number of bands that
light up).
The next time HTC Explorer connects to a previously accessed secured wireless
network, you won’t be asked to enter the key or other security information again,
unless you reset HTC Explorer to its factory default settings.
152
Internet connections
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS security
You may need to install a network certificate (*.p12) to HTC Explorer before you can
connect to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS authentication protocol.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
/1
2. From the Home screen, press
1. Save the certificate file to the root folder of the storage card.
3. Tap Install from SD card.
Checking the wireless network status
1. From the Home screen, press
11
5. Turn on Wi-Fi and connect to a wireless network.
09
4. Select the network certificate needed to connect to the EAP-TLS network.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
20
2. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi settings, and then tap the wireless
network that HTC Explorer is currently connected to.
A message box is then displayed showing the Wi-Fi network name, status, speed,
signal strength, and more.
en
tia
If you want to remove the settings for this network, tap Forget. If you want to
reconnect to a wireless network that you have removed, you'll need to choose the
wireless network from the list of available Wi-Fi networks again. If it is a secured
wireless network, you'll need to enter the wireless network credentials again.
fid
Connecting to another Wi-Fi network
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
on
2. Tap Wi-Fi settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi
networks section.
3. To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks, on the Wi-Fi screen, press
and then tap Scan.
TC
4. Tap another Wi-Fi network to connect to it.
Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)
Add, set up, and manage virtual private networks (VPNs) so you can connect and
access resources inside a secured local network, such as your corporate network.
Depending on the type of VPN you’re using at work, you may be asked to enter your
login credentials and install security certificates before you can connect to your
company’s local network. You can get this information from your network
administrator.
Also, HTC Explorer must first establish a Wi-Fi or data connection before you can
start a VPN connection.
153
Internet connections
Setting up secure credential storage
If your network administrator tells you to download and install security certificates,
you must first set up secure credential storage on HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
1. From the Home screen, press
3. Enter a new password for the credential storage.
09
4. Scroll down and confirm the password, and then tap OK.
/1
2. Tap Set password.
5. Select the Use secure credentials check box.
11
You can then download and install the certificates needed to access your local
network. Your network administrator can tell you how to do this.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Adding a VPN connection
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap VPN settings > Add VPN, and then tap the type of VPN you want to add.
4. Press
tia
3. Tap the VPN settings and set them up according to the security details your
network administrator gave you.
, and then tap Save.
en
The VPN is then added to the VPNs section of the VPN settings screen.
Connecting to a VPN
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap VPN settings.
on
3. In the VPNs section, tap the VPN that you want to connect to.
4. When asked, enter your log in credentials, and then tap Connect. When you’re
connected, the VPN connected icon
appears in the notification area of the
title bar.
TC
You can then open the web browser to access resources such as your corporate
network intranet.
Disconnecting from a VPN
1. Press and hold the title bar, and then slide down your finger to open the
Notifications panel.
2. Tap the VPN connection to return to the VPN settings screen, and then tap the
VPN connection to disconnect from it.
When HTC Explorer has disconnected from the VPN, the VPN disconnected icon
displayed in the notification area of the title bar.
is
154
Internet connections
Using HTC Explorer as a modem
(USB tethering)
No Internet connection available for your computer? No problem. Use the Internet
connection of HTC Explorer to connect to the Internet.
/1
§ You need your SIM card inserted on HTC Explorer to use the data connection.
09
§ To use HTC Explorer as a modem, you need to install HTC Sync on your computer
first.
11
§ You must have an approved data plan associated with your account from your
mobile service provider to use this service.
1. Make sure the data connection on HTC Explorer is turned on.
20
2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.
3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select USB tethering, and then tap
Done.
en
tia
Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internet
through a computer (Internet Pass-through)
fid
If you temporarily don’t have Internet access, you can still go online on HTC Explorer
by using your computer’s Internet connection.
on
Before you can use your computer as a modem, be sure to install HTC Sync on
your computer first.
1. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet.
TC
Two things to check for your computer’s Internet connection. One, you may need
to turn off your local network’s firewall. Two, if your computer connects to the
Internet via PPP (e.g. Dial UP, xDSL, or VPN), Internet Pass-through will only
support TCP protocol.
2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.
3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Internet pass-through, and then
tap Done.
155
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
/1
Bluetooth basics
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Select or clear the Bluetooth check box.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
Turning Bluetooth on or off
20
An even easier way to turn Bluetooth on or off is with the Bluetooth widget on the
Home screen.
tia
Changing the device name
Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to save battery power, or in places where using
a wireless device is prohibited, such as on board an aircraft and in hospitals.
The device name identifies HTC Explorer to other devices.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
en
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
fid
4. Tap Device name.
on
5. Enter the new name for HTC Explorer in the dialog box, and then tap OK.
Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit
TC
You can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo headset, or have hands-free
conversations using a compatible Bluetooth headset or car kit. It’s the same
procedure to set up stereo audio and hands-free.
§ For you to listen to music with your headset or car kit, the headset or car kit must
support the A2DP Bluetooth profile.
§ Before you connect your headset, you need to make it discoverable so
HTC Explorer can find it. You can find out how to do this by referring to your
headset manual.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
156
Bluetooth
4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.
5. Tap Scan for devices. HTC Explorer will start to scan for Bluetooth devices
within range.
/1
6. When you see the name of your headset displayed in the Bluetooth devices
section, tap the name. HTC Explorer then automatically tries to pair with the
headset.
7. If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode supplied with your headset.
11
09
The pairing and connection status is displayed below the hands-free headset or car kit
name in the Bluetooth devices section. When the Bluetooth headset or car kit is
connected to HTC Explorer, the Bluetooth connected icon
is displayed in the
status bar. Depending on the type of headset or car kit you have connected, you can
then start using the headset or car kit.
20
Reconnecting a headset or car kit
Normally, you can easily reconnect your headset by switching on Bluetooth on
HTC Explorer, and then turning on the headset. However, you might have to connect
manually if your headset has been used with another Bluetooth device.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
tia
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
en
4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.
5. Tap the headset’s name in the Bluetooth devices section.
fid
6. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234, or consult the headset/car
kit documentation to find the passcode.
TC
on
If you still cannot reconnect to the headset or car kit, follow the instructions in
Unpairing from a Bluetooth device on page 157, and then follow the steps under
Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit on page 155.
Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth
device
Disconnecting a Bluetooth device
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to disconnect.
4. Tap Disconnect.
157
Bluetooth
Unpairing from a Bluetooth device
You can make HTC Explorer forget its pairing connection with another Bluetooth
device. Doing so may require you to enter or confirm a passcode again if you want to
reconnect to the other device.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
09
3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to unpair.
11
4. Tap Disconnect & unpair, or tap Unpair if the Bluetooth device is currently not
connected to HTC Explorer.
Sending information using Bluetooth
20
You can use Bluetooth to send information from HTC Explorer to another Bluetooth
enabled device such as a phone or notebook computer. You can send the following
types of information, depending on the device you are sending to:
§ Audio files
en
§ Contacts
tia
§ Calendar events
§ Images and videos
fid
Before you begin, set the receiving device to discoverable mode. You may also
need to set it to “Receive Beams” or “Receive Files”. Refer to the device’s
documentation for instructions on receiving information over Bluetooth.
on
1. On HTC Explorer, open the app that contains the information or file you want to
send.
2. Follow the steps for the type of item you want to send:
Photos or videos
1. On the Gallery app, choose an album.
2. Tap
> Bluetooth.
3. Choose the photos and videos you want to share, and
then tap Next.
TC
Captured photo or After capturing, on the Camera preview screen, tap
video
and then tap Bluetooth.
Contact
1. On the People app, tap a contact to view the contact's
details.
2. Press
and then tap Send contact.
3. Tap the down arrow icon, and then select Bluetooth.
4. Choose which details to share, and then tap Send.
Bluetooth
Calendar
appointment or
event
In Day view, Agenda view, or Week view, press and hold
the event, and then tap Forward > Bluetooth.
Music track
1. With the track displayed on the Music app’s Now playing
screen, tap
> Share > Share file.
158
On the main Voice Recorder screen, tap
Bluetooth.
, and then tap
09
Voice recording
/1
2. Tap Bluetooth.
3. Turn on Bluetooth if you’re asked to do so.
5. Tap the name of the receiving device.
11
4. If you haven't paired with the receiving device before, tap Scan for devices.
20
6. If prompted, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receiving
device. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcode
on both devices.
7. On the receiving device, accept the file.
tia
Where sent information is saved
When you send information using Bluetooth, the location where it's saved depends on
the type of information and the receiving device.
fid
en
If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally added directly to the
corresponding application on the receiving device. For example, if you send a
calendar event to a compatible phone, the event is shown in that phone’s calendar
application.
If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it is normally saved in the
Bluetooth Exchange folder within your personal document folders.
on
§ On Windows XP, the path may be: C:\Documents and Settings\[your
username]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange
§ On Windows Vista, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents
TC
§ On Windows 7, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\My Documents
\Bluetooth Exchange Folder
If you send a file to another device, the saved location may depend on the file type.
For example, if you send an image file to another mobile phone, it may be saved in a
folder named “Images”.
Receiving information using Bluetooth
HTC Explorer lets you receive various files with Bluetooth, including photos, music
tracks, and documents such as PDFs.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
159
Bluetooth
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
4. Select the Discoverable check box.
5. On the sending device, send one or more files to HTC Explorer. Refer to the
device’s documentation for instructions on sending information over Bluetooth.
09
You'll then get a Bluetooth authorization request.
/1
6. If asked, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receiving
device. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcode
on both devices.
11
7. If you want to automatically receive files from the sending device in future,
select the Always check box.
8. Tap Accept or OK.
20
9. When HTC Explorer receives a file transfer request notification, slide down the
Notifications panel, tap the incoming file notification, and then tap Accept.
10. When a file is transferred, a notification is displayed. To open the file
immediately, slide down the Notifications panel, and then tap the relevant
notification.
tia
When you open a received file, what happens next depends on the file type:
§ Media files and documents are usually opened directly in a compatible app. For
example, if you open a music track, it starts playing in the Music app.
en
§ For a vCalendar file, choose the calendar where you want to save the event, and
then tap Import. The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.
fid
§ For a vCard contact file, you can choose to import one, several, or all of those
contacts to your contacts list.
on
Adding the Bluetooth received folder to the Home screen
You can add a folder to the Home screen that shows all files you have received with
Bluetooth.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Personalize.
TC
2. On the Personalize screen, tap Folder > Bluetooth received.
3. Press and hold the Bluetooth received folder icon, and drag it to the Home
screen position you want.
To view the folder contents, tap the folder icon. To open a file, tap the file name.
160
Security
/1
Protecting your SIM card with a PIN
Security
09
Add another layer of security for HTC Explorer by assigning a PIN (personal
identification number) to your SIM.
1. From the Home screen, press
11
Make sure you have the default SIM PIN provided by your mobile operator before
continuing.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
20
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock, then select Lock SIM card.
3. Enter the default SIM card PIN, and then tap OK.
4. To change the SIM card PIN, tap Change SIM PIN.
tia
Restoring a SIM card that has been locked out
If you enter the wrong PIN more times than the maximum number of attempts
allowed, your SIM card will become “PUK-locked.”
en
You need a PUK code to restore access to HTC Explorer. This code may have been
provided by your mobile operator when you received your SIM card.
fid
1. On the Phone dialer screen, enter the PUK code, and then tap Next.
2. Enter the new PIN you want to use, and then tap Next.
on
3. Enter the new PIN again, and then tap OK.
TC
Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lock
pattern, PIN, or password
Protect your personal information and prevent others from using HTC Explorer
without your permission by setting a screen lock pattern, PIN or password.
Your screen lock will be asked every time HTC Explorer is turned on or when it’s idle
for a certain period of time.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Set up screen lock.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
161
Security
3. Tap one of the following:
Disable the screen lock you’ve previously created.
Pattern
Set a screen lock pattern by following the onscreen instructions.
PIN
Set a numeric password of at least four digits.
None
/1
Password Set an alpha-numeric password.
09
4. On the Security screen, tap Lock phone after, then specify the idle time you can
allow before the screen is locked.
11
You can also clear the Use visible pattern or Visible passwords on the Security
screen if you don’t want your screen lock to display as you enter it onscreen.
Changing your screen lock
, and then tap Settings > Security.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Change screen lock.
3. Enter your current screen lock to confirm that you want to change it.
en
tia
4. Choose a different screen lock type, then enter your new pattern, PIN, or
password. Or tap None if you don’t want to use a screen lock.
Forgot your screen lock pattern?
fid
If you’ve forgotten your screen lock pattern, you have up to five attempts to
try and unlock HTC Explorer.
on
If this fails, you can unlock HTC Explorer by entering your Google Account
user name and password.
1. On the unlock screen, enter your lock pattern.
TC
2. After the fifth attempt, when you’re asked to wait for 30 seconds, tap
OK.
3. If the display goes off, press the POWER button to turn the display back
on, and then unlock the screen.
4. Tap the Forgot pattern? button when it appears.
5. Enter your Google Account name and password, and then tap Sign in.
You’ll then be asked to create a new screen lock pattern. If you no
longer want to do so, tap Cancel.
162
Security
Encrypting data on HTC Explorer
You can encrypt data on HTC Explorer such as your online accounts, settings, and
other information.
, and then tap Settings.
1. From the Home screen, press
3. Under Internal storage, tap Storage encryption.
09
4. Set a password, and then tap OK. The encryption process starts.
/1
2. Tap SD & phone storage.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
If you want to stop encrypting new information on HTC Explorer, deselect the Storage
encryption checkbox.
163
Settings
Settings
From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
09
Control and customize phone settings on the Settings screen.
/1
Settings on HTC Explorer
Make HTC Explorer truly yours with the various personalization
options available.
Wireless &
networks
Set up wireless connections, such as Wi-Fi, data connection, and
Bluetooth, enable Airplane mode, and more.
Call
Set up call services such as voicemail, call forwarding, call waiting,
and caller ID.
Sound
§ Choose sounds to use for the ringtones and notifications.
20
11
Personalize
tia
§ Adjust media playback volume.
en
§ Set to lower the ring volume when you move HTC Explorer when
it’s ringing, make it ring louder when inside a bag or pocket, and
turn on the speakerphone when you flip it over.
Set up display settings such as automatic screen orientation,
brightness, screen timeout, and more.
fid
Display
Accounts &
sync
§ Log in or out of your social network accounts, Google Account,
and Exchange ActiveSync account.
on
§ Sign in or out of your HTCSense.com account.
TC
Location
§ You can also manage synchronization and other settings for your
accounts.
§ Select the sources to use when determining your location.
§ Select Phone finder so you can use HTCSense.com to locate
HTC Explorer.
Search
Select items to include when you do a search and set Google
search options.
Privacy
§ Choose to automatically back up some settings (e.g. Wi-Fi
passwords or Bookmarks) to Google servers using your Google
Account so you can restore them when needed.
§ If you don't want missed calls and your received text message
appear on the lock screen, clear the Display message text check
box.
164
Settings
Connect to PC
§ Set the default USB connection type to use whenever you
connect HTC Explorer to your computer.
§ Or, select the Ask me check box to set HTC Explorer to always
display the screen for selecting the USB connection type.
Set a screen lock, enable the SIM card lock, or manage the
credential storage.
Power
§ Turn on power saver to automatically switch to power saving
mode when the battery level goes down to the level that you set.
09
/1
Security
§ Manage running applications, move applications to or from the
storage card, check how much storage is used by apps, and install
or uninstall programs.
20
Applications
11
§ Another power saving option is to select Enable sleep mode. This
will turn off auto sync of data in your online accounts.
§ Choose how much free memory remains before you're notified
about low memory space.
§ Check the available space in the internal storage and your storage
card.
tia
SD & phone
storage
en
§ From this screen, be sure to unmount your storage card before
you remove it from HTC Explorer.
fid
§ Erase the storage card to start afresh and if you don't need to
keep the content. You need to unmount the storage card first
before you can erase it.
on
§ Clear out the cache used by apps, move apps or uninstall apps if
HTC Explorer is running low on memory.
TC
Date & time
§ You can also do a factory reset.
§ Set the date and time, time zone, and date or time format.
§ Choose the time and date formats that suit you.
Language &
keyboard
Set the operating system language and region. You can also set
onscreen keyboard options.
Accessibility
Use these settings when you’ve downloaded and installed an
accessibility tool, such as a screen reader that provides voice
feedback. You can turn accessibility functions or services on or off.
165
Settings
Set up the voice input options. Also, if you’ve installed a text-tospeech (voice data) application, use this to set the text-to-speech
settings.
About phone
§ Turn on or off scheduled checks for system software updates, or
manually check for updates.
Voice input &
output
/1
§ Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you're helping us know if
HTC Explorer encounters a technical problem.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Adjusting the screen brightness manually
11
Changing display settings
09
§ View different information about HTC Explorer, such as the
mobile network type, signal strength, battery level, and more.
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Display > Brightness.
3. Clear the Automatic brightness check box.
tia
4. Drag the brightness slider to the left to decrease or to the right to increase the
screen brightness.
en
5. Tap OK.
Adjusting the time before the screen turns off
fid
After a period of inactivity, the screen turns off to conserve battery power. You can
set the idle time before the screen turns off.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
on
2. Tap Display > Screen timeout.
3. Tap the time before the screen turns off.
TC
Turning automatic screen rotation off
By default, the screen orientation automatically adjusts depending on how you hold
HTC Explorer.
Automatic rotation is not supported in all application screens.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Display.
3. Clear the Auto-rotate screen check box.
166
Settings
Recalibrating the G-sensor
Recalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen orientation does not respond
properly to the way you hold HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings.
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
2. Tap Display > G-Sensor calibration.
3. Place HTC Explorer on a flat and level surface, and then tap Calibrate.
09
4. After the recalibration process, tap OK.
Keeping the screen on while charging HTC Explorer
1. From the Home screen, press
11
You can keep the screen from turning off while you’re charging HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings.
3. Select the Stay awake check box.
20
2. Tap Applications > Development.
Switching animation effects on or off
tia
You can turn off the animation or enable only some animations when switching
between screens.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
en
2. Tap Display > Animation.
fid
3. On the options menu, select the animation setting you want.
on
Changing sound settings
Switching between silent, vibration, and normal modes
Do one of the following:
TC
§ To change back from silent to normal mode, simply press the VOLUME UP
button.
§ To change back from vibration to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP button
twice.
§ From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Sound > Sound profile.
Enabling or disabling audible selection
You can choose to play a sound when you’re selecting items onscreen.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Sound.
3. Select or clear the Audible selection check box.
167
Settings
Lowering the ring volume automatically
HTC Explorer has a quiet ring feature that automatically lowers the ring volume when
you move it.
, and then tap Settings.
1. From the Home screen, press
3. Select or clear the Quiet ring on pickup check box.
09
Making HTC Explorer ring louder with Pocket mode
/1
2. Tap Sound.
, and then tap Settings.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
11
To help avoid missing incoming calls when HTC Explorer is in your pocket or bag, the
pocket mode feature gradually increases the ring volume and vibrates when you
receive a call. When not in your pocket or bag, HTC Explorer will ring at the normal
volume you set.
2. Tap Sound.
3. Select or clear the Pocket mode check box.
tia
Switching to speakerphone automatically
en
When you're on a call, you can switch to speakerphone by simply flipping
HTC Explorer over.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Sound.
, and then tap Settings.
fid
3. Select or clear the Flip for speaker check box.
on
Changing the language
TC
When you turn HTC Explorer on for the first time, you’re asked to choose the
language you want to use. If you want, you can still change the language after you set
up HTC Explorer. Changing the language adjusts the keyboard layout, date and time
formatting, and more.
The languages available to choose from may depend on the version of HTC Explorer
you have.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Language & keyboard > Select language.
168
Settings
3. Tap the language and corresponding region you want to use.
4. Press
to return to the Home screen. The new language will be applied after a
few seconds.
/1
Optimizing battery life
1. From the Home screen, press
09
You can set HTC Explorer to automatically switch to power saver mode when the
battery level reaches a certain level.
, and then tap Settings.
11
2. Tap Power.
3. Tap Power mode > Economy.
20
4. Tap Turn power saver on at, and then select when to switch to power saver
mode.
5. Tap Economy mode settings, and then set and select the behavior when
HTC Explorer switches to power saver mode.
Switching to GSM network mode
tia
Switch to using GSM network if you’re not using a data connection to connect to the
Internet. Connecting to GSM network mode consumes less battery power.
en
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Network Mode.
fid
3. Tap GSM only.
Checking the power usage of applications
on
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
TC
2. Tap About phone > Battery > Battery use.
169
Settings
Scheduling HTC Explorer to switch to Sleep mode
Set the Sleep mode schedule on HTC Explorer so it doesn't consume too much
battery power when it's not plugged in at night.
, and then tap Settings.
09
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
Unlike the usual Sleep mode when you press the POWER button to turn off the
screen display, a scheduled Sleep mode turns off the Wi-Fi and data connections
during the Sleep mode schedule you defined.
2. Tap Power > Enable sleep mode.
11
3. Tap any of the following:
20
Automatic Select to automatically switch HTC Explorer to Sleep mode.
HTC Explorer adjusts its Sleep mode schedule over a period of
time around what it detects as your bedtime.
Select to specify the Sleep mode start and end time.
Never
Select to turn scheduled Sleep mode off.
tia
Manual
en
Managing memory
Checking how much phone memory is available for use
, and then tap Settings.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
on
2. Tap SD & phone storage. The available phone memory is displayed in the
Internal storage section.
Checking the available storage card space
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
TC
2. Tap SD & phone storage. The total and available storage card space is displayed
in the SD card section.
Making more storage space
Easily free up some storage by cleaning up the application cache, moving or
uninstalling apps, and deleting old mails and messages all in one go.
You cannot move or uninstall preinstalled apps.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap SD & phone storage > Make more space.
170
Settings
3. On the Clear caches screen, choose whether to clear the cache of rarely used
apps only or all apps, and then tap Next.
4. On the Application storage screen:
§ Tap Move apps to SD card if there are apps that you can transfer to the
storage card.
/1
§ Tap Uninstall apps if there are apps you'd like to remove.
5. Tap Next.
09
6. On the Mail & message storage screen:
11
§ Set fewer days of mails to download so that older mails will be removed
from the storage automatically.
§ Lower the number of text and multimedia messages per conversation.
7. Tap Finish.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Clearing application cache and data
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.
tia
3. On the All tab, tap an application.
4. On the screen, tap Clear data and/or Clear cache.
en
Uninstalling third-party applications
You cannot uninstall applications that are preinstalled on HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.
3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to uninstall.
on
4. Tap Uninstall.
Moving applications to or from the storage card
TC
Move downloaded applications to the storage card if the internal storage on
HTC Explorer is getting low. Or, if your storage card is getting full, you can also move
applications from the storage card to the internal storage.
You can only move applications that are not preinstalled on HTC Explorer.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.
3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to move.
4. Tap Move to SD card or Move to phone.
171
Settings
Stopping running applications using Task Manager
Use Task Manager to free up memory by stopping running applications that you're
not currently using.
to the right of the application name to stop it.
/1
2. In the All applications list, tap
> Task Manager.
1. From the Home screen, tap
, and then tap Settings.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
Checking information about HTC Explorer
2. Tap About phone.
20
3. Select one of the following:
Enable or disable the automatic check feature for software
updates for HTC Explorer. You can also tap Check now to
manually check for software updates.
Tell HTC
Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you’re helping us
know if HTC Explorer encounters a technical problem. You
can also choose when you want to send error reports.
Network
Check information about your mobile network and its
service status.
en
tia
Software
updates
fid
Phone identity
TC
on
Battery
Check information about HTC Explorer and the SIM card
you’re using.
Check information about the battery such as its current
battery level, status, and what programs are using the
battery.
Hardware
information
Check the Wi-Fi MAC and Bluetooth addresses.
Software
information
Check the version and other information about the Android
platform being used by HTC Explorer. You can also check
the version of the web browser.
Legal
information
Read legal information from HTC and Google, and licenses
used by HTC Explorer.
172
Update and reset
Update and reset
/1
Software updates
11
09
From time to time, software updates for HTC Explorer may be available. HTC Explorer
can check and then notify you if there’s a new update. You can then download and
install the software update using the Wi-Fi or data connection. You can also manually
check if there's an available software update.
20
Depending on the type of update, the update may erase all your personal data and
customized settings, and also remove any applications you’ve installed. Make sure that
you’ve backed up the information and files you want to keep.
Checking and downloading software updates may incur extra data fees.
tia
Installing an update
en
When the Internet connection is on and there's a new update available, the system
update dialog box appears and guides you through the process.
1. If you don't see the dialog box, check for the update notification icon
status bar.
in the
fid
Slide open the Notifications panel, and then tap the update notification.
2. In the system update dialog box, choose what type of connection to use for
downloading the update.
on
Follow the onscreen prompts to start the download.
3. After the download is complete, tap Install now and then tap OK in the Install
system software update dialog box.
TC
Wait for the update to finish. HTC Explorer will then restart automatically.
Checking for updates manually
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap About phone > Software updates > Check now.
173
Update and reset
Restarting HTC Explorer
If HTC Explorer is running slower than normal, an application is not performing
properly, or HTC Explorer becomes unresponsive, try restarting HTC Explorer and see
if that helps solve the problem.
2. Unlock the display.
09
3. Press and hold the POWER button, and then tap Restart.
/1
1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on.
4. When asked to confirm, tap Restart.
20
Resetting HTC Explorer
11
If these steps don't work, you can remove and replace the battery, and then turn
HTC Explorer on to restart it.
Do a factory reset to return HTC Explorer to its original state before the first time you
turned it on.
fid
en
tia
If you’re passing HTC Explorer on to someone else or HTC Explorer has a persistent
problem that cannot be solved, you can perform a factory reset (also called a hard
reset). Factory reset is not a step to be taken lightly. It’ll permanently delete all your
data and customized settings, and will remove any applications you’ve downloaded
and installed. Be sure to back up any data and files you want to keep before you do a
factory reset.
Performing a factory reset via settings
The most convenient way to do a factory reset is via the settings.
on
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap SD & phone storage > Factory data reset.
3. Tap Reset phone, and then tap Erase everything.
TC
Performing a factory reset using hardware buttons
If you can’t turn HTC Explorer on or access settings, you can still perform a factory
reset by using the hardware buttons on HTC Explorer.
1. Remove the battery, wait for a few seconds, then reinsert the battery.
2. Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button, and then briefly press the POWER
button.
3. Wait for the screen with the three Android images to appear, and then release
the VOLUME DOWN button.
4. Press VOLUME DOWN to select FACTORY RESET, and then press the POWER
button.
174
Trademarks and copyrights
Trademarks and copyrights
HTC Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
©2011
/1
HTC, the HTC logo, the HTC quietly brilliant logo, HTC Explorer, HTC Sense, and HTC
Sync are trademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.
©2011
11
09
Google Inc. Used with permission. Google, the Google logo, Android, the
Android logo, Android Market, the Android Market logo, Google Apps, Google
Calendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google
Talk, Gmail, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.
20
Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Outlook, Windows Media, and Windows Vista are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
tia
This device contains Adobe® Flash® Player software under license from Adobe
Systems Incorporated. Copyright ©1995–2011 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
en
microSD is a trademark of SD Card Association.
Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.
fid
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc.
All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,
registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
TC
on
HTC shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein,
nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this material.
The information is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind and is subject to
change without notice. HTC also reserves the right to revise the content of this
document at any time without prior notice.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior written
permission of HTC.
175
Index
Index
09
3G 150
20
11
Airplane mode 48
Alarm 96
Android Market 93
Apps
- deleting 94
- installing 93, 138
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Back up contacts 66
Battery
- installing 13
- optimizing battery life 168
Bluetooth
- connecting a Bluetooth headset or
car kit 155
- disconnecting or unpairing 156
- sending information 157
- sharing music 92
- turning on or off 155
Browser
- bookmarks 53
- navigating and zooming 51
- opening a new window 51
- options 54
- using 50
- effects 80
- recording a video 80
- taking a photo 79
- zooming 79
Change phone language 167
Sound
- audible selection 166
- lowering ring volume
automatically 167
- Pocket mode 167
- switching profiles 166
- switching to speakerphone 167
Clock 95
Conference call 43
Contacts
- adding 63
- copying from SIM card 62
- deleting 67
Copying text 26
/1
Symbols
Calendar
- creating an event 122
- managing events 124
- reminders 126
- settings 126
- views 123
- widget 127
Call history 45
Camera
- basics 78
Data connection
- access point 150
- turning on or off 150
Delete apps 94
Delete contacts 67
Display
- adjusting screen brightness 165
- changing the time before the screen
turns off 165
- recalibrating G-sensor 166
- turning off screen rotation 165
Downloading
- from Web 52
- viewing downloads 53
Email 113
Exchange ActiveSync
- Out of office 121
176
Index
- sending a meeting request 121
- working with Exchange ActiveSync
email 120
Gallery
- about 82
- editing photos 84
- sending photos and videos 85
- sharing photos and videos 86
- viewing photos 83
- viewing photos in social networks 88
- watching video 84
Getting started 8
Gmail 112
Google Account 56
Google Maps 128
Keyboard
- copying and pasting text 148
- dictionary 145
- editing text 147
- entering text 143
- entering text by speaking 146
- predictive text 144
- selecting text 147
20
tia
en
fid
TC
on
Hands free 155
Hard reset 173
Headphones 155
Home dialing 46
Home screen
- about 17
- adding widgets 30
- extended 17
- rearranging items 32
- rearranging the home panels 33
HTC Clock
- Desk Clock 95
- setting an alarm 96
- World Clock 95
HTCSense.com 140
11
09
/1
Facebook
- sharing your location 75
Facebook for HTC Sense 73
Factory reset 173
Firmware 172
Flight mode 48
FM Radio 100
Icons
- notification icons 22
- status icons 21
Internet calling 44
Internet connection
- data connection 150
- Internet pass-through 154
- Tethering 154
- VPN 152
- Wi-Fi 151
Internet pass-through 154
Language 167
Leap view 18
Locations
- turning on location services 128
Mail
- adding a POP3/IMAP account 114
- adding an Exchange account 114
- deleting an email account 121
- managing email messages 117
- sending 117
- sorting email messages 116
- unified inbox 115
- working with Exchange ActiveSync
email 120
Making a call 38
Managing memory 169
Market 93
Master reset 173
Meeting request 121
Messages
- copying to the SIM card 109
Index
fid
en
Notifications
- icons 21
- panel 23
tia
TC
on
Online accounts
- about 56
- managing 57
Onscreen keyboard
- copying and pasting text 148
- dictionary 145
- editing text 147
- entering text 143
- entering text by speaking 146
- predictive text 144
- selecting text 147
- settings 148
Optimizing battery life 168
Pair a Bluetooth device 155
People
- adding a new contact 63
- deleting contacts 67
- editing a contact 67
09
/1
- filtering your contacts 61
- groups 69
- merging contact information 65
- searching for a contact 63
- widget 71
Phone calls
- calling a number in a message 40
- calling a number in an email 40
- calling using Wi-Fi 44
- making an emergency call 40
- receiving 41
- setting up a conference call 43
Phone information 171
Phone settings
- About phone 171
- Applications 169
- Display 165
- Language & keyboard 167
- Power 168
- SD & phone storage 169
- Sound 166
Phone updates 172
Photos
- copying to/from storage card 25
- editing 84
- sharing 86
- viewing 83
Playing music from the Lock screen 89
PUK (PIN Unblock Key) 160
11
- deleting 109
- deleting a conversation 110
- forwarding 107
- protecting from deletion 109
- viewing 106
microSD card 12
MMS 104
Modem
- USB tethering 154
- using your computer 154
Multimedia message 104
Music
- browsing the library 90
- copying music to storage card 25
- listening 89
- playing music from Lock screen 89
- playlist 90
- setting a song as ringtone 92
- sharing music using Bluetooth 92
- widget 90
20
177
Quick Settings 24
Radio 100
Record your voice 101
Ring volume
- lowering ring volume
automatically 167
- making your phone ring louder 167
Ringtone
- setting 92
Scenes 28
Screen
- adjusting screen brightness 165
Index
Updating phone software 172
Upgrade 172
USB 25, 154
tia
en
fid
on
TC
Tethering 154
Text message 103
Translate 50
09
/1
Videos
- recording 80
- sharing 86
- watching 84
Voice input 146
Voice Recorder 101
Volume
- adjusting during phone calls 19
- adjusting media 19
- adjusting ringer 19
VPN
- adding a connection 153
- connecting 153
11
- changing the time before the screen
turns off 165
- recalibrating G-sensor 166
- turning off screen rotation 165
SD card 12
Search 49, 50
Security
- changing your screen lock 161
- locking with a screen lock pattern,
PIN, or password 160
- locking your SIM card with a PIN 160
Settings
- About phone 171
- Applications 169
- Language & keyboard 167
- Power 168
- SD & phone storage 169
- Sound 166
Sharing
- games and apps 102
SIM card
- copying a message 109
- inserting 11
- removing 11
- SIM PIN 160
Sleep mode 20
Slideshow 83
Smart dial 39
SMS 103
Social networks
- adding 57
- viewing photos 88
Software update 172
Sound set 34
Speakerphone 43
Speed dial 39
Storage card
- copying files 25
- moving apps to the storage card 170
Sync
- online accounts 58
20
178
Wallpaper
- changing 29
Weather
- adding cities 98
- checking weather 98
Web browser 50
Wi-Fi
- calling 44
- connecting to another network 152
- network status 152
- turning on 151
Widgets
- adding 30
- changing settings 31
- removing 33
YouTube
- sharing videos 87

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Annotate, Fill forms, Extract
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : EN
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Create Date                     : 2011:09:16 15:53:30+08:00
Creator Tool                    : AH Formatter V5.1 MR2 (5,1,2010,0409) for Windows (x64)
Modify Date                     : 2011:09:16 16:11:36+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:09:16 16:11:36+08:00
Producer                        : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows (x64))
Trapped                         : False
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:f93a6c80-cd0f-47b6-aeb9-2ba6fbe532ee
Instance ID                     : uuid:a31bda26-ba4f-4194-a06c-5ca1d9ecb759
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 178
Creator                         : AH Formatter V5.1 MR2 (5,1,2010,0409) for Windows (x64)

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1560676
Application ID	9p8DPDcx7YcpFM1j1L37Lg==
Document Description	user manual 1 of 2.
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	291.24kB (3640456 bits)
Date Submitted	2011-10-14 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-04-11 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-11-03 19:01:06
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-11-03 19:01:06
Document Title	user manual 1 of 2.
Document Creator	AH Formatter V5.1 MR2 (5,1,2010,0409) for Windows (x64)

Your HTC Explorer
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
/1
User guide
2
Contents
Contents
/1
Getting started
Inside the box
09
HTC Explorer
Back cover
SIM card
11
Storage card
Battery
Switching the power on or off
Finger gestures
Setting up HTC Explorer for the first time
Ways of getting contacts into HTC Explorer
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
16
17
Basics
Adjusting the volume
Sleep mode
en
Status and notifications
tia
Home screen
20
Entering your PIN
19
20
21
23
Connecting HTC Explorer to a computer
25
Copying files to or from the storage card
25
Copying text, looking up information, and sharing
26
fid
Notifications panel
on
Personalizing
TC
Making HTC Explorer truly yours
28
Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenes
28
Changing your wallpaper
29
Applying a new skin
30
Personalizing your Home screen with widgets
30
Adding icons and other shortcuts on your Home screen
31
Adding folders on your Home screen
32
Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on your Home screen
32
Rearranging the Home screen
33
Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screen
33
Using sound sets
34
Rearranging or hiding application tabs
35
Shortcuts & Clock widget
36
Phone calls
Different ways of making calls
38
Making a call on the Phone dialer screen
38
Using Speed dial
39
3
Contents
Calling a phone number in a text message
40
Calling a phone number in an email
40
Calling a phone number in a Calendar event
40
Making an emergency call
40
Receiving calls
41
What can I do during a call?
42
43
Setting up a conference call
Internet calls
44
/1
Using Call history
Using Home dialing
09
Call services
Turning Airplane mode on or off
11
Search and Web browser
Searching HTC Explorer and the Web
Using the web browser
Viewing bookmarks and previously visited pages
Setting browser options
Accounts and sync
20
Downloading from the Web
en
Managing your online accounts
tia
Adding a social network account
People
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
56
57
57
59
About the People app
60
fid
Transferring contacts from your old phone
Your contacts list
61
Setting up your profile
62
Importing contacts from your SIM card
62
Adding a new contact
63
on
TC
46
56
Synchronizing with a Google Account
About online accounts
45
Searching for contacts
63
Importing a contact from an Exchange ActiveSync account
64
Merging contact information
65
Backing up your contacts to the storage card
66
Contact information and conversations
66
Sending contact information as a vCard
68
Contact groups
69
Adding People widgets
71
Social
Facebook for HTC Sense
73
Enjoying Facebook in Friend Stream
74
Chatting in Google Talk
75
Camera
Camera basics
78
Taking a photo
79
Recording video
80
4
Contents
Adding effects
80
After capturing
80
Changing camera settings
81
Photos, videos, and music
82
Gallery
89
/1
Music
Android Market and other apps
09
Finding and installing apps from Android Market
Using the Clock
Checking Weather
11
Watching videos on YouTube
Listening to FM Radio
Recording your voice
20
Sharing games and apps
Messages
Opening Messages
Sending a text message (SMS)
tia
Resuming a draft message
Viewing and replying to a message
Forwarding a message
en
Viewing and saving an attachment from a multimedia message
Push messages
Managing message conversations
Backing up your text messages to the storage card
Email
on
Gmail
fid
Setting message options
Mail
95
98
99
100
101
102
103
103
104
Sending a multimedia message (MMS)
93
106
106
107
108
108
109
110
111
112
113
Calendar
TC
About Calendar
122
Creating an event
122
Changing Calendar views
123
Managing Calendar events
124
Accepting or declining a meeting invitation
125
Dismissing or snoozing event reminders
126
Showing or hiding calendars
126
Changing Calendar settings
126
About the Calendar widget
127
Maps and location
Location settings
128
Google Maps
128
5
Contents
HTC Sync
About HTC Sync
133
Installing HTC Sync
133
Setting up HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer
134
Getting to know the workspace
134
135
Setting up synchronization
Synchronizing HTC Explorer
138
138
/1
Installing an app from your computer to HTC Explorer
Synchronizing another device with your computer
139
139
09
Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade
HTCSense.com
11
Signing up for your HTCSense.com account
Turning on Device finder
Using HTCSense.com
20
Deleting your HTCSense.com account
Keyboard
Using the onscreen keyboard
Entering words with predictive text
Adjusting input settings
Data connection
fid
Wi-Fi
en
Internet connections
tia
Entering text by tracing
Editing text
140
141
142
143
144
146
Entering text by speaking
140
147
147
148
150
151
152
Using HTC Explorer as a modem (USB tethering)
154
Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internet through a computer (Internet Pass-through)
154
on
Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)
Bluetooth
TC
Bluetooth basics
155
Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit
155
Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth device
156
Sending information using Bluetooth
157
Receiving information using Bluetooth
158
Security
Protecting your SIM card with a PIN
160
Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lock pattern, PIN, or password
160
Encrypting data on HTC Explorer
162
Settings
Settings on HTC Explorer
163
Changing display settings
165
Changing sound settings
166
Changing the language
167
6
Contents
Optimizing battery life
168
Managing memory
169
Checking information about HTC Explorer
171
Update and reset
172
Software updates
Restarting HTC Explorer
173
/1
Resetting HTC Explorer
09
Trademarks and copyrights
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
Index
173
7
Conventions used in this guide
Conventions used in this guide
In this user guide, we use the following symbols to indicate useful and important
information:
/1
This is a note. A note often gives additional information, such as what happens
when you choose to do or not to do a certain action. A note also provides
information that may only be applicable to some situations.
11
09
This is a tip. A tip gives you an alternative way to do a particular step or procedure,
or lets you know of an option that you may find helpful.
This indicates important information that you need in order to accomplish a certain
task or to get a feature to work properly.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
This provides safety precaution information, that is, information that you need to be
careful about to prevent potential problems.
8
Getting started
Getting started
/1
Inside the box
09
You will find the following inside the box:
§ HTC Explorer
11
§ Battery
§ USB cable
§ Power adapter
20
§ Quick start guide
§ Safety and regulatory guide
tia
HTC Explorer
TC
on
fid
en
Front panel
1. Home
2. Menu
3. Back
4. Search
5. Microphone
6. Touch screen
7. Earpiece
9
Getting started
Left and right panels
1. USB connector
20
11
09
/1
2. VOLUME controls
Back panel
tia
1. 3 megapixel camera
TC
on
fid
en
2. Speaker
Top panel
1. 3.5mm headset jack
2. POWER
10
Getting started
Back cover
Removing the back cover
Remove the back cover to access the battery compartment, SIM card slot, and
storage card slot.
/1
1. Turn off HTC Explorer and hold it securely upside down with the front facing
away from you.
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
2. With your fingers, pry the bottom of the back cover away from the phone while
pressing in with your thumb against the middle of the back cover.
on
Replacing the back cover
TC
1. Insert the top half of the phone into the top of the back cover.
2. Press the bottom part of the back cover towards the phone to lock the cover in
place. You'll hear a click when the back cover is locked in place.
11
Getting started
SIM card
The SIM card contains your phone number, service details, and memory for storing
phonebook contacts and/or text messages.
Inserting the SIM card
/1
1. Take the back cover off.
09
2. Remove the battery.
en
tia
20
11
3. With the SIM card’s gold contacts facing down and its cut-off corner facing out,
insert the SIM card all the way into the SIM card slot.
fid
Removing the SIM card
Make sure to switch off HTC Explorer before removing your SIM card.
on
1. Take the back cover off.
2. Remove the battery.
TC
3. Press and hold the SIM card tab.
4. Slide the SIM card out from the SIM card slot.
12
Getting started
Storage card
Use the storage card to store your photos, videos, and music.
Inserting the storage card
/1
1. Take the back cover off.
tia
20
11
09
2. Insert the microSD card into the storage card slot with its gold contacts facing
down and slide it in until it is securely in place.
en
Removing the storage card
fid
If HTC Explorer is on you must first "unmount" the storage card before removing it
to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.
1. Take the back cover off.
on
2. Slide the storage card out from its slot.
Unmounting the storage card
TC
When you need to remove the storage card while HTC Explorer is on, unmount the
storage card first to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Storage > Unmount SD card.
13
Getting started
Battery
/1
HTC Explorer uses a rechargeable battery. How long the battery can last before it
needs recharging depends on how you use HTC Explorer.The features and accessories
you use can affect battery life. For example, leaving your Bluetooth® connection
always on uses more power. Long phone calls and frequent web browsing use up a lot
of battery power. Also, consider your location: poor signal strength from your mobile
network and extreme temperature make the battery work harder.
09
Removing the battery
11
1. Take the back cover off.
en
tia
20
2. With your thumb or finger, lift the battery from the battery compartment.
Inserting the battery
fid
Please use only original batteries that came in the box or replacements that we
recommend.
on
1. Take the back cover off.
TC
2. Insert the battery (with its exposed copper contacts first) into the battery
compartment.
14
Getting started
Charging the battery
Before you turn on and start using HTC Explorer, it is recommended that you charge
the battery.
/1
§ Only the power adapter and USB cable provided in the box must be used to
charge the battery.
09
§ Do not remove the battery from HTC Explorer while you are charging it using the
power or car adapter.
en
tia
20
11
1. Insert the small end of the USB cable into the USB connector.
2. Insert the other end of the USB cable into the power adapter.
fid
3. Plug in the power adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.
on
When you charge the battery and HTC Explorer is on, the charging battery icon
displayed in the status bar. After the battery has been fully charged, the charging
battery icon turns to a full battery icon
TC
As a safety precaution, the battery stops charging when it overheats.
Switching the power on or off
Switching the power on
Press the POWER button. Easy.
When you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll need to set it up.
is
15
Getting started
Switching the power off
1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on, then unlock the
screen.
2. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.
/1
3. When the Power options menu appears, tap Power off.
09
Entering your PIN
11
Most SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by your mobile
operator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK.
20
If you enter the wrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. No problem. Just
contact your mobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).
Finger gestures
When you want to type using the keyboard, select items onscreen such
as application and settings icons, or press onscreen buttons, simply tap
them with your finger.
Press and
hold
To open the available options for an item (for example, a contact or link
in a web page), simply press and hold the item.
Swipe or
slide
To swipe or slide means to quickly drag your finger vertically or
horizontally across the screen.
Drag
Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to drag.
While dragging, do not release your finger until you have reached the
target position.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Tap
Flick
Flicking the screen is similar to swiping, except that you need to swipe
your finger in light, quicker strokes. This finger gesture is always in a
vertical direction, such as when flicking the contacts or message list.
Rotate
For most screens, you can automatically change the screen orientation
from portrait to landscape by turning HTC Explorer sideways. When
entering text, you can turn HTC Explorer sideways to bring up a bigger
keyboard.
Pinch
In some apps, like Gallery or the web browser, you can “pinch” the screen
using two fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) to zoom in or
zoom out when viewing a picture or a web page.
16
Getting started
Setting up HTC Explorer for the first time
/1
When you switch on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll be asked to set it up. You
can choose how you want to connect to the Internet and whether you want your
current location to be automatically detected. If you still have personal contacts and
calendar events stored on your old phone, you can easily transfer them to
HTC Explorer through Bluetooth as well.
09
Be sure to sign in to your Google® Account so you can use Google apps like Gmail™
and Android Market™. You can also set up your other email accounts and Facebook®.
Just follow the onscreen instructions and you’ll be up and running in no time.
20
11
Some features that need to connect to the Internet such as location-based services
and auto-sync of your online accounts may incur extra data fees. Don’t worry. You
can enable or disable them in settings later on.
Ways of getting contacts into HTC Explorer
Sync the contacts from your old phone to your computer, and
then use HTC Sync to sync HTC Explorer with your computer's
Microsoft® Outlook®, Outlook Express or Windows® Contacts.
en
HTC Sync™
tia
There are several ways you can add contacts to HTC Explorer. You can sync
HTC Explorer with contacts from your Google Account, computer, Facebook, and
more.
Google contacts are imported to HTC Explorer after you sign in to
your Google Account. You can also create more Google contacts
right from HTC Explorer.
fid
Gmail
TC
on
Facebook
Log in to your Facebook account to import your Facebook
friends' contact information.
Phone contacts
You can choose to create and store contacts directly in
HTC Explorer or transfer existing ones from your old phone.
SIM card
Copy all your SIM contacts to HTC Explorer.
Microsoft
Exchange
ActiveSync®
HTC Explorer syncs your work contacts from the Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync Server in your workplace.
Transfer
Use the Transfer app to transfer not only your contacts, but also
calendar events and text messages from your old phone to
HTC Explorer.
17
Getting started
Home screen
/1
Your Home screen is where you make HTC Explorer your own. It comes with a
Shortcuts & Clock widget that contains shortcuts to your favorite apps and shows the
time and weather in your city. You can also add your favorite applications, shortcuts,
folders and widgets so they’re always just a tap away. To find out how, see
Personalizing on page 28.
09
Extended Home screen
11
As you start to do more things with HTC Explorer, you might find that one Home
screen is not enough. No problem. You can use up to six extra screens. It should be
plenty.
on
fid
en
tia
20
Slide your finger horizontally to the left or right and you’ll discover more space for
adding icons, widgets, and more.
TC
Press
to return to the main Home screen (that is, the center home screen).
18
Getting started
Using Leap view
20
11
09
/1
To jump straight to the screen that you want, press
or pinch the screen to show
the Leap view. It reveals all seven Home screens as thumbnails.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Just tap the one you want and you’ll leap right there.
19
Basics
Basics
/1
Adjusting the volume
11
09
Adjusting the ringer volume changes the volume level of the ringtone, while adjusting
the media volume changes the volume level of sound notifications and music or video
playback.
Adjusting the ringer volume
20
§ Press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button to adjust the ringer volume to
your desired level. The Ringer volume window appears on the screen to display
the volume levels.
tia
§ While in the lowest ringer volume level (Silent mode), press VOLUME DOWN
once to switch to Vibrate mode. The vibrate mode icon
appears in the status
bar.
en
§ While in Vibrate mode, press VOLUME UP once to switch to silent mode. The
speaker mute icon
displays in the status bar.
Adjusting the media volume
fid
When playing music or watching video, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN
button to adjust the volume. The Media volume window appears on the screen to
display the volume level.
on
Adjusting the earpiece volume for calls
During a call, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button.
Adjusting the volume via settings
TC
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Sound > Volume.
2. Drag the volume sliders to the left or right to adjust the volume levels of the
ringtone, media playback, alarms, and notifications. A sample tone is briefly
played with the volume being adjusted as you drag a slider.
3. If you want the same volume for your ringtone and notifications, select Use
incoming call volume for notifications.
4. When you’re done, tap OK.
20
Basics
Sleep mode
Sleep mode saves battery power by putting HTC Explorer into a low power state
while the display is off. It also stops accidental button presses when HTC Explorer is in
your bag. You’ll still receive messages and calls though.
/1
Switching to Sleep mode
09
Briefly press the POWER button to turn off the display and switch to Sleep mode.
HTC Explorer also automatically goes into Sleep mode when it’s idle for a while.
11
Waking up from Sleep mode
To wake HTC Explorer up manually, press the POWER button. You’ll need to unlock
the screen.
20
HTC Explorer automatically wakes up when you have an incoming call.
Unlocking the screen
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Pull the ring up to unlock the screen.
If you have set up a screen unlock pattern, pin, or password, you will be asked to
draw the pattern on the screen or enter the PIN or password before it unlocks.
If you've set an event reminder or an alarm, you can drag
snooze or dismiss the event or alarm.
or
to the ring to
21
Basics
Opening an app from the lock screen
/1
You can customize the lock screen in Settings > Personalize > Lock screen
shortcuts to show your four favorite apps.
09
Status and notifications
11
Status icons
20
Here’s what each icon means:
Signal strength
Battery is full
en
tia
GPRS connected
GPRS in use
fid
EDGE connected
Battery is charging
Battery is low (20% remaining)
Battery is very low (10% or less
remaining)
Silent mode
3G connected
Vibrate mode
3G in use
Microphone is mute
HSDPA connected
Speakerphone is on
HSDPA in use
Wired microphone headset
connected
Roaming
Wired headset connected
No signal
Bluetooth is on
TC
on
EDGE in use
On the lock screen, drag an app icon to the ring to unlock the screen and directly go
to the app.
Basics
Connected to a Bluetooth device
Connected to a Wi-Fi® network
Airplane mode
Data synchronizing
GPS is on
Network sharing is on
Alarm is set
/1
No SIM card installed
09
22
11
Notification icons
20
Notification icons on the status bar make it easy for you to keep on top of your
messages, calendar events, and alarms.
tia
New Gmail message
Here’s what each one means:
Call in progress
Problem with email delivery
Missed call
fid
en
New Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email
TC
on
New SMS/MMS
General notification
Call on hold
Problem with SMS/MMS delivery
Call forwarding on
New Google Talk™ instant
message
Message forwarding on
New voicemail
HTC Explorer is connected to a
computer via USB cable
Upcoming event
Wi-Fi is on and wireless networks
are available
New updates from your social
networks
Matched contacts suggestion
Uploading data (animated)
Basics
Downloading data (animated)
HTC Explorer software update
available
Waiting to upload
Song is playing
Downloaded Android Market app
installed successfully
FM Radio app in use
Update available for an app
downloaded from Android Market
Voice recording is on
Blank card
09
/1
Bluetooth pairing request
11
23
Internal storage is low
20
More (not displayed) notifications
Notifications panel
en
tia
When you get a new notification, you can open the Notifications panel to see what
event notification or new information you've received. The Notifications panel lets you
quickly switch between recently-opened apps, and also lets you easily turn on settings
such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.
If you have several notifications, you can scroll down
the screen to see them all.
TC
on
fid
To open the Notifications panel, press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger
downward.
You can also open the Notifications panel on the Home screen by pressing
then tapping Notifications.
and
24
Basics
Switching between recently opened apps
On the Notifications panel, you can easily access up to eight apps you just recently
opened.
1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open the
Notifications panel.
11
09
/1
2. In the Recent apps section, slide your finger left or right to see recently-opened
apps.
Press and hold
20
3. Tap an app to open it.
to view recently used apps.
tia
Using Quick Settings
The Quick Settings tab lets you easily turn on Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and more, and also
provides a quick shortcut to all HTC Explorer settings.
en
1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open the
Notifications panel.
fid
2. Tap the Quick Settings tab.
TC
on
3. Tap the check box next to an item to turn it off or on.
Closing the Notifications panel
Press and hold the bottom bar of the Notifications panel, then slide your finger up the
screen. Or just press
25
Basics
Connecting HTC Explorer to a computer
Whenever you connect HTC Explorer to a computer using the USB cable, the Choose
a connection type screen opens and lets you choose the type of USB connection.
Select one of the following choices, and then tap Done:
Select this option if you only want to charge the battery while
connected to your computer.
Disk drive
This mode is available only when there’s a storage card installed on
HTC Explorer. Select this mode when you want to copy files between
the storage card and your computer.
11
09
/1
Charge only
When Disk drive mode is enabled while HTC Explorer is connected to
the computer, you will not be able to use apps on HTC Explorer to
access the storage card.
Select this option to synchronize contacts, calendar, and other
information between your computer and HTC Explorer.
USB
tethering
When you do not have an Internet connection on your computer, you
can select this mode to share the mobile data connection of
HTC Explorer with your computer.
tia
20
HTC Sync
en
Internet pass- If you don’t have a data plan or you don’t have access to a Wi-Fi
through
network, you can select this mode to share your computer’s Internet
connection with HTC Explorer.
fid
Copying files to or from the storage card
You can copy your music, photos, and other files to the storage card.
on
1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the supplied USB cable.
2. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Disk drive, and then tap Done.
On your computer, the storage card is recognized as a removable disk.
3. Navigate to the removable disk and open it.
TC
4. Do one of the following:
§ Copy the files from the computer to the storage card’s root folder.
§ Copy the files from the storage card to a folder in your computer.
5. After copying the files, unmount the removable disk (that is, the connected
HTC Explorer) as required by your computer’s operating system to safely
remove HTC Explorer.
6. Do one of the following:
§ Disconnect HTC Explorer from the computer.
§ If you want to keep HTC Explorer connected to the computer but want it to
be able to access the storage card, open the Notifications panel, tap Disk
drive, select an option except Disk drive, and then tap Done.
26
Basics
Copying text, looking up information, and
sharing
In apps such as the web browser and Mail, you can select text and choose what you
want to do with it.
/1
Selecting text
09
1. Press and hold on a word.
20
11
2. Drag the start and end markers to highlight the surrounding text you want to
select.
en
tia
To copy the address of a linked web page, press and hold the link, and then tap
Copy link URL.
Copying and pasting text
fid
1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy.
The selected text is then copied to the clipboard.
on
2. In a text entry field (for example while composing an email), press and hold at
the point where you want to paste the text.
3. Tap Paste.
Searching or translating text
TC
1. After you have selected the text you want to search for or translate, tap
2. Tap one of the following tabs:
Google Search
Look for related information using Google Search, based on the text that
you selected.
Wikipedia
Look for related information on Wikipedia®, based on the text that you
selected.
27
Basics
YouTube
Look for videos on YouTube®, based on the text that you selected.
Google Translate
Sharing text
09
1. After you have selected the text you want to share, tap
/1
Translate the text to another language.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
2. Choose where to paste and share the selected text, such as in an email message
or Facebook status update.
28
Personalizing
Personalizing
/1
Making HTC Explorer truly yours
, and then tap Personalize to get started.
11
On the Home screen, press
09
Make HTC Explorer look and sound just the way you want it. Personalize it with a
different wallpaper, skin, ringtone, and notification sound for events such as incoming
text, email, and calendar reminders.
20
Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenes
tia
HTC Explorer becomes multiple phones in one when you use scenes. Scenes are
personalized Home screen layouts that you can quickly apply. By switching between
scenes, you instantly turn HTC Explorer into your perfect weekend phone, travel
phone, work phone, or pure play phone.
en
Everytime you add or modify something on the Home screen, HTC Explorer
automatically saves your changes to the current scene selected.
Using a preset scene
fid
HTC Explorer features preset scenes, each preconfigured with a different wallpaper
and collection of widgets that reflect different moments in your life. You can choose a
scene that is suitable for work, play, travel, or your social life.
on
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.
3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want.
TC
4. Tap Apply.
To download more scenes, press
tap Scene > Get more.
, and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,
Creating a new scene
You’ll start with an empty Home screen when you create a new scene.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.
3. Press
, and then tap New.
, and then tap Personalize.
29
Personalizing
4. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.
5. Personalize the scene by adding widgets and other elements, arranging the
Home screen layout, and changing the skin or wallpaper. All of your changes will
be automatically saved to this scene.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
09
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.
/1
Renaming a scene
11
3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want to
rename.
4. Press and hold a scene thumbnail, then tap Rename.
5. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Deleting scenes
, and then tap Personalize.
, and then tap Delete.
tia
3. Press
2. On the Display tab, tap Scene
5. Tap Delete.
en
4. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to browse through scenes, then
tap one or more scenes you want to delete.
fid
Changing your wallpaper
on
Personalizing your wallpaper with your favorite photo is a quick and easy way to give
HTC Explorer a fresh look. Browse the collection of wallpapers included in
HTC Explorer or choose from photos that you have taken with the camera. You can
also change your Home screen to use an animated wallpaper.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
TC
2. On the Display tab, tap Wallpaper.
3. Tap one of the following:
HTC wallpapers Choose a preset wallpaper, then tap Preview > Apply.
Live wallpapers Choose from preset animated wallpapers. Tap Preview to
view the animation, and then tap Apply.
Gallery
Choose an existing photo. Crop the photo and then tap Save.
To download more wallpapers, press
, and then tap Personalize . On the Display
tab, tap Wallpaper > HTC wallpapers > Get more.
30
Personalizing
Applying a new skin
, and then tap Personalize.
/1
1. From the Home screen, press
Personalize beyond the Home screen by applying a new skin. Skins are set to give a
different look and feel to most onscreen buttons, application screens, option menus,
and other items.
2. On the Display tab, tap Skin.
09
3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the skin you want.
4. Tap Apply.
, and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,
11
To download more skins, press
tap Skin > Get more.
20
Personalizing your Home screen with widgets
tia
Widgets put at-a-glance important information and media content up front on your
Home screen. Some widgets are already added to your Home screen for your
convenience. You can add more from the available selections of widgets.
Adding a widget to your Home screen
2. Press
en
1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new widget.
, and then tap Personalize.
fid
3. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget.
4. Select a widget that you want.
on
5. Most HTC widgets are available in a variety of designs and sizes to suit your
needs. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to view the different
styles, and then tap Select to choose one.
TC
You can also add widgets that allow you to quickly switch on or off certain settings
such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Scroll down the widgets list, tap Settings, and then tap
the widget that you want.
To download more widgets, press
, and then tap Personalize. On the Add to
Home tab, tap Widget > Get more HTC widgets.
31
Personalizing
Changing the settings of a widget
You can modify basic settings of some widgets (for example, the People and Mail
widgets) from the Home screen.
/1
tia
20
11
09
2. Drag the widget to
1. Press and hold a widget on the Home screen. HTC Explorer vibrates and you’ll
see a colored box around the widget. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
en
The relevant screen where you can change some settings for this widget then
opens.
fid
3. Customize the widget settings.
on
Adding icons and other shortcuts on your
Home screen
TC
Place app icons on your Home screen to open apps quicker. You can also add
shortcuts to settings and specific information such as a bookmarked webpage,
someone’s phone number, a music playlist, route directions, and many other items, to
your Home screen.
The shortcuts available depend on the apps that are installed on HTC Explorer.
1. Go to a Home screen where there’s space to add a new icon or shortcut.
2. Press
, and then tap Personalize.
3. On the Add to Home tab, tap App to add an app icon, or Shortcut to add a
shortcut to a setting or information.
To add an app icon on the Home screen, tap
, and then press and hold an app
icon. Without lifting your finger, drag the icon to an empty area on the Home
screen, and then release it.
32
Personalizing
Adding folders on your Home screen
Use folders to group related apps and other shortcuts to keep your Home screen tidy
and organized. You can also add information folders that show up-to-date information
such as Bluetooth received files, your Facebook phonebook, and more.
/1
Creating a new folder and adding items to it
1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new folder.
, and then tap Personalize.
09
2. Press
3. On the Add to home tab, tap Folder.
11
4. Tap New Folder. The new folder appears on the Home screen.
5. Go to the Home screen where there is an app, icon, or shortcut, and then press
and hold it. HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
20
6. Drag the app, icon, or shortcut and drop it on the folder.
Renaming a folder
tia
Simply tap the folder to open it so you can access the
apps and shortcuts inside the folder.
en
1. Tap the folder to open it.
2. Press and hold the folder window’s title bar.
fid
3. Enter a new folder name and then tap OK.
on
Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on
your Home screen
TC
Rearrange the widgets and icons on your Home screen to make room for adding more
items. You can also remove widgets and icons that you don’t frequently use.
Moving a widget or icon
1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to move. HTC Explorer vibrates and
you’ll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
2. Drag the widget or icon to a new location on the screen.
§ You can pause at the left or right edge of the screen to drag the widget or icon
onto another Home screen panel.
§ When you drag an icon to a spot that’s occupied by another icon, the occupant
automatically moves away to give room.
3. When the widget or icon is where you want it, lift your finger.
33
Personalizing
Removing a widget or icon
1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to remove. HTC Explorer vibrates
and you'll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger just
yet.
2. Drag the widget or icon to
09
Rearranging the Home screen
/1
3. When the widget or icon also turns red, lift your finger.
20
11
Reorder your Home screen panels in any way that fits how you use them. For
example, move the panels with frequently-used widgets, shortcuts, and folders closer
to the main Home screen.
The main Home screen is the panel that is bordered by a thin line in Leap view.
1. Pinch the Home screen to show the Leap view.
tia
2. Press and hold the thumbnail of the home screen you want to move.
HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.
TC
on
fid
en
3. Drag the thumbnail to its new position, and then lift your finger.
Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screen
You can choose what shortcuts you want for your lock screen so you can unlock the
screen straight into your favorite app.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Display tab, tap Lock screen > Choose lock screen shortcuts.
34
Personalizing
3. Tap a shortcut that you want to change, and then choose another app to
replace it .
4. Tap Done.
/1
Using sound sets
11
09
Each sound set gives you a different combination of sounds for your ringtone and
notifications such as incoming messages, email, calendar event reminders, and more.
By switching between sound sets, you can instantly make HTC Explorer ring or alert
you with fun sounds when you're out with friends or change to subtle sounds while
you're at work.
Choosing a preset sound set
, and then tap Personalize.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound sets screen, and then tap a sound set name.
3. You can tap
to listen to the different sounds for that sound set.
4. Tap Apply.
en
tia
To download more sound sets, press
tab, tap Sound set > Get more.
, and then tap Personalize . On the Sound
Creating a sound set
, and then tap Personalize.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.
3. Tap
on
4. Enter a new sound set name, and then tap Done.
The newly created sound set is then added to the list of sound sets. You can assign
different tones to the sound set to your preference.
TC
Changing your ringtone, notifications, and sounds
Change your ringtone, notification sounds, and alarms to suit your mood or lifestyle.
Choose different sounds from the preset selection or your storage card.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.
35
Personalizing
3. Choose a sound set you want to customize or create a new one, and then tap
Apply.
4. Change the ringtone, notification sound, and alarm from the Personalize screen.
/1
You can also go to the Messages, Mail, and Calendar apps to choose sounds for
new messages, email, and calendar reminders respectively.
HTC Explorer automatically saves your choices to the current sound set.
, and then tap Personalize.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
Deleting sound sets
2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.
3. Press
, and then tap Delete.
20
4. Tap one or more sound sets you want to delete.
5. Tap Delete.
tia
Rearranging or hiding application tabs
en
You can rearrange the tabs of some apps to prioritize the types of information you
frequently use or remove the tabs you don’t really need.
fid
1. Open an app that has the usual tabs at the bottom of its screen.
on
2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the area where
you can rearrange icons, lift your finger.
TC
3. Do any of the following:
Add a tab
Press and hold a tab that you want to add, and then drag it
beside the other tabs.
Move a tab
Press and hold the tab you want to move, and then drag it to its
new position.
Remove a tab Press and hold a tab you want to hide, then drag it up.
4. When you’re done, press
Adding a tab back
1. Open the app from which you previously removed some tabs.
2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you some of your
hidden tabs, lift your finger.
36
Personalizing
4. When you’re done, press
20
11
09
/1
3. Press and hold the tab you want to show, then drag it down to where you want
to position it again.
tia
Shortcuts & Clock widget
Open often-used apps or preview their contents right from the Home screen.
en
From the Shortcuts & Clock widget, you can:
§ Tap the shortcut to an app to open it
§ Tap the information bar to extend it and view the contents of that app
TC
on
fid
§ Tap the preview of the content and open it
37
Personalizing
Customizing the Shortcuts & Clock widget
You can choose which shortcuts and city appear on the Shortcuts & Clock widget.
/1
2. Drag the widget to
1. On the Home screen, tap and hold the Shortcuts & Clock widget. Don't lift your
finger just yet.
3. From this screen, you can:
09
§ Tap a shortcut slot, and then choose an app or shortcut to assign to it.
§ Tap the time, and then select a city that will appear in the widget. If your
city is not included in the list, tap
to add your city.
11
4. Tap Done.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
The Shortcuts & Clock widget is updated.
38
Phone calls
Phone calls
/1
Different ways of making calls
11
09
Besides making calls from the phone dialer screen on HTC Explorer, you can tap a
number in a text message or email to call, or press a single number on the phone
dialer to quickly call a contact.
20
Most SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by your
mobile operator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK. If you enter the
wrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. Don't worry. Just contact your
mobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).
Making a call on the Phone dialer screen
tia
You can either dial a number directly, or use the Smart dial feature to search and call a
stored contact or a number from your call history.
en
1. On the Home screen, tap
fid
2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contact
name on the phone keypad. The Phone dialer screen then displays a list of
matching numbers and names.
to delete it. To erase the entire entry,
on
If you enter a wrong digit or letter, tap
press and hold
3. Slide your finger up on the filtered list to close the phone keypad and see if
there are more matching numbers or contacts.
4. To place a call, do one of the following:
TC
§ Tap a phone number or contact from the list.
§ After entering a complete number, tap Call.
§ To call a different phone number associated with the contact, you can tap
at the right side of the contact name. On the contact details screen, tap
the number you want to call.
While dialing or when the call is in progress, the status bar displays the call in progress
icon
39
Phone calls
What is Smart dial?
The phone dialer’s Smart dial feature makes it quick and easy for you to place a call.
/1
Simply enter the phone number or first few letters of the person’s name you want to
call. Smart dial automatically searches and filters your stored contacts and the phone
numbers from the call history.
09
Using Speed dial
11
Use Speed dial to call a phone number with a single tap. For example, if you assign a
contact’s number to the number 2 key, you can just press and hold 2 to dial the
number.
Assigning a speed dial key
1. On the Home screen, tap Phone.
, and then tap Speed dial >
tia
2. Press
20
The number 1 key is generally reserved for your voicemail. Press and hold this key
to call voicemail and retrieve your voicemail messages.
3. Enter the name of the contact you want to add. When the name comes up in
the list, tap the name.
fid
5. Tap Save.
en
4. On the Speed dial screen, choose the phone number of the contact to use, and a
speed dial key to assign.
TC
on
You can also set a speed dial key in People. Tap a contact, press
select Set speed dial (or More > Set speed dial).
, and then
40
Phone calls
Calling a phone number in a text message
09
/1
1. Tap the phone number within the message.
11
2. Tap Call.
20
To call the message sender, tap the received message, and then tap Call on the
options menu.
Calling a phone number in an email
tia
Want to call a number that's in an email? No problem.
1. In the email body, tap the phone number.
3. Tap Call.
en
2. Edit the number if necessary.
fid
Calling a phone number in a Calendar event
on
Tapping a phone number in a Calendar event lets you see the event details such as
conference call ID number or meeting PIN code while on the Phone dialer screen.
1. Open an event in Calendar.
2. On the Event details screen, tap the phone number.
TC
3. Tap Call.
Making an emergency call
In some regions, you can make emergency calls from HTC Explorer even if you don’t
have a SIM card installed or your SIM card has been blocked.
1. On the Home screen, tap
2. Dial the emergency number for your locale, and then tap Call.
If you’ve enabled but forgotten your lock password or lock pattern, you can still make
emergency calls by tapping Emergency call on the screen.
41
Phone calls
Receiving calls
When you receive a phone call from a contact, the Incoming call screen appears.
/1
You can use the polite ringer and pocket mode features for receiving calls. To find
out how, see Changing sound settings on page 166.
Answering a call
09
Do one of the following:
§ Tap Answer.
to the
fid
en
tia
20
11
§ If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag
ring to unlock the screen and answer the call.
Rejecting a call
on
Do one of the following:
§ Tap Decline.
§ If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag
ring on the Lock screen.
to the
TC
§ Press the POWER button twice to reject a call.
Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the call
Do one of the following:
§ Press the VOLUME DOWN or VOLUME UP button.
§ Press the POWER button.
§ Place HTC Explorer face down on a level surface.
If HTC Explorer is already facing down, it will still ring when there are subsequent
incoming calls.
42
Phone calls
HTC Caller ID
20
11
09
/1
Everytime you make a call or your friend gives you a ring, you get to see your friend’s
latest status update from social networks like Facebook or Twitter™ right on the call
screen. You also won’t miss people’s birthdays. You’ll see a birthday reminder, if your
friend’s birthday will occur sometime within the next seven days.
What can I do during a call?
en
Putting a call on hold
tia
When a call is in progress, use the buttons onscreen to mute or unmute the
microphone or to turn the speakerphone on or off. You can also press
and choose
whether to add a call, place the call on hold, mute the microphone, and more.
fid
1. Press
and then tap Hold to put the call on hold. When you put a call on hold,
the status bar displays the hold call icon
2. Press
, and then tap Unhold to resume the call.
on
Switching between calls
If you’re already on a call and accept another call, you can choose to switch between
the two calls.
2. To switch between the calls, tap the person you want to talk to on the screen.
TC
1. When you receive another call, tap Answer to accept the second call and put
the first call on hold.
3. To end the current call and return to the other call, tap End call.
43
Phone calls
Turning the speakerphone on during a call
To decrease potential damage to your hearing, do not hold HTC Explorer against
your ear when the speakerphone is on.
Do one of the following:
The speakerphone icon
09
§ On the call screen, tap
/1
§ Flip HTC Explorer over during a call (be sure that Flip for speaker is selected in
> Settings > Sound).
appears in the status bar when the speakerphone is on.
20
Muting the microphone during a call
11
To turn the speakerphone off, just flip HTC Explorer over again, facing it up. Or tap
again.
On the call screen, tap
to toggle between turning the microphone on or off.
When the microphone is turned off, the mute icon
appears in the status bar.
Ending a call
tia
Do one of the following to end the call:
en
§ On the call screen, tap End call.
If the display is off, press POWER to turn on the screen so you can tap End call.
fid
§ Slide open the Notifications panel, then tap
on
If the phone number of the person who called is not in your contacts list, you can
choose to save the number to your contacts list after you hang up.
TC
Setting up a conference call
Conference calling with your friends, family, or co-workers is easy. Make the first call
(or accept a call), and then simply dial each subsequent call to add it to the
conference.
Make sure your SIM card is enabled with conference calling service. Contact your
mobile operator for details.
1. Make a call to the first conference call participant.
2. When connected, press
, tap Add call, and then dial the number of the
second participant. The first participant is put on hold when you dial the second
participant.
3. When connected to the second participant, tap merge
44
Phone calls
4. To add another participant to the conference call, tap
on the conference call
screen, and then dial the number of the contact you want to invite to the
conference call.
to add the participant to the conference call.
and then select
/1
6. To talk to a person in the conference call in private, tap
Private call on the options menu.
5. When connected, tap
and then tap Finish this call on the options
09
To end the call with a participant, tap
menu.
11
To end the conference call, tap End call.
Internet calls
20
When you're connected to a Wi-Fi network, you can make and receive calls through
an Internet calling account.
tia
Before you add an Internet calling account, make sure that you've registered with
an Internet calling service that supports voice calls over Session Initiation Protocol
(SIP). Internet calls to phone numbers may incur additional fees.
Adding an Internet calling account
, and then tap Settings > Call.
en
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Under Internet call settings, tap Accounts.
fid
3. Tap Add account.
4. Enter your account details.
5. Press
to save your account.
on
6. To set HTC Explorer to receive Internet calls on your added account, tap the
Receive incoming calls check box.
TC
Making an Internet call
Make an Internet call to either your contact's Internet calling account or phone
number.
Call any of the following:
Internet
calling
account
§ In People, tap a contact who has an Internet calling account, and then
tap Internet call.
Phone
number
See Different ways of making calls on page 38. But first, set
HTC Explorer to use Internet calling for your outgoing calls. From the
Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Call. Tap Use Internet
calling, and then select either For all calls or Ask for each call.
§ In Call History, tap an Internet call log.
45
Phone calls
Using Call history
Use Call History to check missed calls, your dialed numbers, and received calls.
in the status bar when you miss a call.
1. Slide open the Notifications panel to check who the caller is.
/1
You will see the missed call icon
Checking a missed call
09
2. To return the call, tap the missed call notification. Then tap the caller’s name or
number on the Call History screen.
1. On the Home screen, tap
11
Checking calls in the Call History
3. On the Call History screen, you can:
20
2. Slide to the Call History tab.
§ Tap a name or number in the list to call.
§ Press and hold a name or number in the list to display the options menu.
to check only the call history of a particular contact.
tia
§ Tap
en
§ Press
, then tap View to display just a particular type of calls such as
missed calls or outgoing calls.
Adding a new phone number to your contacts from Call History
fid
1. On the Call History screen, press and hold the phone number that you want to
save, and then tap Save to People.
on
2. Choose whether to create a new contact or save the number to an existing
contact on HTC Explorer.
TC
3. Do any of the following:
§ When creating a new contact, enter the contact name, contact type, and
other information in the blank contact record that appears. The phone
number is automatically added to the mobile field in the phone section. To
store it as another type of number, for example a home number, tap the
Mobile button.
§ When saving the number to an existing contact, tap a contact stored on
HTC Explorer, and then select the number type.
4. Tap Save.
46
Phone calls
Clearing the Call History list
On the Call History screen, do one of the following:
Press and hold the name or number, and then tap Delete
from call history.
Clear the entire list
Press
, and then tap Remove call history. Tap Select all
> Delete.
09
/1
Remove one name or
number
11
Using Home dialing
20
When you're on a trip abroad, it's easy to dial friends and family from home. Your
home country code is automatically added when you make calls to your contacts on
HTC Explorer while roaming.
tia
1. On the Home screen, tap
HTC Explorer dials normally when entering phone numbers that are not saved in
People. If you want to call an unsaved phone number in your country, you still need
to enter a plus (+) sign and country code before the phone number.
en
2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contact
name on the phone keypad.
fid
3. Tap a phone number or contact from the contact list. HTC Explorer then dials
the number with your home country code.
Changing the default country code for Home dialing
, and then tap Settings.
on
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Call > Phone settings > Home dialing settings.
3. Choose the country that you want from the country code dropdown list.
TC
4. Tap OK.
Turning off Home dialing
If you prefer to manually enter complete phone numbers to call while roaming, you
can turn off Home dialing.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Call > Phone settings.
2. Clear the Home dialing check box.
47
Phone calls
Call services
HTC Explorer can directly link to the mobile phone network, and enable you to access
and change the settings of various phone services. Call services may include call
forwarding, call waiting, voicemail, and more. Contact your mobile operator to find out
about the availability of call services.
from the Home screen, and then tap Settings > Call.
/1
To open call services, press
Restrict outgoing calls to a fixed set of numbers. To enable this
feature, you must know your SIM card’s PIN2 code.
Voicemail service
Shows the current voicemail service being used.
Voicemail settings
Specify another voicemail number aside from the one specified
by your service provider.
Clear voicemail
notification
If you have a notification of a new voicemail, you can clear the
notification with this option.
Phone settings
Modify your phone settings such as automatic saving of an
unknown contact number when a call with that number ends.
Call forwarding
Select how you want to handle busy, unanswered, and
unreachable calls. You can also set the call forwarding option
for all incoming calls.
Call barring
settings
Choose whether to block various categories of incoming and
outgoing calls.
en
tia
20
11
09
Fixed Dialing
Numbers
Enable or disable operator services such as caller ID and call
waiting.
Cell broadcast
Enable or disable receipt of cell broadcast messages.
fid
Additional settings
on
Cell broadcast
settings
Accounts
Configure channels and language for cell broadcast messages.
Add, modify, or remove Internet calling accounts. You can also
choose whether to receive incoming Internet calls.
TC
Use Internet calling Select whether to use Internet calling for all calls you make or
for Internet address calls only, or to be asked which you prefer
for each call you make.
48
Phone calls
Turning Airplane mode on or off
In many countries, you are required by law to turn off wireless devices while on board
an aircraft. A way to turn off wireless functions quickly is to switch HTC Explorer to
Airplane mode.
09
/1
When you enable Airplane mode, all wireless radios on HTC Explorer are turned off,
including the call function, data services, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi. When you disable
Airplane mode, the call function is turned back on and the previous state of Bluetooth
and Wi-Fi is restored.
To turn Airplane mode on or off, press and hold POWER, and then tap Airplane mode.
is displayed in the status bar.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
When enabled, the Airplane mode icon
49
Search and Web browser
/1
Searching HTC Explorer and the Web
Search and Web browser
11
09
You can search for information on HTC Explorer and on the Web by using Google
Search. Some applications, such as People or Mail, have their own search function,
which you can use to search only within those applications.
Setting search options
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Search > Google search.
3. Choose the settings that you want.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
Display suggestions for Google web searches below the
search box as you type.
Use My Location
Include your location in searches to get local search
results.
Search history
Use suggestions from the web-based Google search
history, from your Google Account. Tap Manage search
history to view or manage the web search history
associated with your Google Account on the web browser.
fid
en
tia
Show web
suggestions
4. Press
on
5. Tap Searchable items, and then select the items you want included when doing
a search.
Performing searches on the web and HTC Explorer
TC
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Enter the search item in the search box. As you type, matching items on
HTC Explorer and suggestions from Google web search are shown as a list.
3. Do one of the following
§ To narrow your search, tap
Apps), and then tap
, select another search location (for example,
§ If what you’re searching for is in the list of suggestions, tap it in the list. The
item opens in the appropriate application.
§ To edit an item in the list, tap
where you can edit it.
. The item will appear in the search box,
to search the web. The
§ If what you’re searching for is not in the list, tap
web browser opens, displaying the results of a Google search.
50
Search and Web browser
Quickly looking up information on the Web
Quick Lookup helps you learn about something right on the spot. When you enter a
new word or phrase, you can easily look it up in popular websites or search services
such as Google Search and Wikipedia.
2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press
bottom tabs.
> Quick Lookup.
to close it first so you’ll see the
/1
1. From the Home screen, tap
11
4. Tap
09
3. Slide across the tabs to pick where you want to look up information. Then in the
search box, enter what you want to search for.
20
After looking up the item on one tab, you can slide to other tabs to automatically
look up the same term there.
Translating words to other languages
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Quick Lookup.
to close it first so you’ll see the
tia
2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press
bottom tabs.
3. Slide to the Google Translate tab.
en
4. Under From language, choose the original language, then enter the word or
phrase you want to translate.
fid
5. Under To language, choose from the languages available for translation.
on
6. Tap Translate.
Using the web browser
Do one of the following to open the web browser and start surfing the Web:
§ On the Home screen, tap Internet.
TC
§ From the Home screen, tap
> Internet.
Going to a webpage
1. On the browser screen, tap the URL box on top of the screen.
2. Enter the webpage address using the keyboard. As you enter the address,
matching webpage addresses will appear on the screen.
3. Do one of the following:
§ Tap an address to go directly to that webpage.
§ Continue typing in the webpage address, then tap
51
Search and Web browser
Changing the screen orientation
Turn HTC Explorer sideways to display the web browser in landscape orientation.
/1
If the screen orientation doesn’t change automatically, turn on automatic screen
orientation. From the Home screen, press
, tap Settings > Display, and then
select the Auto-rotate screen check box.
09
Navigating and zooming on a webpage
§ You can swipe your finger on the screen to navigate and view other areas of the
webpage.
11
§ Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly again
to zoom out. You can also use your fingers to spread or pinch the screen to
zoom in and out.
20
Selecting a link on a webpage
You can tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link for more options.
What to do
Webpage
address
(URLs)
§ Tap the link to open the webpage.
tia
Link
en
§ Press and hold the link to open a menu that allows you to open,
bookmark, copy to the clipboard, or share the link.
Email address § Tap to send an email message to the email address.
on
fid
§ Press and hold, then tap Copy on the menu to copy the email
address to the clipboard. You can paste the email address later
when creating a new contact or sending a new email message.
Selecting an address or phone number on a webpage
On a webpage, you can:
§ Tap an address to view the location on a map.
TC
§ Tap a phone number to call.
Opening a new browser window
Open multiple browser windows to make it easier for you to switch from one website
to another.
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. Tap
A new browser window opens.
and then tap Windows.
52
Search and Web browser
Switching between browser windows
1. While viewing a webpage, do one of the following:
§ Press
and then tap Windows.
§ Pinch the screen (zoom out) until you see the other browser windows.
20
11
09
/1
2. Slide your finger until the webpage you want to view appears.
to close a webpage.
en
Tap
tia
3. Tap a webpage to display it in full screen.
fid
Downloading from the Web
on
Do more than just browsing the Web. You can download files such as photos and
music as well as apps using the web browser.
Before downloading an app, check first its compatibility with HTC Explorer to make
sure it can be installed.
TC
Downloading apps from the Web
You can download apps directly from your favorite websites. Apps downloaded from
the Web can be from unknown sources. To protect HTC Explorer and your personal
data, we strongly recommend that you download and install only apps you trust.
1. Open your web browser, then go to the website where you can download the
app you want.
2. Follow the website's instructions for downloading the app.
Before you can install the downloaded app, you need to set HTC Explorer to allow
installation of third-party apps. From the Home screen, press
, then tap Settings >
Applications > Unknown sources.
53
Search and Web browser
Viewing your downloads
While viewing a webpage, press
and then tap More > Downloads.
/1
Viewing bookmarks and previously visited
pages
09
You can store as many bookmarks as you want on HTC Explorer. You can also access
a convenient list of the sites you have visited, or quickly view the pages that you
access most often.
11
Bookmarking a webpage
1. While viewing a webpage, press
, and then tap Add > Add bookmark.
20
2. To bookmark the web page under a certain category (such as sports or dining),
tap Add tags and enter a tag name. This groups similar web pages so you can
easily locate them.
tia
Opening a bookmark
3. Edit the bookmark name if needed, and then tap Done.
1. While viewing a webpage, press
, and then tap Bookmarks.
en
2. Do one of the following:
§ On the Bookmarks tab
and then tap it.
, navigate to the bookmark you want to open,
fid
§ On the Tags tab
, open a tag group, navigate to the bookmark you want
to open, and then tap it.
on
Editing a bookmark
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. On the Bookmarks tab
TC
3. Tap
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, press
and then tap Edit.
at the right of the bookmark you want to edit.
4. Enter your changes, and then tap Done.
Viewing a previously visited page
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. On the History tab
page.
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, navigate to the page you want to view and then tap the
Clearing the list of previously visited pages
1. While viewing a webpage, press
2. On the History tab
, press
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, and then tap Clear history.
54
Search and Web browser
Viewing a page that you often visit
1. While viewing a webpage, press
, navigate to the page you want to view, and then
Clearing the list of most visited pages
2. On the Most visited tab
, press
, and then tap Bookmarks.
09
1. While viewing a webpage, press
/1
2. On the Most visited tab
tap the page.
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, and then tap Clear all.
1. While viewing a webpage, press
11
Changing the view of bookmarks or most visited pages
, and then tap Bookmarks.
, press
, and then tap
20
2. On the Bookmarks tab
or the Most visited tab
Thumbnails, List, or Grid to change the view.
For example, if you are in Thumbnails view and you want to view bookmarks in
and tap List, then press
and tap Grid.
a grid, press
tia
Setting browser options
en
Customize the web browser to suit your browsing style. Set display, privacy, and
security options when using the web browser.
fid
From the browser screen, press
, and then tap More > Settings.
Setting your home page
, and then tap More > Settings > Set home
on
1. From the browser screen, press
page.
2. Select the home page you want to use.
TC
Browsing full versions of all websites
Some websites display a mobile version of their pages on phone web browsers. You
can choose to view the full version of all pages, even for these sites.
From the browser screen, press
view check box.
, tap More > Settings, and then clear the Mobile
55
Search and Web browser
Choosing when to show Adobe Flash content
Choose which Adobe® Flash® content you want to see on a webpage, and when you
want to view it.
, and then tap More > Settings > Enable
1. From the browser screen, press
plugins.
/1
2. Tap On demand.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
After selecting On demand, you can show the Adobe Flash content by tapping
the webpage.
on
56
Accounts and sync
About online accounts
09
HTC Explorer can sync with your Facebook and email accounts.
/1
Accounts and sync
The information you can get includes:
11
§ Gmail, Exchange ActiveSync, and other POP3/IMAP email.
§ Google and Exchange ActiveSync contacts, as well as your friends’ contact
information in Facebook.
20
§ Calendar events from your Google Account(s), from Exchange ActiveSync, and
from your Facebook account.
§ Status updates and links shared by your friends and yourself on Facebook.
tia
§ Facebook photo uploads.
en
You can set up your Exchange ActiveSync and POP3/IMAP email accounts on
HTC Explorer either in the Mail app or the Accounts & sync settings.
Synchronizing with a Google Account
on
fid
Signing in to your Google Account lets you sync Gmail and your Google contacts and
calendars between HTC Explorer and the Web. You also need to sign in to a Google
Account to use Google apps such as Google Talk and Android Market.
TC
If you skipped adding a Google Account when you first set up HTC Explorer, you
may encounter problems when using some Google apps. If these problems persist,
you may need to factory reset HTC Explorer and enter your Google Account details
when you set up HTC Explorer again.
Adding more Google Accounts
You can add more than one Google Account. However, subsequent Google Accounts
can only sync contacts, emails, and calendar events. Other Google services use the
first Google Account you added.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Add account > Google.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign in to an account or create a new
account.
57
Accounts and sync
Forgot your Google Account password?
If you have forgotten your Google Account password, you can try to recover it
by going to the Google website.
/1
1. On HTC Explorer or on your computer, open your web browser and go
to https://www.google.com/accounts/ForgotPasswd.
09
2. Enter the email address or username that you use to sign in to your
Google Account and click Submit.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to reset your password.
20
11
If you don’t have an alternate email address or cannot access the email
account you used to create your Google Account, you can reset your Google
Account after 24 hours by answering the security question for password
recovery.
tia
Adding a social network account
en
If you skipped signing in to your social network account (such as Facebook) when
you first turned on and set up HTC Explorer, you can still add the account in the
settings.
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Add account, and then tap the account type you want to add.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter the account information.
on
Your social network account is then added to the list on the Accounts & sync screen.
Depending on how you configured the account, the new information may start
synchronizing with HTC Explorer.
TC
Managing your online accounts
Changing general sync settings
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Select or clear the following:
Background
data
If this is selected, apps can send and receive online account
information even if you are not currently using them.
Auto-sync
If this is selected, apps can use the sync schedule defined in
the account settings. If this is cleared, you will need to sync
accounts manually.
58
Accounts and sync
Synchronizing an account manually
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap the account that you want to sync.
3. Tap Sync now.
/1
Changing account settings
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
You can change settings such as the sync frequency and the types of information
synchronized, the kinds of notification you receive, and the way that account
information is displayed.
2. On the Accounts & sync screen, tap the account that you want to edit.
20
3. Tap the type of information you want to sync or select an item to edit its
settings.
Removing an account
tia
You can remove an account to delete it and all information associated with it from
HTC Explorer, for example email, contacts, or settings. Removing an account does not
delete information from the online service itself.
en
You cannot remove some accounts, such as the first Google account you signed
into, except by deleting all personal information from HTC Explorer with a hard
reset.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap the account that you want to remove.
TC
on
3. Tap Remove account, and then confirm that you want to remove the account.
59
People
People
/1
Transferring contacts from your old phone
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Transfer.
2. Tap Next to begin.
20
3. Choose your old phone's name and model.
11
09
Easily transfer contacts from your old phone to HTC Explorer through Bluetooth.
Depending on your old phone’s model, you may also transfer other types of data such
as calendar events and text messages to HTC Explorer.
4. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to discoverable mode.
5. On HTC Explorer, tap Next to continue. HTC Explorer automatically turns
Bluetooth on and searches for Bluetooth devices.
tia
6. From the device list, choose your old phone and then tap Next. HTC Explorer
then tries to pair with your old phone. You’ll see a security passkey on the
screen.
en
7. On your old phone, enter this passkey or simply confirm it.
fid
8. Select the Contacts check box (and other supported types of data you want to
import), and then tap Next.
TC
on
9. When HTC Explorer finishes importing data, tap Done.
60
People
About the People app
With the People app, easily manage your communications with your contacts via
phone, messaging, and email. You can also link your contacts to their social network
account such as Facebook to see their updates and events from the account all in one
place.
> People.
2. Tap one of the following tabs:
Phone
20
Launches the Phone dialer screen.
11
1. From the Home screen, tap
09
/1
And that's not all. If you have the same contacts from different sources, People lets
you merge their contact information so you won't have duplicate entries in your
contacts list.
People
Gives you access to all contacts on HTC Explorer, online accounts, and
more.
tia
Groups
en
Lets you assign contacts to groups so you can easily send an SMS, MMS,
or email message to a whole group.
Call History
TC
on
fid
Lists all your dialed numbers and received and missed calls.
61
People
Your contacts list
The People app lists all contacts stored on HTC Explorer and from the online accounts
you're logged in to. When you open People after you've just logged in to a new
account, you'll be asked whether to add contacts from that account to your contacts
list.
/1
Your contacts list also displays the contacts stored on your SIM card (usually marked
with the SIM card icon ).
09
You can:
11
§ Open your profile and edit your own contact
information.
§ Create, edit, or find contacts.
20
§ See status updates from friends in your social
network account such as Facebook.
§ Tap a contact's name to open the contact details
screen for that contact.
tia
§ See a notification icon such as
when a contact
has sent you new messages or when it's the
contact's birthday.
fid
en
§ Check out who's online in Google Talk. Online
status icons are displayed if you’re signed in to
Google Talk on HTC Explorer. For example,
means the contact is available to chat.
Filtering your contacts list
on
You can choose to only display contacts from particular account types (for example,
Google contacts or Facebook contacts).
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. On the People tab, tap
> People.
on the top bar to show a list of your online accounts.
TC
3. Choose the online accounts that contain the contacts you want to display in
your contacts list, and then press
to save your selection.
4. To set more options on sorting your contacts, press
and then tap Settings.
62
People
Setting up your profile
Store your personal contact information to easily send it to other people.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. Do one of the following:
09
/1
§ If you're logged in to any of your online accounts such as your Google
Account or Facebook for HTC Sense, tap your name or email address, and
then tap Edit my contact card.
3. Enter or edit your name and contact details.
11
§ If you're not logged in to your online accounts, tap Me, and then choose
whether to link your profile to an existing contact entry that already
contains your personal information or edit your profile.
20
4. Tap
or your photo, and then choose whether to take your self-portrait or use
another photo for your profile.
5. Tap Save.
What you can see on your profile
tia
When you tap My profile, you'll see the following tabs:
Details
en
Shows your own contact details. You'll also see your most recent posts in your
social network (such as Facebook if you're signed in to Facebook for HTC
Sense).
fid
From this tab, you can edit your profile or share it with others.
Updates and events
on
Shows the updates and events that you've posted in your social network .
Gallery
TC
Shows your Facebook albums and photos.
Importing contacts from your SIM card
When you import SIM contacts, you can either store them on HTC Explorer or add
them to your Google contacts or Exchange ActiveSync contacts, if you have set up
the relevant accounts.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Import/Export > Import from SIM card.
3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,
tap the type for the imported contacts.
63
People
4. Do one of the following:
§ Tap one or more SIM contacts you want to import.
§ To import all contacts, tap Select all.
5. Tap Save.
2. Tap
> People.
11
3. Tap the Name field, and then enter the contact name.
09
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
Adding a new contact
20
Tap
if you want to separately enter the contact's first, middle, and last name.
Depending on the contact type, you may also be able to add a name prefix (such as
Mr. or Ms.) or a name suffix (such as Ph.D., Jr, or Sr).
4. Select the Contact type, for example Google or Exchange ActiveSync. This
determines which account the contact will sync with.
tia
Some fields may not be available when you’re adding contacts to your SIM card.
5. Enter the contact information in the fields provided.
fid
6. Tap Save.
en
Press
if you want to close the onscreen keyboard first and easily scroll
through the other fields.
on
Searching for contacts
In addition to searching contacts by name or email address, you can set the People
app to search by other criteria such as by their group name or company.
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Settings > Search contacts by.
3. Choose the types of criteria to search for, and then tap Done.
When performing your search, simply enter the first few characters of the item you're
looking for in the search box. Matching contacts will then be listed.
64
People
Importing a contact from an Exchange
ActiveSync account
You can search for a work contact from your Exchange ActiveSync account, and then
copy it on HTC Explorer.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
You need to have your Exchange ActiveSync account set up on HTC Explorer first.
> People.
. Under Company contacts, matching names are listed.
11
3. Tap
09
2. In the search box, enter the first few letters of the contact's name or email
address.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
4. Tap the name of the contact you want copied on HTC Explorer, and then tap
Save to People.
65
People
Merging contact information
/1
If you have the same contacts on HTC Explorer, Google Account, and your social
network account such as Facebook, HTC Explorer will try to combine them
automatically or let you decide which contacts to combine. Combining the same
contacts avoids duplicate entries in your contacts list.
Accepting matched contacts suggestions
09
When HTC Explorer finds contacts that can be merged, you’ll see a link icon
the notifications area of the status bar.
in
fid
en
tia
20
11
1. Slide the Notifications panel down, and then tap Matched contacts suggestion.
You'll see a list of suggested contacts to merge.
2. To merge, tap
on
3. Tap OK.
If you don’t want to merge any of your contacts, tap Dismiss all.
TC
Viewing a list of all your linked contacts
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. Press
, and then tap Linked contacts (or More > Linked contacts). The All
linked contacts screen then opens where you can see the account types and
information merged.
3. You can choose to break the link of an account type or relink.
4. When you're done, tap OK.
Manually merging contact information
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) you want to link.
66
People
3. Tap
or
(if there are suggested links).
4. You can:
§ Under Suggest links, tap
to link the contact to an account.
§ Under Add contact, tap one of the options to link to another contact.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
Breaking the link
> People.
beside an account type to break
20
4. Under the Linked contacts section, tap
the link.
11
3. Tap
09
2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) whose link you want to
break.
Backing up your contacts to the storage card
, and then tap Import/Export > Export to SD card.
tia
2. Press
> People.
1. From the Home screen, tap
en
3. Select an account or type of contacts to export, then tap OK.
Importing contacts from the storage card
fid
You can only import contacts that were exported to the storage card using the
Export to SD card feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
on
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Import/Export > Import from SD card.
TC
3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,
tap the type for the imported contacts.
Contact information and conversations
When you tap a contact on the People screen, the contact details screen opens,
showing you the information you've stored or linked for that contact.
The contact details screen has the following tabs:
67
People
Details
Shows the information you have stored for the contact. Get in touch with the
contact directly by tapping any of the displayed methods. For example, if the
contact has a stored work phone number, tap Call work.
Thread
/1
Shows SMS messages and emails you've received from the contact. It also lists
all your incoming, outgoing, and missed calls to and from the contact.
09
From this tab, you can reply to a message, send an email, or call the contact.
Updates
11
Shows the contact’s updates and events from your social network account (for
example, Facebook).
20
If you see a notification of the contact’s birthday under the Events section, you
can tap the notification and choose how you want to greet your contact, such
as to write on the person's Facebook wall.
Gallery
tia
Shows the linked contact’s Facebook albums and photos.
Editing a contact’s information
> People.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and hold the contact, and then tap Edit contact.
fid
The contact details of your Facebook contacts cannot be edited.
3. Enter the new information for the contact.
on
4. Tap Save.
Deleting contacts
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. Press
> People.
, and then tap Delete.
3. Select the contacts you want to remove, and then tap Delete.
4. When prompted, tap OK.
68
People
Sending contact information as a vCard
Easily share with others your own contact information or any contact from
HTC Explorer.
> People.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
2. Do the any of the following:
Do this
Someone's contact
information
Press and hold the name of the contact (not the icon or
photo) whose contact information you want to send,
and then tap Send contact as vCard.
Your contact
information
Press and hold My profile, and then tap Send my profile.
11
09
To send
20
3. From the available options, choose how you want to send the vCard.
4. Select the type of information you want to send, and then tap Send.
Sending multiple contact cards
tia
Easily share with others the contact information of several contacts from your
HTC Explorer.
2. Press
> People.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
, and then tap Send contacts.
fid
3. Select the contacts whose contact information you want to share, and then tap
Send.
on
If you can't see the Send button while the onscreen keyboard is open, press
close the keyboard.
to
4. Choose how you want to send the contact cards:
TC
Bluetooth Tap Scan for devices, and then tap the device to which you want to
send the contact cards. Follow the onscreen messages on
HTC Explorer and the other device to pair them and send the files.
Mail
Compose and send your email message, with the contact cards
attached.
69
People
Contact groups
/1
Assign contacts to groups so you can easily send a message or email to a whole
group. You can also sync groups on HTC Explorer with the groups in your Google
account, accessible via your computer’s web browser. We’ve also added the Frequent
group as a special group type that automatically stores the contacts you dial or get
calls from the most.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
3. Enter a name for the group, and then tap
11
2. On the Groups tab, tap
09
Creating a group
20
4. Select the contacts you want to add to the group, and then tap Save
If your contacts list is long, you can use the search bar to search for contacts
quickly, or press
to hide the onscreen keyboard and scroll through the list.
5. Tap
to select a photo for the group.
tia
6. Tap Save.
Editing a contact group
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. On the Group tab, press and hold the group, and then tap Edit group.
fid
3. You can:
§ Tap the group name to change the name. You can only change the name
for groups that you have created.
on
§ Tap the icon to the left of the group name to change or remove the group
photo.
§ To add contacts to the group, tap
and then tap Save.
, select the contacts you want to add,
TC
§ To remove a contact from the group, tap the box beside the contact name.
4. Tap Save.
70
People
Sending a message or email to a group
> People.
/1
1. From the Home screen, tap
You will be charged for each message sent. For example, if you send a message to
a group of five people, you will be charged for five messages.
2. On the Group tab, tap the group you want to send a message or email to.
09
3. Go to the Group action tab, and then do one of the following:
§ Tap Send group message to send a message to the group.
Rearranging your contact groups
2. On the Groups tab, press
> People.
20
1. From the Home screen, tap
11
§ Tap Send group mail to send an email to the group.
, and then tap Edit group.
on
fid
en
tia
3. Press and hold
at the end of the group you want to move. When the row is
highlighted, drag it to its new position.
4. Tap Save.
TC
Rearranging the members of a contact group
1. From the Home screen, tap
> People.
2. On the Groups tab, tap the group to see its members.
3. Press
, and then tap Edit group.
4. Press and hold
at the end of the contact’s name you want to move. When
the row is highlighted, drag it to its new position.
5. Tap Save.
71
People
Deleting groups
You can only delete groups that you have created.
> People.
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
2. On the Groups tab, you can:
§ Press and hold a group you want to delete, and then tap Delete group.
Adding People widgets
11
09
§ Press
and then tap Edit groups to choose several contact groups to
remove.
on
fid
en
tia
20
Stay in touch with different circles of friends or colleagues in your life. You can add
several People widgets on the Home screen, with a different group of contacts on
each widget.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Personalize.
2. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget > People.
TC
3. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
4. Select the group you want to add as a widget.
5. Repeat the above steps to add another People widget.
Setting the default communication method
Depending on how you often reach your contacts, you can choose a different
communication method for each of the contacts on the People widget.
1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.
2. Tap a contact's name or status update (not the photo) on the widget to open
the person's contact details screen.
72
People
3. Tap Set default action, and then tap the communication method you want for
the contact.
4. Press
to return to the People widget on the Home screen.
Changing the default communication method
/1
1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.
09
2. Tap a contact's name or status update on the widget to open the person’s
contact details screen.
3. Tap Set default action.
5. Press
11
4. On the Select default action screen, tap the communication method you want
for the contact.
to return to the People widget on the Home screen.
20
Getting in touch with a contact
1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.
On the People widget:
tia
2. Tap a contact's photo (not the name or status update) on the widget. The
default communication method you've set for this contact will be performed.
to open the People app and view all your contacts.
fid
§ Tap
en
§ Tap a contact's name or status update to open the contact details screen for that
contact.
Adding group members to a People widget
TC
on
You can add more members to the contact group that's on a People widget.
§ To add just one member, tap
§ To add several members, tap
73
Social
Social
/1
Facebook for HTC Sense
09
With Facebook for HTC Sense, you can:
§ See all your Facebook contacts and their instant status updates in People.
11
When you tap a contact in People, slide to the
Updates tab to see updates such as posted status
messages, uploads, and profile changes.
en
tia
20
When there is a notification of the contact’s
birthday, you can tap the notification to send a
greeting.
You can also upload one or more photos to
Facebook, then tag and add captions that go with
it.
When you’re viewing the albums of a Facebook
friend, you can also share a link to a particular
album, or comment on the album photos.
TC
on
fid
§ See Facebook photos right on the Gallery app.
§ Check your friends’ Facebook status updates in Friend Stream™.
§ View your Facebook events and your friends’ birthdays on the Calendar app.
74
Social
§ Signing in to your Facebook account from the Accounts & sync settings or the
Facebook app (preinstalled or downloaded from Android Market) automatically
signs you in to Facebook for HTC Sense.
09
Enjoying Facebook in Friend Stream
/1
§ You may need to authorize Facebook for HTC Sense to connect to your Facebook
account.
11
Post your status updates, write messages on your friends' Facebook walls, or share
your location with your social network.
Posting a message on a friend's Facebook wall
1. In Friend Stream, tap
2. Tap
20
Quickly write a wall post to your Facebook friends in Friend Stream.
> Facebook.
> My wall, and then tap a friend from the list.
to attach a photo.
tia
4. Tap
3. Enter your message.
5. Tap Post.
en
Commenting on and liking Facebook posts
TC
on
fid
Tap someone’s status update on the All updates tab, and do any of the following:
§ Tap a photo or the album name shown in the status
update to view and comment on the album photos
using the Gallery app.
§ Tap Like to like the person’s status update.
§ Tap the text box, and then enter what you think
about the person’s status update.
75
Social
Sharing your location with your Facebook friends
Eating out in your fave restaurant? Tell your friends where you are and invite them
along.
/1
§ You must be signed in to Facebook for HTC Sense to use this feature in Friend
Stream.
1. Go to the Locations tab, and then tap
09
§ In order to find your location, you also need to enable location sources in Settings
> Location.
11
2. Do any of the following:
§ Tap a place from the list.
20
§ Tap
, type in your current location name and description, and then tap
Done.
3. Tap Check in.
tia
5. When done, tap Check in.
4. On the next screen, you can add your status message and even tag the friends
you're with.
en
Chatting in Google Talk
fid
Google Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It lets you communicate with
other people that also use Google Talk. If you signed in to your Google Account when
you first set up HTC Explorer, you are already signed in to Google Talk.
> Talk.
on
To open Google Talk, on the Home screen tap
Chatting with a friend
TC
1. In Google Talk, tap a friend in the Friends list.
2. Enter your message in the text box. You can also insert a smiley by pressing
and then tapping More > Insert smiley.
3. Tap Send.
4. While chatting, press
and then tap any of these options:
Chat off
record
Your Google Talk messages are stored in the Chats folder of
your Gmail account. Tap this option if you don’t want to store
your chat messages.
Switch chats
If you have more than one chat going, tap to switch chat with
another friend.
Friends list
Return to the Friends list.
Social
Add another friend to your chat. The friend you invited and
the friend you're currently chatting will receive an invitation to
a group chat. Each one who accepts the invitation joins the
group chat.
End chat
End your current chat.
More
Clear the chat history, insert a smiley or view your friend’s
contact details.
Add to chat
09
/1
76
Accepting a chat invitation
11
When a friend sends you a Google Talk message, you receive a notification. Their
entry in the Friends list displays the message.
Do one of the following:
§ In the Friends list, tap the friend who sent you the invitation to chat.
20
§ Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the chat notification.
Changing your online status and picture
1. In Google Talk's Friends list, tap your name to open the Set Status screen.
tia
2. Enter your new status message. Or press
the list.
to choose a custom status from
en
3. Tap the online status beside your picture, and then select the status you want
on the menu.
4. Tap your picture, and then do one of the following:
fid
§ Tap Remove to remove your photo.
§ Tap Change to select another picture.
on
5. Tap Done.
TC
Your online status, message, and picture appear in your contacts' Friends list and in
other apps where your Google Talk status are displayed.
77
Social
Adding and managing friends
The Friends list is where you add and manage your friends in Google Talk.
In Google Talk's Friends list, you can:
1. Press
, and then tap Add friend.
Invite a friend
/1
2. Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or Gmail address of the
friend you want to add.
09
3. Tap Send invitation.
Initially, only those friends that you often chat with — the most
popular — are shown in the Friends list. To view all your friends,
press
, and then tap All friends. To view only friends that you
often chat with, press
, and then tap Most popular.
11
View all
friends
1. Press
You can block a friend from sending you messages. When blocked,
your friend is removed from the Friends list and is added to the
Blocked friends list.
, and then tap All friends.
tia
Block a friend
20
Make a friend 1. Press
, and then tap All friends.
popular
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Always show friend.
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Block friend.
1. Press
, and then tap More > Blocked.
en
Unblock a
friend
2. Tap the friend you want to unblock and then tap OK.
fid
View all
Press
, and then tap More > Invites. Friends who have not yet
invited friends accepted your invitation are listed on the screen.
on
Changing settings or signing out
In Google Talk's Friends list, press
and then tap:
§ Settings to change the app and notification settings.
TC
§ Sign out to sign out.
78
Camera
Camera
/1
Camera basics
09
Whether traveling for business or fun, enjoy taking photos and videos of your trip and
encounters with HTC Explorer.
from the Home
11
§ To open the camera in photo mode and take photos, tap
screen, and then tap Camera.
20
§ To open the camera directly in video mode so you can immediately start
capturing videos, tap
from the Home screen, and then tap Camcorder.
Viewfinder screen
TC
on
fid
en
tia
You’ll find the following onscreen controls on the Viewfinder screen:
Zoom bar
Photo/Video mode switch
Shutter release/Record button
Effects button
Gallery button
79
Camera
Zooming
Before taking a photo or video, you can first use the onscreen zoom bar to zoom in or
out of your subject.
11
09
/1
Simply slide your finger up or down the zoom bar to zoom in or out.
20
When you're recording video, the zoom bar is always shown onscreen. You can freely
zoom in or out while recording.
Taking your closeup shot
to open the settings menu panel.
en
1. Press
tia
Having a hard time taking your own closeup shot? With the camera, it's easy. Just set
it to automatically take your self portrait. You won't even need to tap the shutter
release button.
2. Tap Self-portrait.
to close the settings menu panel.
fid
3. Press
4. Turn the camera to face you.
on
Once the camera detects your face, it automatically focuses and takes your photo.
Taking a photo
TC
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Camera.
2. Before taking the photo, you can zoom in or out first on your subject.
3. Choose the resolution and other camera settings you want to use.
4. Choose an effect to apply to your photo.
5. Point the camera and focus on your subject.
6. When you're ready to take the photo, tap
7. Choose what you want to do with the photo you’ve just taken.
80
Camera
Recording video
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Camcorder.
2. Choose the video quality and other camera settings you want to use.
3. Choose an effect to apply to your video.
to start recording.
6. You can freely zoom in or out while recording video.
again.
11
7. To stop recording, tap
09
5. Tap
/1
4. Frame your subject on the Viewfinder screen.
8. Choose what you want to do with the video you’ve just recorded.
20
Adding effects
Want to make your photos look more interesting? Easy. Use the available camera
effects to make your photos look like they’ve been taken through special lenses and
filters. You can also add certain effects to videos.
1. Tap
tia
Choose an effect first before you start taking a photo or video.
en
2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one that you like.
fid
After capturing
on
After capturing a photo or video, the Review screen will display the photo or the
starting image of the video that you have just captured. Tap the onscreen buttons to
choose what you want to do next.
Delete the photo or video
TC
Send the photo or video to your computer or another device using Bluetooth,
send it by email, or select a social network where you want to upload it to.
Choose how you want to use the photo, such as by setting it as your wallpaper.
Watch the video.
81
Camera
Changing camera settings
Open the menu panel to access and change camera settings.
Select this option to take your own closeup shot.
/1
Self-portrait (photo
mode only)
To open the camera settings, press
09
Self-timer (photo mode Set a time delay before your camera automatically takes
only)
the photo.
Slide your finger across each of the slider bars to adjust the
exposure, contrast, saturation, and sharpness.
White balance
White balance enables the camera to capture colors more
accurately by adjusting to your current lighting
environment.
Resolution/Video
quality
Choose a photo or video resolution to use.
20
11
Image adjustments
tia
ISO (photo mode only) Choose an ISO level or set it back to Auto. Higher ISO
numbers are better for taking pictures in low light
conditions.
Set the time for a captured photo or video to be displayed
on the Review screen before the camera changes back to
the Viewfinder screen.
en
Review duration
fid
Widescreen (photo
mode only)
When this check box is selected (default), photo resolutions
available for selection are in 3:2 ratio and you can use the
entire Viewfinder screen to frame your subject. When not
selected, photo resolutions available for selection are in
standard 4:3 ratio.
TC
on
Geo-tag photos (photo Select to store GPS location in your captured photos.
mode only)
Auto enhance (photo
mode only)
Select to reduce noise when using a high ISO setting and to
automatically adjust photo brightness.
Shutter sound
Select to play a sound when you press the shutter release
or record button.
Grid (photo mode
only)
Select to display a grid on the Viewfinder screen so you can
easily frame and center your subject before taking the
photo.
Record with audio
(video mode only)
Select to record audio when capturing videos.
Reset to default
Change the camera settings back to default.
82
Photos, videos, and music
Photos, videos, and music
/1
Gallery
09
About the Gallery app
11
Relive the fun while viewing photos and videos of your latest travels or your pet’s
newest tricks. Get an audience by tagging your Facebook friends.
20
To start using Gallery, check first if you have photos or videos copied on
HTC Explorer.
What’s more, you can edit and add effects to your photos. You can also easily use a
photo as your contact icon, location icon, or wallpaper.
Selecting an album
TC
on
fid
en
tia
From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery. The Gallery app opens on the Albums screen
where your photos and videos are organized by albums for easy viewing.
83
Photos, videos, and music
Viewing photos and videos
After you’ve selected an album, you can browse through your photos and videos.
20
11
09
/1
Slide your finger up or down to scroll through the thumbnails. Tap a photo or video to
view it in full screen.
tia
While viewing a photo in full screen, you can press
, and then tap Show on map
to see the location where you took the photo. (Show on map is available when
you've enabled Geo-tag photos in Camera.)
en
Zooming in or out on a photo
There are two ways you can zoom in or out of a photo.
fid
§ Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly again
to zoom out.
TC
on
§ Press your thumb and index finger on the screen and then spread your fingers
apart to zoom in; pinch your fingers together to zoom out.
Viewing photos as a slideshow
1. Select an album that has the photos you want to view as a slideshow.
2. Tap Slideshow.
Tap the screen to show the playback controls.
84
Photos, videos, and music
Watching videos
While browsing an album, tap a video to play it.
20
11
09
§ Use the onscreen controls to play, pause, or stop the video.
from the Homescreen, and
/1
Another way to easily get to your videos is to tap
then tap Videos.
tia
Editing your photos
§ Tap More > Full screen or More > Best fit to toggle between full and best-fit
screens.
Rotating a photo
en
Do basic editing tasks on your photos such as rotate and crop. You can also enhance
your photos by applying effects such as high contrast, vintage, and more.
fid
1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.
2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to rotate.
on
3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap either Rotate left or Rotate right.
Cropping a photo
1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.
TC
2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to crop.
3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Crop. You’ll see a crop box
around the photo.
4. To adjust the crop box size, press and hold the edge of the box.
85
Photos, videos, and music
5. When directional arrows appear, drag your finger inward or outward to resize
the crop box.
6. To move the crop box to the part of the photo that you want to crop, drag the
crop box to the desired position.
/1
The cropped photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.
7. Tap Save to keep the changes.
1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.
09
Adding effects
11
2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to add effects to.
3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Effects. On the panel that opens,
you’ll see options available to you.
20
4. Tap an effect to apply on the photo.
5. Tap Save to keep the changes.
The enhanced photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.
tia
Sending your photos and videos
en
Send photos and videos via email or MMS to your computer or another device using
Bluetooth.
Sending photos or videos by email
fid
You can send several photos, videos, or both in an email message. They are added as
file attachments in your email.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
on
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
3. Tap
and then tap Gmail or Mail.
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.
TC
5. Compose your message and then tap
(Gmail) or Send (Mail).
If you selected Mail and you have multiple email accounts, the default email
account will be used.
Sending a photo or video by MMS
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
3. Tap
and then tap Messages.
86
Photos, videos, and music
4. Tap the photo or video you want to send. The photo or video is automatically
added into the MMS message.
5. To add another photo or video to your slideshow attachment, tap
tap Picture or Video.
and then
6. Compose your message and then tap Send.
/1
Sending photos or videos using Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap
09
You can select several photos, videos, or both and send them to someone’s device or
your computer using Bluetooth.
> Gallery.
3. Tap
11
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
and then tap Bluetooth.
20
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer and
connect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the files can be sent.
Sharing your photos and videos on the Web
tia
Using the Gallery app, you can share photos and videos on your social networks. And
you can post videos on YouTube.
en
You can also use the Camera or Camcorder app to share a photo or video right
after you’ve captured it.
fid
Sharing photos or videos on Facebook
on
You need to be logged in to your account to be able to upload photos or videos.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.
TC
3. Tap
and then tap Facebook for HTC Sense.
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.
5. Select which album to upload to and set privacy settings for the uploaded
photos or videos.
6. Tap Add tag and description, and then enter a different caption on each photo
or video.
7. To tag friends on your photos, tap Tag this photo. You can then tap the part
where your friend is, and then select who you want to tag from the list. Repeat
this step to continue tagging friends.
87
Photos, videos, and music
8. Slide to the left to go to the next photo or video. When finished adding tags and
descriptions, tap Done.
9. Tap Done.
Sharing photos on Picasa
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
3. Tap
11
2. Tap the album that has the photos you want to share.
09
/1
You need to be signed in to a Google Account to be able to upload photos to the
Picasa™ photo organizing service.
and then tap Picasa.
4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap Next.
20
5. Enter a caption for the photos you're uploading.
6. Select the online album where you want to upload the photos, or tap
create a new album.
to
tia
Sharing videos on YouTube
7. Tap Upload.
You can share your videos by uploading them to YouTube.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that has the videos you want to share.
and then tap YouTube.
fid
3. Tap
4. Select the videos you want to share and then tap Next. Sign in to your YouTube
or Google Account, if you’re asked to do so.
on
5. Enter a title for the videos you're uploading.
6. Tap More details where you can enter information such as description and tags,
and select a privacy option.
TC
7. Tap Upload.
88
Photos, videos, and music
Viewing photos in your social networks
Right in the Gallery app, check what you and your friends have uploaded to your
social networks.
Viewing photos on Facebook
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to view Facebook photos.
> Gallery.
09
2. Tap the Facebook tab.
11
3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account on the list to view the photos in
the account.
You can view photos in your online albums in the same way as you view photos on
your storage card.
20
Commenting on photos in your social networks
Add comments to your uploaded photos as well as your friends’ photos.
1. Do one of the following:
tia
§ While browsing online albums, press and hold a photo and then tap Add
comment.
en
§ While viewing a photo in full screen, tap anywhere on the screen, and then
tap
2. Tap the box that says “Write a comment.”
TC
on
fid
3. Enter your text, and then tap Comment.
89
Photos, videos, and music
Music
Listening to music
Enjoy listening to songs and music on HTC Explorer using the Music app.
1. From the Home screen, tap
screen.
09
/1
You need to copy music files to your storage card first to use the Music app to play
music.
> Music. The Music app opens in the Now playing
11
2. Swipe your finger left or right across the screen to go to the next or previous
music album.
20
3. Tap the onscreen icons to control music playback, select a song to play, repeat
songs, and more.
Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off when
button is gray.)
on
fid
en
tia
Press and drag your finger across the
progress bar to jump to any part of the
song.
Go to the library.
Switch between showing the Now playing
list and Now playing screen. You can
rearrange songs in the Now playing list.
Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat all
songs, repeat current song, and don’t
repeat.
Playing music from the Lock screen
TC
When you’re listening to music and the screen turns off, press POWER to turn the
screen back on and control the music playback directly on the Lock screen.
If you don’t see the playback controls on the Lock screen, swipe your finger from left
to right on the box onscreen.
Photos, videos, and music
11
09
/1
90
20
You can also pause music playback right from the Notifications panel.
About the Music widget
tia
Browsing music in the library
You can use the Music widget to play music right from your Home screen.
en
1. Tap
on the Music app’s Now playing screen or Now playing list to go to the
library. In the library, your music is organized by categories such as Artists and
Albums. Choose a category by tapping one of the tabs at the bottom of the
screen.
fid
2. Tap a song in a category to play it. The Now playing list is updated with the
song list from your selected category.
on
You can add, remove, or rearrange the tabs in the library.
TC
Creating a playlist
Personalize your music experience by creating music playlists. Make a playlist
containing just your favorite songs or create one to match your mood for the day.
You can make as many playlists as you like.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap
> Music.
to go to the library.
3. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
4. Tap
5. Enter a playlist name, and then tap Add songs to playlist.
6. Choose a category.
91
Photos, videos, and music
7. Select the check boxes of songs you want to add to the playlist and then tap
Add.
8. Tap Save.
Playing the songs in a playlist
/1
1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
09
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
3. Tap the first song or any song in the playlist.
11
When you tap a song in the list to play it, the Now playing screen is updated with the
songs from your playlist.
Managing playlists
20
After creating a playlist, you can add more songs to it, rearrange their order, and
more.
3. Press
tia
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
, and then choose what you want to do:
fid
en
Add more songs to 1. Tap Add songs.
a playlist
2. Go to the Songs category or any other category.
TC
on
Rearrange songs
3. Select the songs you want to add to the playlist and
then tap Add.
1. Tap Change order.
2. Press and hold
at the end of the song title you want
to move. When the row is highlighted, drag it to its new
position, then release.
Delete songs from a 1. Tap Remove songs.
playlist
2. Select the songs you want to delete and then tap
Remove.
Change playlist
name
Tap Rename playlist.
Deleting playlists
1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlists
category.
2. Press
and then tap Delete playlists.
3. Select the playlists to delete and then tap Delete.
92
Photos, videos, and music
Setting a song as a ringtone
You can set a song from the Music app's library as your regular ringtone or as
ringtone for a certain contact.
> Music.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then tap Set as ringtone (or More >
09
3. On the Now playing screen, press
Set as ringtone) .
/1
2. Browse for the song that you want to set as a ringtone and then play it back.
Checking if the song was added as a ringtone
, and then tap Settings.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
11
4. In the Set as ringtone options menu, tap Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone. If
you select Contact ringtone, you need to choose the contacts you want to
associate the song with in the next screen.
2. On the Settings screen, tap Sound > Phone ringtone.
The song should be in the ringtone list and selected.
tia
Sharing music using Bluetooth
You can choose a song from the Music app’s library and send it to someone’s device
or your computer using Bluetooth.
2. Tap
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Music.
to go to the library.
fid
3. In the library, choose the song that you want to send via Bluetooth and then
play it back.
and then tap Share (or More > Share).
on
4. On the Now playing screen, press
5. Tap Bluetooth.
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer and
connect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the music can be sent.
TC
Finding music videos on YouTube
You can find music videos of the song you’re listening to on YouTube. It’s simple. On
the Now playing screen, just press
and then tap Find videos.
93
Android Market and other apps
/1
Android Market and other
apps
11
09
Finding and installing apps from Android
Market
20
Android Market is the place to go to find new apps for HTC Explorer. Choose from a
wide variety of free and paid apps ranging from productivity apps, entertainment, to
games.
A Google Checkout™ payment method is required to purchase a paid app. You will
be asked to confirm method of payment when you purchase an app.
Finding and installing an app
en
tia
When you install apps and use them on HTC Explorer, they may require access to
your personal information or access to certain functions or settings. Download and
install only apps that you trust.
fid
Be cautious when downloading apps that have access to functions or a significant
amount of your data on HTC Explorer. You’re responsible for the results of using
downloaded apps.
You need a Google Checkout™ account to purchase items on Android Market.
on
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Market.
TC
2. Do any of the following to find an app:
Browse featured
apps
Scroll through the list of featured apps.
Browse apps by
categories
Tap Apps or Games, and then tap a category. Under a
category, you can filter the apps by Top paid, Top free
or Just in.
Search for an app
Press
, enter the name or type of app you’re looking
for, and then tap
3. When you find the app that you like, tap it and read its description and user
reviews.
94
Android Market and other apps
4. To download or purchase the app, tap FREE (for free apps) or the price button
under Buy (for paid apps).
5. Tap OK to accept the permissions for the app and begin downloading and
installing the app.
09
/1
You can uninstall an app for a refund within a limited time after your purchase. To
know more about the refund policy for paid apps, please visit the Android Market
Help site (http://market.android.com/support).
Opening an installed app
§ If you see this icon
tap the app.
11
Do one of the following:
on the status bar, open the Notifications panel, and then
§ From the Home screen, tap
tab, and then tap the app.
. On the All apps screen, slide to the Downloaded
tia
Uninstalling an app
and then tap My apps. On the
20
§ From the Home screen, tap
> Market. Press
My apps screen, tap the app, and then tap Open.
You can uninstall any app that you have downloaded and installed from Android
Market.
2. Press
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Market.
and then tap My apps.
fid
3. Tap the app you want to uninstall, and then tap Uninstall.
4. When asked, tap OK.
on
5. Choose the reason for removing the app, and then tap OK.
Getting help
TC
If you need help or have questions about Android Market, press
, and then tap
Help. The web browser will take you to the Android Market Help site.
95
Android Market and other apps
Using the Clock
About the HTC Clock widget
09
/1
Use the HTC Clock widget to see your current date, time, and location. You can also
use the Clock to show the time in another city.
11
Changing the location on the Clock widget
20
By default, the Clock widget on the Home screen displays your current weather. You
can customize the Clock widget on your Home screen to show the weather of another
location.
1. Press and hold the clock on the Home screen, and then drag it to the
2. Tap the clock to change its settings.
button.
3. Choose a city.
tia
If you don't see the city that you want, tap
en
4. Tap Done.
to search for it and add it.
Using the Clock app
fid
Get more from the Clock app than just the regular date and time. Use HTC Explorer as
a desk clock complete with weather information or as a world clock so you can see
what time it is in several cities across the globe. You can also use it as an alarm clock,
stopwatch, and countdown timer.
on
To open the Clock app, do one of the following:
§ Tap the Clock widget on the Home screen.
§ From the Home screen, tap
and then tap Clock.
TC
Tap the tabs on the bottom row or slide your finger across the tabs to switch
between the different functions of the Clock app.
Using Desk Clock
The Desk Clock displays the current date, time, and weather. It also shows an alarm
clock indicator.
Tap the weather image or information to open the Weather app where you can see
weather forecasts for the next few days.
Using World Clock
Use the Clock app's World Clock tab to check the current time in several places
around the globe. You can also set your home city, add more cities to the world clock
list, and manually set your time zone, date, and time.
96
Android Market and other apps
Setting your home city
1. On the World Clock tab, press
and then tap Home settings.
2. Enter your home city’s name. As you enter letters, the list is filtered to show
matching cities and countries.
/1
3. Scroll through the list and tap your home city.
Setting the time zone, date, and time
09
To set the time zone, date, and time on HTC Explorer manually, you need to turn off
auto time sync first.
and then tap Local time settings.
11
1. On the World Clock tab, press
20
2. Clear the Automatic check box, and then set the time zone, date, and time as
required.
From the Home screen, you can also press
to open the Date & time settings screen.
and then tap Settings > Date & time
Adding a city to the World Clock screen
tia
Add more cities to the World Clock screen so you can instantly check the date and
time in these cities.
en
1. On the World Clock tab, tap
2. Enter the city name you want to add. As you enter letters, the list is filtered to
show matching cities and countries.
fid
3. Scroll through the matching list and tap the city that you want to add.
on
Setting an alarm
You can use the Clock app's Alarms tab to set up one or more wake-up alarms.
1. On the Alarms tab, select the check box of an alarm and then tap that alarm.
TC
2. Under Set alarm, drag your finger up or down to roll the time scroll wheels and
set the alarm time.
97
Android Market and other apps
3. Choose from the available options. You can:
§ Enter the alarm Description and choose the Alarm sound to use.
§ Tap Repeat. Select which days of the week to sound the alarm, and then
tap OK.
§ Select the Vibrate check box if you want HTC Explorer to also vibrate when
the alarm goes off.
Deleting an alarm
1. On the Alarms tab, press
11
§ If you need to set more than three alarms, tap
09
§ To turn off an alarm, clear the check box of that alarm.
/1
4. After you've finished setting the alarm, tap Done.
and then tap Delete.
20
2. Select the alarms you want to delete and then tap Delete.
Changing alarm sound settings
and then tap Settings. You can change the following
Selected by default, this option allows the alarm to sound even
when the volume is set to silent. Clear this check box if you want to
silence the alarm when HTC Explorer is in silent mode.
Alarm volume
Set the volume level that you want for the alarm.
Snooze
duration
Set how long to snooze between alarms.
fid
on
TC
en
Alarm in silent
mode
Side button
behavior
tia
On the Alarms tab, press
settings:
Choose what happens to the alarm when pressing the side button
(VOLUME UP/VOLUME DOWN). You can set the button to snooze,
dismiss the alarm, or disable the button. The side button works only
when the screen is not locked.
98
Android Market and other apps
Checking Weather
/1
Use the Weather app and widget to check the current weather and weather forecasts
for the next few days. In addition to your current location, you can view weather
forecasts for other cities around the globe. Your settings in the Weather app also
control the weather information that is shown in the Clock and Calendar.
09
For HTC Explorer to detect your current location and display your local weather in
the Weather app and widget as well as in Clock and Calendar:
§ You need to connect to the Internet.
> Weather.
20
1. From the Home screen, tap
11
§ Location services must be enabled. If you didn't enable it when you first set up
HTC Explorer, you can do so in Settings > Location.
2. Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in other cities.
3. While viewing forecasts, you can:
tia
§ Tap
§ Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in other
cities.
to update the weather information at any time.
en
Adding a city to the Weather screen
fid
Add more cities to the Weather screen so you can instantly check the weather
forecasts in these cities. In addition to your current location, the Weather screen can
display up to fifteen cities.
1. On the Weather screen, tap
. Or press
and then tap Add.
on
2. Enter the location you want to add. As you type, the list is filtered to show the
possible locations based on the letters you entered.
3. Tap the desired city to select it.
TC
Changing the order of cities on the Weather screen
1. On the Weather screen, press
and then tap Rearrange.
2. Press and hold
at the end of the item you want to move. When the row is
highlighted, drag it to its new position, then release.
3. Tap Done.
Deleting cities from the Weather screen
1. On the Weather screen, press
and then tap Delete.
2. Select the cities you want to remove and then tap Delete.
99
Android Market and other apps
Changing Weather options
1. On the Weather screen, press
and then tap Settings.
2. You can change the following weather settings:
/1
Update when opened Select this check box to refresh weather updates every
time you open the Weather app.
09
Update automatically Select this check box to automatically download
weather updates.
Set an auto update schedule.
Temperature scale
Choose whether to display the temperature in Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
Sound effects
Choose whether to play sound effects related to the
weather conditions.
20
11
Update schedule
About the Weather widget
tia
Use the Weather widget to instantly check weather forecasts of your current location
and other cities without having to open the Weather app. The Weather widget comes
in different looks and styles.
en
You can add this widget to the Home screen, if it’s not yet added.
Watching videos on YouTube
fid
Use the YouTube app to check out what’s popular on the online video-sharing
website.
> YouTube.
on
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Scroll through the list of videos, and then tap a video to watch it.
3. While watching a video, you can:
TC
§ Turn HTC Explorer sideways or double-tap the screen to watch the video in
full screen.
§ Tap the video screen to pause, resume playback, or drag the slider to jump
to a different part of the video.
§ Tap a tab to learn more about the video, see related videos, or check out
what other viewers think. You can also slide your finger across the tabs to
see if there are more items available.
§ Tap the thumbs-up or thumbs-down icon to add your video rating. Tap
More to see other options.
4. Press
, and then tap Home to return to the YouTube main screen.
100
Android Market and other apps
Searching for videos
1. On the YouTube main screen, tap
2. Enter a search keyword, and then tap
3. Scroll through the results and tap a video to watch it.
09
/1
You also have the option to show results that were just recently posted. Tap All
time, and then select a time period you want.
Clearing the search history
, and then tap Settings.
11
1. On the YouTube main screen, press
2. Tap Clear search history, and then tap OK when prompted.
20
Sharing a video link
1. On the video’s watch screen, tap More > Share.
2. Choose how you want to share the video link from the available options.
tia
Capturing and sharing videos on YouTube
1. From the Home screen, tap
> YouTube.
en
Or if YouTube is already open, return to its main screen.
3. Tap
to start capturing video.
fid
2. Tap
4. When you're finished capturing, tap
again, and then tap Done.
5. Enter a title for your video.
on
6. Tap More details to select the YouTube account you want to use, add a
description, set the privacy level, and add tags or location information to your
video.
TC
7. Tap Upload.
Listening to FM Radio
Tune in and listen to your favorite radio stations using the FM Radio app.
You need to connect a headset first to the audio jack of HTC Explorer to use FM
Radio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.
From the Home screen, tap
> FM Radio.
The first time you open FM Radio, it automatically scans for available FM stations,
saves them as presets, and plays the first FM station found.
101
Android Market and other apps
Tuning in to an FM station
There are several things you can do while you’re on the FM Radio screen:
§ Tap
to view the All presets list, and then select a station you want to listen to.
to go to the next
§ Tap
to go to the previous available FM station, or
available FM station.
§ Tap
to fine tune the radio
09
§ Tap
to fine tune the radio frequency by -0.1 MHz or
frequency by +0.1 MHz.
/1
§ Drag the slider to tune in to a frequency on the FM band.
to add a preset name for the current station you are tuned into.
§ Press the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons to adjust the volume.
, and then tap Scan &
11
§ To repeat scanning and saving of FM stations, press
Save.
20
§ Press
to mute the sound or to change the sound output to Mono or Stereo.
You can also switch the sound output between the Speaker and Headset.
Closing or turning off FM Radio
To
tia
You can continue listening to the radio while using other apps on HTC Explorer or
close the FM Radio app completely.
Do this
Press
. FM Radio continues to run in the
background.
en
To close the FM Radio
screen
fid
To go back to the FM Radio screen, slide open the
Notifications panel, and then tap FM Radio.
Tap
on the FM Radio screen.
on
To turn off completely and
close FM Radio
Recording your voice
TC
Don’t just think out loud. Use Voice Recorder to quickly capture your thoughts. You
can also record your voice and set it as a ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Voice Recorder.
2. Hold the microphone near your mouth.
3. Tap
to start recording a voice clip.
Voice Recorder can run on the background while you do other things on
HTC Explorer, except when you open other apps that also use audio functions. To
go back to the Voice Recorder screen, slide open the Notifications panel, and then
tap Voice Recorder.
4. Tap
to stop recording.
5. Type a name for the voice clip and tap Save.
102
Android Market and other apps
6. To play back the voice clip, tap
7. To show options for sharing, deleting, or renaming the voice clip, press
1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
/1
2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to share, and then tap Share.
Sharing a voice clip
09
3. From the available options, choose how you want to share the voice clip.
1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
11
Setting a voice clip as a ringtone
20
2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to set as a ringtone, and then tap Set as
ringtone.
Sharing games and apps
tia
Having fun with a game or app that you found from Android Market? Share your
favorite games and apps instantly with your circle of friends.
en
For your friends to link to the app and download it from Android Market, they must
be using an Android device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
fid
2. Press
, and then tap Share. You’ll then see the list of games and apps that
you downloaded and installed from Android Market.
on
3. Tap an app, and then choose how to share it.
TC
When your friends see the link in your sent message, email, or status update, they can
simply tap the link to go directly to the game or app in Android Market to download it.
103
Messages
Messages
/1
Opening Messages
09
Keep in touch with important people in your life. Use the Messages app to compose
and send text (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS).
11
From the Home screen, tap
> Messages. The All messages screen opens, where all
your sent and received messages are neatly grouped into conversations, by contact
name or phone number.
20
§ Scroll up or down the list of conversations by
swiping your finger on the screen.
fid
en
tia
§ Tap a contact name or number to view the exchange
of messages.
on
You can also view your messages on the Home screen with the Messages widget.
Sending a text message (SMS)
TC
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap
> Messages.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
§ Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobile
number. As you type, matching names with phone numbers from your
stored contacts are displayed. Tap a name or one of the contact’s numbers.
§ Tap
, and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom you
want to send the message. You can also select contact groups as
recipients.
§ Enter the complete phone numbers directly in the To field.
104
Messages
11
09
/1
4. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.
20
§ There is a limit on the number of characters for a single text message (displayed
above the Send button). If you exceed the limit, your text message will be
delivered as one but will be billed as more than one message.
to save the message as a draft.
en
5. Tap Send, or press
tia
§ Your text message automatically becomes a multimedia message if you enter an
email address as the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item, or compose
a very long message.
fid
Sending a multimedia message (MMS)
1. From the Home screen, tap
on
2. Tap
> Messages.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
TC
§ Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobile
number. As you type, matching names with phone numbers and email
addresses from your stored contacts are displayed. Tap a contact’s number
or email address.
§ Tap
, and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom you
want to send the message. You can also select contact groups as
recipients.
§ Enter the complete phone numbers or email address directly in the To field.
4. To add a subject line, press
and then tap Add subject.
5. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.
Messages
6. Tap
and then choose the type of attachment.
Picture
Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.
Video
Record a video and attach it, or attach an existing
video.
Audio
Make a voice recording and attach it, or attach an
existing audio file.
/1
105
09
App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Market
that you want to share with others. The URL from
which the app can be downloaded will be inserted to
your message.
Add your current location (requires GPS to be turned
on), or a location you pick on a map to your message.
Contact (vCard)
Select a contact, and then select the information to
attach.
Appointment
(vCalendar)
Select the calendar event you want to attach.
20
11
Location
to save the message as a draft.
en
7. Tap Send, or press
to see options for replacing, viewing or
tia
After adding an attachment, tap
removing your attachment.
fid
Why isn't the contact's email address showing up when I enter a
contact name?
on
If only phone numbers are showing up when you're entering a contact name,
go to the Messages settings to enable displaying email addresses.
1. If you've created a new message, press
messages screen.
2. Press
first to return to the All
and then tap Settings > General.
TC
3. Select the Show email address check box.
Creating a slideshow
1. After you've added either a photo, video, or audio in the multimedia message
you’re composing, tap
> Slideshow.
2. Choose where you want to insert the next slide.
106
Messages
3. Right after adding a slide, do any of the following:
Tap
video.
, and then choose to add a photo or a
Add music or a voice
recording to a slide
Tap
> Audio.
Add a caption to a slide
Tap Add text and then enter your caption.
Edit a slide
Tap
, and then choose to replace, remove, or
set the duration of the slide.
Preview the slideshow
Press
, and then tap Preview (or More >
Preview). Tap once on the preview screen to
see playback controls.
to save the message as a draft.
20
4. When finished, tap Send, or press
11
09
/1
Add a photo or video to a
slide
Resuming a draft message
, and then tap Drafts.
tia
1. On the All messages screen, press
2. Tap the message and then resume editing it.
en
3. Tap Send.
fid
Viewing and replying to a message
TC
on
Depending on your notification settings, HTC Explorer plays a sound, vibrates, or
displays the message briefly in the status bar when you receive a new message. A
new message icon
is also displayed in the status bar.
1. To open and read the message, you can:
§ Press and hold the status bar, and then slide your finger down to open the
Notifications panel. Then tap the new message notification.
§ Go to the Messages app and open the message.
2. While reading the message, you can reply with a text or multimedia message.
You can also do the following while reading the message:
§ Call the phone number contained in the message by tapping the number.
§ Tap the email address contained in the message to send an email.
107
Messages
§ Tap a link in the message to open it in the web browser.
§ Tap the message to open the options menu and choose what you want to do
with the message (such as forward, share, and more).
Adjusting the font size of your messages
, and then tap More > Text size.
11
Replying to another phone number of the contact
09
You can also press
/1
While reading a message conversation with a contact, spread out two fingers on the
screen to zoom in and make the text size bigger. Pinch the screen to zoom out.
fid
en
tia
20
When a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on HTC Explorer, you’ll see the
particular phone number used below the contact's name.
on
Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the phone number of the latest
message you’ve received from this contact.
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
TC
2. Tap
, and then select another phone number of this contact.
3. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your reply message.
4. Tap Send.
Forwarding a message
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to view the
exchange of messages with that contact.
2. Tap the message you want to forward, and then tap Forward.
108
Messages
3. In the To field, fill in one or more recipients.
4. Tap Send.
/1
While viewing the exchange of messages with the contact, you can also press
tap Forward (or More > Forward), and then tap the message you want to forward.
09
Viewing and saving an attachment from a
multimedia message
11
If you are concerned about the size of your data downloads, check the multimedia
message size first before you download it.
20
When Auto-retrieve in MMS settings is disabled, only the message header is
downloaded. To download the entire message, tap the Download button at the
right side of the message.
§ If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or video in a received message,
tap it to view the content.
tia
§ If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it to view the contact information,
then tap Save to add to your contacts.
en
§ If the attachment is an appointment or event (vCalendar), tap it to choose the
calendar where to save it, and then tap Import.
fid
§ To save the attachment to your storage card, press and hold the multimedia
message, and then choose to save the type of attachment from the options
menu.
on
Push messages
Push messages contain a web link. Often, the link will be to download a file that you
have requested from a service provider.
TC
When you receive a push message, a notification icon
bar.
is displayed in the status
Opening and reading a new push message
1. Press and hold the status bar, and then slide the status bar down to open the
Notifications panel.
2. Tap the new message.
3. Tap Visit website.
109
Messages
Viewing all your push messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
, and then tap Push messages.
Protecting a message from deletion
11
Managing message conversations
09
/1
You can only see this option if you've previously received push messages.
2. Press
> Messages.
20
You can lock a message so that it will not be deleted even if you delete the other
messages in the conversation.
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
2. Tap the message that you want to lock.
is displayed at the right
tia
3. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock icon
hand side of the message.
en
Copying a text message to your SIM card
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
fid
2. Tap the message, and then tap Copy to SIM. A SIM card icon
the right hand side of the message.
is displayed at
on
Deleting a single message
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
TC
2. Tap the message that you want to delete.
3. If the message is locked, tap Unlock message on the options menu, and then tap
the message to display the options menu again.
4. Tap Delete message on the options menu.
5. When prompted to confirm, tap OK.
Deleting several messages within a conversation
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display the
exchange of messages with that contact.
2. Press
and then tap Delete (or More > Delete).
110
Messages
3. Tap Delete by selection.
You can also tap Delete by phone number if the contact used multiple phone
numbers throughout the conversation and you want to delete the messages sent
from a particular number.
/1
4. Select the messages you want to delete and then tap Delete.
09
In the settings, you can set the Messages app to auto delete old messages per
conversation.
11
Deleting a conversation
1. Do any of the following:
§ On the All messages screen, press and hold a contact (or phone number)
whose messages you want to delete, and then tap Delete
20
§ While looking at the exchange of messages in a conversation, press
then tap Delete > Delete thread (or More > Delete > Delete thread).
and
Any locked messages in the conversation thread will not be deleted unless
you select the Delete locked messages check box.
tia
2. When prompted to confirm, tap OK to delete the entire thread.
en
Deleting several conversations
1. On the All messages screen, press
and then tap Delete.
2. Select the conversation threads you want to delete.
fid
3. Tap Delete. Any locked messages will not be deleted.
on
Backing up your text messages to the storage
card
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. Press
> Messages.
, and then tap Backup SMS > Backup SMS.
3. Enter a name for your backup file, and then tap OK.
Importing text messages from the storage card
You can only import text messages that were exported to the storage card using the
Backup SMS feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
, and then tap Backup SMS > Restore from backup.
3. Tap the backup file to import.
4. Tap OK.
> Messages.
111
Messages
Setting message options
§ Receive a notification in the status bar and set HTC Explorer to
vibrate or play a sound when a message arrives or when a message
is not sent successfully, and choose a notification sound.
/1
Notifications
and then tap Settings.
On the All messages screen, press
09
§ Allow HTC Explorer to show pop-up notifications on the screen
when messages are sent successfully or not, or disable this option.
§ Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.
20
Text
messages
(SMS)
11
§ If you don't want the content of received text messages to appear
on the lock screen and status bar, clear the Notification preview
check box.
§ View or change the message service center number used. (We
recommend that you don't change the number here as it may cause
problems in receiving and sending messages.)
§ Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.
§ Receive a report whether each recipient has read the message or
deleted it without reading.
en
Multimedia
messages
(MMS)
tia
§ View or delete text messages stored on your SIM card, or copy SIM
card messages to device memory.
on
fid
§ Automatically download complete MMS messages including the
message body and attachments in your service area and when
roaming.
TC
General
§ Set the message priority and maximum file size of MMS messages.
If the MMS message file size is exceeded, the message won't be
sent.
§ Search and display the sent message history, call history, and email
addresses of stored contacts when you’re adding message
recipients.
§ Set the number of lines of text to preview for each message on the
All messages screen.
§ Choose the maximum number of text or MMS messages to store in
each conversation thread (excluding locked messages), and enable
automatic deletion of unlocked older messages when set limits are
reached.
§ Forward received text and MMS messages to another phone
number or email address. (This may incur extra fees.)
§ Add a signature to your messages.
112
Email
Email
/1
Gmail
09
Using Gmail
11
When you first set up HTC Explorer, make sure you sign into your Google Account to
use Gmail. If you didn’t do so, go to the Accounts & sync setting to sign in.
You can also set up more than one Google Account on HTC Explorer, and then switch
between accounts in Gmail.
20
Viewing your Gmail Inbox
All your received emails are delivered to your Inbox.
> Gmail. Your Gmail inbox then opens.
From the Home screen, tap
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Archive, delete or
label multiple
conversations
Tap
before the email or
conversation. Then tap the
onscreen buttons at the bottom
to choose what to do with the
selected messages or
conversations.
Display drafts, sent Tap Inbox at the top left of the
messages, and
screen, and then tap another label
other labels
(such as Sent, Drafts, or your
created label) to view its
messages and conversations.
Switch to your
other Gmail
account
Tap the current account at the
top right of the screen, and then
tap another account you want to
switch to.
Refresh the Inbox
Press
, and then tap Refresh.
Sending a new message
1. In the Gmail inbox, press
and then tap Compose.
2. If you’ve set up multiple Google Accounts on HTC Explorer, choose which Gmail
address you want to use for sending your email. Tap the box that shows your
current Gmail address, and then tap another address that you want to use for
sending.
113
Email
3. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field. If you are sending
the email to several recipients, separate the email addresses with a comma.
If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email to
other recipients, press
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc.
and then tap Attach.
7. After composing your message, tap
to save it as a draft. Or press
to discard
11
While composing the message, tap
the message.
09
6. Locate and then tap the picture you want to attach.
/1
5. If you want to attach a picture, press
4. Enter the email subject, and then compose your email.
20
Replying to or forwarding an email message
. Or, tap
3. Do one of the following:
and choose whether to Reply all or
tia
2. To reply to the sender, tap
Forward.
1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or conversation.
§ If you selected Reply or Reply all, enter your reply message.
en
§ If you selected Forward, specify the message recipients.
fid
Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new message with the received
email. But this removes any attachments or formatting in the original email.
4. Tap
on
Getting help
To find out more about using Gmail, press
, and then tap More > Help. The web
browser will take you to the Google Mobile Help site.
TC
Mail
About the Mail app
Use the Mail app to add your webmail and other POP3 or IMAP email accounts. You
can also set up and use your Exchange ActiveSync email on HTC Explorer.
You can add the Mail widget to view your POP3/IMAP or Exchange ActiveSync
emails on the Home screen.
114
Email
Adding a POP3/IMAP email account
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
2. Do one of the following:
§ If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap Other (POP3/
IMAP) on the Choose a mail provider screen.
09
/1
§ If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press
, and then tap
More > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tap
Other (POP3/IMAP).
11
3. Enter the email address and password for your email account and then tap
Next.
4. If the account type you want to set up is not in the internal database, you’ll be
asked to enter more details.
20
5. Enter the account name and your name and then tap Finish setup.
Adding a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
tia
You can add one or more Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.
You can sync with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack (SP2) or later.
You can add up to 15 Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.
en
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
2. Do one of the following:
fid
§ If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync on the Choose a mail provider screen.
on
§ If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press
, and then tap
More > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tap
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
TC
3. Enter the Exchange ActiveSync account details, and then tap Next. If your
corporate Exchange Server does not support auto-detect, you’ll need to enter
your Exchange Server settings after you tap Next. Ask your Exchange Server
administrator for details.
4. Choose the types of information you want to sync. Also choose how often you
want to update and sync email to HTC Explorer, then tap Next.
5. Enter the account name, then tap Finish setup.
115
Email
Checking your Mail inbox
When you open the Mail app, it displays the inbox of one of your email accounts that
you’ve set up on HTC Explorer.
20
11
09
/1
To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows the current email account,
and then tap another account.
tia
Viewing the unified inbox of all your email accounts
en
You can view email messages from all your accounts just in one place without having
to switch to different accounts.
fid
Just tap the bar that shows the current email account, and then tap All accounts.
Email messages are color coded so you can easily distinguish which email accounts
they belong to.
on
Up to 15 email accounts can be shown in the unified inbox.
Switching between different views of your inbox
TC
If you have lots of email messages, it may take you some time to browse through the
long list and find a single email or related email messages. Use the tabs of the Mail app
to sort your emails into different categories.
To skim through your email messages easier, tap one of the following tabs to change
the view of your inbox:
Inbox
Displays email messages as individual items.
Thread
Displays email messages as conversations, grouped according to the subject
line. Tap a subject in the list to show the email conversation.
116
Email
Group
Displays all email messages from a contact group. To choose which contact
group to display, press
, tap View, and then select a group.
Unread
Displays unread messages.
/1
Marked (Exchange ActiveSync only)
09
Displays all flagged messages.
Invites or Meeting invitations (Exchange ActiveSync only)
Attachments
20
Displays all messages that have attachments.
11
Displays meeting invitations which you have not yet accepted or declined.
tia
Refreshing an email account
Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen to
show the other tabs. You can tap and hold a tab, and then drag it to where you
want it.
en
Whatever your automatic synchronization settings are, you can also synchronize your
sent and received emails manually at any time.
§ While in the account you want to synchronize, press
, and then tap Refresh.
fid
§ If you have several email accounts, you can refresh them all at the same time.
Go to the All accounts inbox first. Then press
and tap Refresh.
Sorting email messages
on
You can sort email messages by date received, priority, subject, sender, or size.
On the inbox, press
, tap Sort, and select from the sorting options.
TC
Quickly browsing your inbox
If you have a long list of email messages in your inbox, it may not be easy to browse
the list and find an email that you want. You can quickly browse through your inbox
by using finger gestures.
1. Choose a sorting order for displaying your email messages.
2. Press and hold two fingers on any email message, and then drag upward or
downward without lifting your fingers. Your screen then jumps to the set of
email messages based on your chosen sorting order.
117
Email
Managing email messages
Deleting an email message
1. On the inbox, press and hold the message you want to delete.
2. On the options menu, tap Delete.
/1
Selecting several email messages
09
1. Tap the check boxes of email messages to select them.
11
2. Choose what you want to do with the selected messages: Mark read (or mark
Mark unread), Delete, or Move to another folder.
You cannot move email messages when you’re in the unified (All accounts) inbox.
20
Moving several email messages to another folder
1. Switch to the email account you want to use.
2. Tap the check boxes of email messages you want to move.
tia
3. Tap Move to, and then tap the folder where to move the email messages.
Moving an email message after reading
en
1. While viewing the email, tap Move to.
2. Tap the folder where you want to move the email message.
fid
Deleting all messages
1. First tap the check box of any email message.
on
2. Press
, and then tap Select all.
3. Tap Delete.
Switching to other mail folders
1. Press
, and then tap Folders.
TC
2. Tap the mail folder whose messages you want to view.
Sending an email message
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
2. Switch to the email account that you want to use for sending email.
3. On the email account inbox, tap
118
Email
4. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
§ Enter email addresses directly in the To field, separating them with a
comma. As you enter email addresses, any matching addresses from your
contacts list are displayed. Tap a match to enter that address directly.
/1
§ Tap the
icon, and then choose the contacts to whom you want to send
the message. You can also select contact groups as recipients, or search
and add contacts.
09
If the contact name you entered is not found and you have an Exchange
ActiveSync account in the Mail app, you can search for the contact in your
company directory.
11
If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email to
other recipients, press
, and then tap Show Cc/Bcc.
5. Enter the subject, and then compose your message.
, tap Attach, and choose from the following
20
6. To add an attachment, press
options:
Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.
Video
Record a video and attach it, or attach an existing
video.
tia
Picture
Audio
Attach an audio file.
fid
en
App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Market
that you want to tell other people about. The URL from
which the app can be downloaded will be inserted in
your email.
TC
on
Location
You can attach location information. Send your current
location (requires GPS to be turned on) or a location
you pick on a map.
Document
Attach a PDF file or an Office document such as a text
file or a spreadsheet.
Contact (vCard)
Attach someone’s contact information.
Appointment
(vCalendar)
Attach a calendar event.
File
Attach any other file.
7. Tap Send to send the message immediately, or tap Save as draft to send it later.
If there’s no Internet connection available or Airplane mode is on when you send
your email, the email will be saved to the Outbox folder. Once there’s Internet
connection available, the saved email will be sent automatically next time
HTC Explorer syncs.
119
Email
Resuming a draft email message
1. In the email account inbox, press
, and then tap Folders > Drafts.
2. Tap the message.
3. When you finish editing the message, tap Send.
/1
Managing the recipient list
11
You must have entered contacts in the To, Cc, or Bcc field.
09
Filled up the To field but want to make changes in it? You can manage the recipient
list and change who appears in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields.
20
1. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, tap the Edit button. The names of the contacts are
listed.
2. Tap the checkbox beside the contact that you want to move to another field.
3. Tap the action that apply.
to go back to composing your
tia
4. When you are done with the changes, press
email.
en
Reading and replying to an email message
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Mail.
fid
2. Switch to the email account you want to use.
3. On the email account inbox, tap the email you want to read.
on
4. Choose an action on the bottom of the screen for your email.
TC
Press
to see options for deleting your email or marking it as unread.
Where are my unread emails?
The Unread tab contains all your unread emails. Add it if it does not appear on
your screen.
1. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the area
where you can rearrange icons, lift your finger.
2. Press and hold the Unread tab, and then drag it to its new position.
3. Press
, and then tap the Unread tab.
120
Email
Setting the priority for an email message
You can set the priority for an email message that you send.
1. While composing the message, press
2. Tap Set priority.
/1
3. Select the priority for the message.
09
If you selected High or Low priority, the priority appears below the subject line of the
message.
11
Searching and filtering emails
Search emails in all your email accounts or in a specific one. You can even refine your
search by indicating which part of the email will be searched.
20
1. Press
2. If you want to refine or filter your search, tap
and then check the options
that apply. For example, you can focus the search on a part of an email or filter
emails that have attachments or tagged as high priority.
tia
3. Tap OK.
4. Enter the first few characters of the item you're looking for in the search box.
Results will then be listed.
en
Tap a result to open the email.
Searching emails from a contact
fid
Do you remember the sender, but can't find a particular email from this contact? You
can search your mail accounts for emails from a specific contact.
on
1. Switch to the email account you want to use.
2. Press and hold an email from a contact.
3. Tap Search the mail from the sender. A list of emails from that contact appears.
TC
Working with Exchange ActiveSync email
You can read, reply, send, and manage your work email in the same easy way as with
a POP3/IMAP account. In addition, you can also use some powerful Exchange
features.
Flagging an email
§ While viewing the inbox, tap the white flag icon
that appears on the right of
an email message. The icon turns red
after you flagged the email.
§ While reading an email, you can also tap the flag icon in the email.
121
Email
Setting your Out of the office status
1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.
2. Press
and then tap More > Out of the office.
3. Tap the box, and then select Out of the office.
/1
4. Set the dates and times for the period when you will be out of the office.
09
5. Enter the auto-reply message.
11
You can also send auto-reply messages to external recipients, which are contacts
whose addresses are not in the same Microsoft Exchange server.
6. Tap Save.
Sending a meeting request
20
1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.
2. Go to the Invitations tab, and then tap
3. Enter the meeting details.
tia
4. Tap Save.
en
Changing email account settings
1. Switch to the email account whose settings you want to change.
2. Press
, and then tap More > Settings.
fid
3. Select from the following:
TC
on
Account settings
Change the email account settings such as the name,
email address, password, and description.
General settings
Set the font size when reading emails, enable, disable or
set the signature, set the account as the default email
account, and set where to save email attachments.
Send & Receive
Set the sync settings for incoming and outgoing emails
such as maximum size limit, update schedule, and more.
Notification
settings
Set email notification settings.
Delete account
Tap to delete the email account.
4. Press
to save your changes.
Deleting an email account
1. Switch to the email account you want to delete.
2. Press
, and then tap More > Settings > Delete account.
122
Calendar
Calendar
/1
About Calendar
09
Never miss an important date again. Use the Calendar app to schedule your events,
meetings, and appointments.
11
You can set up HTC Explorer to stay in sync with the following types of calendars:
§ On HTC Explorer, sign in to your Google Account so you can sync the Calendar
app with your Google Calendar online. You can add multiple Google Accounts.
20
§ If you're using Microsoft Outlook on your computer, you can set up HTC Sync
on your computer to sync Outlook Calendar with the Calendar app.
§ If you have a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account and you've added it on
HTC Explorer, you can sync the Calendar app with your Exchange ActiveSync
calendar events.
en
tia
If you've signed in to Facebook, birthdays and events of friends will appear in
Calendar.
Creating an event
fid
You can create events that sync with your Google or Exchange ActiveSync calendars,
as well as events on HTC Explorer.
on
Not signed in yet on your accounts? Your calendar events will be created under PC
Sync, which you can later sync with your computer's Outlook Calendar through
HTC Sync.
1. From the Home screen, tap
TC
2. On any Calendar view, tap
> Calendar.
3. If you have more than one calendar, select a calendar in which to add the event.
4. If you want to invite people to your event, tap
your contacts or company directory.
and choose attendees from
5. Enter a name for the event.
6. To specify the date and time of the event, do one of the following:
§ If there is a time frame for the event, tap the From and To date and time to
set them.
§ If it is a whole-day event, such as a birthday, set the From and To date, then
select the All day check box.
7. Enter the event location and description.
123
Calendar
8. Set the reminder time.
You can add another reminder time in a Google Calendar event. Press
tap Add reminder.
and then
9. If the event occurs on a regular basis, tap the Repetition box and then choose
how often the event occurs.
09
/1
10. Tap Save.
Changing Calendar views
11
Easily switch between different calendar views by tapping the onscreen buttons.
Day view
20
Week view
tia
Agenda view
Month view
en
Meeting invitations
fid
§ In Day, Week, and Agenda views, events are color coded to indicate which
account or type of calendar they belong to. To find out what each color
represents, tap
on
§ Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen to
show the other tabs. You can press and hold a tab, and then drag it to where you
want it.
Using month view
In month view, you will see markers on days that have events.
TC
Do any of the following in month view:
§ Tap a day to view the events for that day.
§ Press and hold a day to open an options menu from which you can also choose
to create an event or switch to either day or agenda view.
§ Slide your finger up or down the screen to view earlier or later months.
124
Calendar
Using day and agenda views
Day view shows your events per day, whereas agenda view displays all your events in
chronological order.
When in day view:
/1
§ Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later days.
§ Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.
Using week view
11
Week view displays a chart of the events of one week.
09
§ You can also see the day's weather, but only if it's within the five-day forecast.
When in week view, you can:
§ Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.
20
§ Tap an event (shown as colored blocks) to view its details.
§ Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later weeks.
Viewing an event
tia
Managing Calendar events
en
You can view your own events as well as events that other people have shared with
you.
fid
1. In day view or agenda view, tap an event. The Event details screen then opens
and shows the summary of the event.
2. Depending on the event information, do any of the following:
on
§ Find the event’s location in Maps.
§ Call any phone number included in the event location or description.
§ Check the participants of the event.
TC
§ If the event was sent as a meeting invitation, respond to the invitation.
§ If it’s an Exchange ActiveSync calendar event, reply by email to the
organizer or to all the guests. Press
, and then tap Reply or Reply all (or
More > Reply or Reply all).
§ Select any text and look it up on the Web.
§ Tap the reminder time to change it. Press
You can return to the current date by tapping
to save changes.
125
Calendar
Editing an event
You can edit events that you have created.
1. While viewing an event, tap
2. Make your changes to the event.
/1
3. When you’re done editing, tap Save.
09
Deleting an event
Do any of the following:
and
11
§ While viewing the summary of an event on the Event details screen, press
then tap Delete event.
§ In day, agenda or week view, press and hold an event and then tap Delete event.
§ When editing an event, tap Delete.
20
If the event repeats, you’ll be asked whether you want to delete just that occurrence
or all occurrences from Calendar.
Sharing an event (vCalendar)
tia
You can share a calendar event as a vCalendar using Bluetooth or by sending it as a
file attachment with your email or message.
, and then tap Forward.
en
1. While viewing an event, press
2. Do one of the following:
fid
§ Tap Bluetooth. You’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer and
connect to the receiving Bluetooth device.
on
§ Tap Mail. A new message window opens and automatically includes the
vCalendar as an attachment. Your default email account will be used to
send the message.
§ Tap Message. A new message window opens and automatically includes
the vCalendar as a multimedia attachment.
TC
Accepting or declining a meeting invitation
1. If you're using an Exchange ActiveSync account on HTC Explorer, tap the
Invites tab in Calendar to see meeting invitations which you have not yet
accepted or declined.
2. Tap a meeting invitation, and then do one of the following:
§ Accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation or propose a new time.
§ Press
more.
to see options for replying, moving the invitation to a folder, and
126
Calendar
Dismissing or snoozing event reminders
/1
1. Tap the status bar, then slide your finger down the screen to open the
Notifications panel.
If you have set at least one reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon
will
appear in the notifications area of the status bar to remind you of the upcoming
event.
09
2. Do one of the following:
§ Tap Clear to dismiss event reminders and all other notifications.
11
§ After sliding open the Notifications panel, tap the calendar event reminder.
You’ll then see a list of all pending event reminders. Tap Snooze all to
snooze all event reminders for five minutes, or tap Dismiss all to dismiss all
event reminders.
20
§ Press
to keep the reminders pending in the notifications area of the
status bar.
, and then select or clear a calendar to show or hide it.
tia
In any Calendar view, tap
Showing or hiding calendars
en
Calendars are kept synchronized on HTC Explorer, whether or not you hide them.
fid
Changing Calendar settings
on
You can change Calendar settings to specify how it displays events and how it notifies
you of upcoming events.
In any Calendar view, press
and then tap Settings (or More > Settings).
TC
Reminder settings
All calendars
Select this check box to use the same event reminder settings
for all types of calendars. If you clear this check box, you can
set different reminder settings for each calendar.
Set alerts &
notifications
Configure event reminders to open an alert, send you a
notification, or turn off event notifications on HTC Explorer.
Default reminder
time
Choose how soon before an event you want to be notified.
Select ringtone
Choose a ringtone to sound when you receive an event
reminder.
Hide declined events Choose whether to show or hide events for which you've
declined invitations.
127
Calendar
Calendar view settings
First day of
week
Set the month and week views to start on a Sunday or Monday.
Include weather Select this check box to show weather information in the day view
events list.
If weather is included, by default, day view displays your current
location's weather. You can change it to display the weather of
another city.
11
About the Calendar widget
09
/1
City
20
You can add a Calendar widget to your Home screen. The widgets offer different
calendar views.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Tapping a day or event on the widget brings you to the Calendar app.
128
Maps and location
Maps and location
/1
Location settings
09
Turning on location services
In order to find your location on HTC Explorer, you need to enable location sources.
and then tap Settings > Location.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Select one or both of the following:
Uses Wi-Fi or your mobile data connection to find your
approximate location.
Use GPS satellites
Finds your exact GPS location. This requires a clear view
of the sky and more battery power.
en
Google Maps
tia
20
Use wireless
networks
About Google Maps
fid
Google Maps™ lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,
and receive detailed directions to your destination.
on
It also provides a search tool where you can locate places of interest or an address on
a map, or view locations at street level.
§ You need to connect to the Internet to use Google Maps.
§ To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.
TC
§ The Google Maps app does not cover every country or city.
129
Maps and location
Getting around maps
When you open Google Maps, you can easily find your location on the map or check
out nearby places by panning and zooming in and out on the map.
> Maps.
2. Tap
to show your current location. The blue marker
location on the map.
shows your current
11
3. Do any of the following:
09
1. From the Home screen, tap
/1
To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.
Swipe your finger to any direction on the screen to view
nearby places on the map.
Use Compass
mode
Tap
to switch to Compass mode. In Compass mode, the
map changes to an angled view and automatically orients
itself depending on the direction you're facing.
Zoom in
§ Place your thumb and index fingers on top of the area that
you want to zoom in, and then spread your fingers across
the map.
tia
20
Move around
§ Tap
fid
Zoom out
en
§ Double-tap the area on the map that you want to zoom in.
§ Pinch your thumb and index finger on the map to zoom
out.
§ Tap
TC
on
View
1. Press and hold a location on the map. A balloon opens over
information for a
the location, with the address and a thumbnail from street
random location
view (if available).
2. Tap the balloon to see more information.
You can get directions to the location, check for nearby
places of interest, and more.
130
Maps and location
Searching for a location
In Google Maps, you can search for a location, such as an address or a type of
business or establishment (for example, museums).
1. In Maps, enter the place you want to search for in the search box.
/1
2. Tap
to search for the location you entered or tap a suggested search item.
The search results are displayed as markers on the map.
§ Tap a marker
is.
to see if that is what you’re looking for, tap the balloon if it
to show the search results as a list, and then tap the location.
11
§ Tap
09
3. Do any of the following:
Details about the selected location displays on the screen.
20
4. Do any of the following:
§ Tap the onscreen buttons to view the location on a map, get directions,
view the location in Street View, if available, and more. Scroll down the
screen to view more options.
tia
§ Swipe left or right across the screen to view the information for the next or
previous search result.
Clearing the map
Press
en
After searching on a map, you can clear away the various markers drawn on it.
, and then tap Clear Map.
fid
Searching for a place of interest near you
on
Use Places to find places of interest near your current location. Places uses Google
Maps to search common places that you would want to find, such as the nearest gas
station or ATM kiosk.
TC
Before using Places, you need to enable location sources.
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Places.
2. Tap the type of place you want to search.
3. Do any of the following:
§ When one or two places of interest are found, the search results are
displayed as markers on the map. You can tap the marker, and then tap the
balloon to view more information about the place.
§ When several places are found, the search results display in a list. Tap a
place to view more information.
131
Maps and location
Getting directions
Get detailed directions to your destination. Google Maps can provide directions for
travel by foot, public transportation, or car.
, and then tap Directions.
1. While viewing a map, press
/1
2. Do any of the following:
to select an address from your contacts or a point that you tap on a
20
11
§ Tap
map.
09
§ Use your current location as the starting point, or enter a location from
where to start in the first text box. Then enter your destination in the
second text box.
3. Choose how you want to get to your destination by tapping the car, public
transit, bike, or walk button.
tia
4. Tap Get directions. The next screen displays the directions to your destination in
a list.
en
If the place you’ve set as your destination has several locations available, choose
which one to go to.
fid
5. Tap an item to view the directions on the map.
6. Tap the arrow buttons on the map to follow the directions.
TC
on
When you’re finished viewing or following the directions, press
and then tap Clear
Map to reset the map. Your destination is automatically saved in the Google Maps
history.
132
Maps and location
Getting help
Get help and more information about Maps.
To open the help, press
, and then tap More > Help. The web browser opens and
takes you to the Google Maps Help site.
/1
Finding your friends with Google Latitude (available by country)
09
Google Latitude® user location service lets you and your friends share locations and
status messages with each other. It also lets you get directions to your friends’
locations, send your location details by email, and more.
11
Your location is not shared automatically. You must join Latitude, and then invite your
friends to view your location or accept their invitations. Only friends that you have
explicitly invited or accepted can see your location.
20
Opening and joining Latitude
1. From the Home screen, tap
> Maps.
2. While viewing a map, press
and then tap Join Latitude.
§ Tap
tia
3. After you’ve joined Latitude and closed the application, you can do any of the
following to open it from the Home screen:
> Latitude.
TC
on
fid
en
§ Open Maps, press
, and then tap Latitude.
133
HTC Sync
HTC Sync
/1
About HTC Sync
09
You have your new vacation photos on HTC Explorer while your business calendar is
on your computer. Why not make your files and information available on both
devices?
11
With HTC Sync, you can:
20
§ Sync your contacts between your Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express or
Windows Contacts on your computer and HTC Explorer.
§ Sync your calendar events between the Outlook or Windows Calendar on your
computer and HTC Explorer.
§ Bring your photos, videos, documents, songs, and playlists to HTC Explorer and
enjoy them on the go.
tia
§ Easily import your captured photos and videos from HTC Explorer to your
computer.
en
§ Store the same web bookmarks on both your computer and HTC Explorer.
§ Install third-party mobile apps from your computer.
fid
You need a storage card inserted into HTC Explorer to be able to sync multimedia
files and documents.
on
Installing HTC Sync
TC
§ HTC Sync requires USB 2.0 on your computer to connect and sync with
HTC Explorer.
§ For trouble-free installation, first quit all running programs and temporarily exit
from your anti-virus program before you start installing HTC Sync.
Do either of the following:
§ Check and copy the HTC Sync installer from the storage card (if available), and
then install it on your computer.
§ Download the HTC Sync software for HTC Explorer from our support website
(www.htc.com/support/) and install it on your computer.
134
HTC Sync
Setting up HTC Sync to recognize
HTC Explorer
1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the USB cable that came in the
box.
09
3. On the Device setup screen, enter a name for HTC Explorer.
/1
2. When HTC Explorer prompts you to choose a type of USB connection, tap HTC
Sync, and then tap Done. Wait for HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer.
11
4. Click Save. The Device panel then opens.
To change the name of HTC Explorer later, click Overview > Device setup.
20
Getting to know the workspace
On the Device panel, you can set your sync options, see general information about
HTC Explorer, check the used and available storage space, and begin synchronization.
tia
The available categories and options depend on the device you've connected to
your computer.
en
§ You can click a category of items to see its sync options on the right side of the
Device panel.
fid
Clicking Overview displays basic software information and storage usage, and
lets you change the name of HTC Explorer, or install third-party applications to
HTC Explorer.
on
§ The Sync now button lets you start syncing the categories and options you've
selected.
TC
§ The estimated storage usage bar beside the Sync now button shows you the
estimated storage space that will be used when there are new items to be
synchronized and added to HTC Explorer.
135
HTC Sync
Setting up synchronization
You can choose the types of files and information you want to sync between
HTC Explorer and your computer.
Music sync options
09
/1
Bring the music tracks and songs you play on your computer to HTC Explorer. If you
have playlists created in iTunes® or Windows Media® Player, you can sync these too
and enjoy them on the go.
11
You can sync audio files in these formats: *.aac, *.amr, *.m4a, *.mid, *.midi, *.mp3,
*.wav, *.wma
20
1. On the Device panel, click Music, and then click the On button. Turning Music
sync on means you want this category included every time you sync your
computer and HTC Explorer.
2. Select Sync music files from, and then click Add.
3. Choose a folder that contains your audio files, and then click OK.
en
Gallery sync options
tia
4. Select Sync music files from iTunes and Windows Media Player if you're using
either of these software on your computer, and then choose the playlists you
want to sync on HTC Explorer.
fid
You can automatically sync photos and videos between HTC Explorer and a
computer.
You can sync photos and videos in these formats:
on
§ Photos: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpeg, *.jpg, *.png
§ Videos: *.3gp, *.3g2, *.mp4, *.wmv
TC
1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click the On button. Turning Gallery
sync on means you want this category included every time you sync your
computer and HTC Explorer.
2. To automatically import your camera shots to your computer during
synchronization, select Copy device Camera Shots to PC. Photos and videos
from HTC Explorer will be saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shots
folder on your computer.
3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click Add.
4. Choose a folder that contains your multimedia files, and then click OK. All
supported image and video files added to this folder will be copied to
HTC Explorer during synchronization.
136
HTC Sync
Calendar sync options
HTC Explorer can sync appointments and events with your calendar in Outlook
(Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook 2007) or Windows Calendar.
2. Select the application you want to sync calendar events with.
/1
1. On the Device panel, click Calendar, and then click the On button. Turning
Calendar sync on means you want this category included every time you sync
your computer and HTC Explorer.
09
3. Choose from which point you want to start synchronizing your calendar events.
11
4. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and the
computer, choose which information you want to keep.
20
Only the calendar fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.
People sync options
Sync HTC Explorer contacts with your Outlook (Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook
2007), Outlook Express, or Windows Contacts.
tia
If you have contacts to sync from your SIM card, you have to import these first to
HTC Explorer storage.
en
1. On the Device panel, click People, and then click the On button. Turning People
sync on means you want this category included every time you sync your
computer and HTC Explorer.
fid
2. Choose the application you want to sync your contacts with.
on
3. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and the
computer, choose which information you want to keep.
TC
Only the contact fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.
137
HTC Sync
Bookmarks sync options
Sync web browser bookmarks between HTC Explorer and a computer.
/1
If you are using Google Chrome™ or Firefox® Internet browser and have selected it
to sync with HTC Explorer, make sure to close all browser windows before you
begin synchronization.
09
1. Using your favorite web browser on your computer, create a favorites folder
named HTC bookmarks. Make sure to save your favorite bookmarks in this
folder to be able to sync them with HTC Explorer.
11
2. On HTC Sync's Device panel, click Bookmarks, and then click the On button.
Turning Bookmarks sync on means you want this category included every time
you sync your computer and HTC Explorer.
20
3. Choose the web browser that stores the bookmarks to sync with HTC Explorer.
tia
Documents sync options
When conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and computer, HTC
Sync keeps the information from your computer.
en
You can sync files and documents from your computer to HTC Explorer. You can also
sync email attachments that you stored on HTC Explorer to your computer.
§ To open a document on HTC Explorer, you'll need a compatible app.
on
fid
§ To sync email attachments stored on HTC Explorer to your computer, you must
set up an Exchange ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email account from the Mail app on
HTC Explorer.
1. On the Device panel, click Documents, and then click the On button. Turning
Documents sync on means you want this category included every time you sync
your computer and HTC Explorer.
TC
2. To sync email attachments that you've stored on HTC Explorer, select Copy all
download Mail documents to PC.
3. Select Sync PC documents from, and then click Add.
4. Choose a folder that contains the documents you want to sync on
HTC Explorer, and then click OK.
Email attachments will be saved on the \My Documents\ folder.
138
HTC Sync
Synchronizing HTC Explorer
Check the estimated usage bar beside the Sync now button for the estimated file size
of new items to sync on HTC Explorer.
/1
1. After selecting and customizing the categories you want to sync, click Sync
now.
2. After synchronization is complete, click Disconnect.
09
3. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.
11
The next time you connect HTC Explorer to your computer, synchronization
automatically begins based on your sync settings.
20
Installing an app from your computer to
HTC Explorer
tia
If you have application files (*.apk) on your computer, you can use HTC Sync to
install them to HTC Explorer. We strongly recommend you install only applications
that you trust.
en
Before you begin, make sure that HTC Explorer is set to allow applications from
your computer to be installed toHTC Explorer. To do this, press
while on the
Home screen, tap Settings > Applications, and then select the Unknown sources
check box.
fid
1. On the Device panel, click Overview.
2. Click Application installer.
on
3. Browse for the application file on your computer, and then click Open. The
installation process starts on HTC Explorer.
4. Check the screen on HTC Explorer to see if there are additional instructions to
complete the installation.
TC
5. After installation is complete, you can click Disconnect.
6. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.
139
HTC Sync
Synchronizing another device with your
computer
You can switch from one device to another, if you have more than one device to sync.
/1
1. Connect another device to your computer, then set up HTC Sync to recognize
it.
09
2. Click the device you want to set up or begin synchronization. The Device panel
then opens, where you can separately customize your sync settings for this
device.
11
To switch to another device to sync, click Devices, and then click the device's name or
image.
20
Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade
Visit the HTC support website (www.htc.com/support/) from time to time to check
for the most recent HTC Sync upgrade so you can download and install it on your
computer.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
After installing the latest upgrade, set up HTC Sync again to recognize and sync with
HTC Explorer.
140
HTCSense.com
HTCSense.com
/1
Signing up for your HTCSense.com account
09
You can sign up for your HTCSense.com account on HTC Explorer or your computer’s
web browser.
1. From the Home screen, press
11
Signing up from HTC Explorer
, and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
20
2. Tap Add account > HTC Sense.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.
Signing up from your computer
tia
Make sure you have HTC Explorer close by. You’ll need it to complete the sign-up
process.
1. On your computer, open your web browser.
en
2. Go to www.htcsense.com.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.
fid
After signing up to HTCSense.com on the Web, you have to sign in using the same
account credentials on HTC Explorer.
on
Updating your HTCSense.com account details
1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.com
account.
2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.
TC
3. Update your account details, and then click Save Changes.
Turning on Device finder
Some features of HTCSense.com require that the Device finder option on
HTC Explorer is selected.
1. On HTC Explorer, from the Home screen, press
2. Tap Location.
3. Select the Device finder check box.
, and then tap Settings.
141
HTCSense.com
Using HTCSense.com
Forgot HTC Explorer at home or you can’t find it? Or worse, it slipped out of your
pocket while riding the train. Use HTCSense.com to communicate with HTC Explorer
so you can forward calls and messages to a different number, make HTC Explorer
ring, lock it, and even erase its contents.
09
/1
To use these features, you'll need to sign in to HTCSense.com on a computer web
browser.
Making HTC Explorer ring
On HTCSense.com, click Ring.
Forwarding calls and messages
20
11
You know HTC Explorer is somewhere in your home but you just can’t find it. Make
HTC Explorer ring, even if it’s on mute, so that you can find it. Hopefully, it’s just
buried under some clothes in the hamper.
tia
You can forward calls and messages to another phone if you don’t have HTC Explorer
with you.
en
Before turning on Forward calls or Forward messages, you need to customize
settings first such as specifying an alternate phone number or email address.
fid
§ To forward calls, click the Forward calls On/Off switch. (Be sure that Enable call
forwarding is selected in Settings.)
on
§ To forward messages, click the Forward messages On/Off switch. (You should
select Forward messages to device or Forward messages to an email address in
Settings.)
Locating HTC Explorer
TC
Left HTC Explorer somewhere while doing your errands? You can use HTCSense.com
to find its approximate location.
You must have the Phone finder option selected in Settings > Location on
HTC Explorer for this feature to work.
On HTCSense.com, check the map to see where HTC Explorer is. Click Refresh
location to refresh the map.
142
HTCSense.com
Locking HTC Explorer
Lost HTC Explorer? Lock HTC Explorer and show a message onscreen so if somebody
finds it, they can contact you.
1. On HTCSense.com, click Lock device.
/1
2. Enter a PIN, an alternate phone number to call if somebody finds HTC Explorer,
and a short message to show onscreen.
09
The alternate number is shown on the screen. If somebody happens to find
HTC Explorer, that person can simply tap it to call that number using HTC Explorer.
Erasing the contents of HTC Explorer
11
3. Click Save.
20
If there’s no chance of getting HTC Explorer back, you can erase the contents of
HTC Explorer and the installed storage card so no one sees sensitive information on
HTC Explorer.
tia
There’s no way to recover HTC Explorer and storage card data after you erase the
contents so be absolutely sure before you proceed.
1. On HTCSense.com, click Erase device.
en
2. When asked to confirm, click Erase device.
fid
Deleting your HTCSense.com account
on
1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.com
account.
2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.
3. Click Click here to delete your HTCSense account.
TC
Deleting your HTCSense.com account will also delete your data on HTCSense.com
servers.
143
Keyboard
Keyboard
/1
Using the onscreen keyboard
11
09
When you start an app or select a field that requires text or numbers, the onscreen
keyboard becomes available. After entering your text, you can tap
or press
to
close the onscreen keyboard.
Selecting a keyboard layout
You can choose from three different keyboard layouts to suit your typing style.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
20
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
2. Tap Keyboard types, and then select the keyboard layout that you want to use.
Phone
tia
Standard This layout is similar to a desktop computer keyboard. This is the
default keyboard layout.
This layout resembles the traditional mobile phone keypad.
fid
en
Compact This layout features two letters on each key. The key size is slightly
bigger than on the Standard layout.
Entering text
on
Use the following keys while entering text using the onscreen keyboard:
Press and hold keys with gray characters at the top to enter numbers, symbols,
or accented letters. The gray character displayed on the key is the character that
will be inserted when you press and hold that key. Some keys have multiple
characters or accents associated with them.
TC
Shift key. Tap to enter an uppercase letter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.
Tap to switch to the numeric and symbol keyboard.
Enter key. Tap to create a new line.
Backspace key. Tap to delete the previous character.
Language key. The key you see depends on the keyboard language you are
currently using. Tap to switch to another keyboard language. You can also
access onscreen keyboard settings.
144
Keyboard
Tap to toggle between Multitap and XT9 predictive modes when using the
Compact or Phone keyboard layout.
Tap to hide the onscreen keyboard.
/1
Enabling multiple keyboard languages
09
If there are multiple keyboard languages available on HTC Explorer, you can choose
which languages to enable in the onscreen keyboard so that you can switch to these
languages and use them to enter text.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
11
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
2. Tap International keyboard.
20
3. Choose the languages you want.
Available languages depend on the region where you purchased HTC Explorer.
tia
Changing to the landscape onscreen keyboard
When entering text, you can choose to use the landscape orientation of the onscreen
keyboard. Turn HTC Explorer sideways to use a larger keyboard for easy typing.
en
§ Select the Auto-rotate screen check box in
the screen orientation to automatically change.
> Settings > Display to allow
fid
§ The landscape orientation keyboard is not supported in all apps.
on
Entering words with predictive text
TC
The onscreen keyboard has predictive text to help you type quickly and accurately.
Predictive text input is enabled by default, and word suggestions are displayed as you
type.
To enter a word in predictive mode, do any of the following:
§ If you see the word you want highlighted in green or orange, just tap the space
bar to insert the word into your text.
§ If you see the word you want shown in the suggestions before you have finished
typing the entire word, tap the word to insert it into your text.
§ If an arrow is shown to the right of the suggestion list, tap the arrow to see more
suggestions.
145
Keyboard
Setting a second language for the keyboard
Aside from the keyboard language you are currently using, you can set the predictive
text to be bilingual. As you type, you’ll get word suggestions in two languages that
you’ve selected.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
/1
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
Adding a word to the predictive text dictionary
09
2. Tap Bilingual prediction, and then choose the language you want.
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
20
You can also add a word to the list manually.
11
HTC Explorer comes with a list of words that it references for predictive text
suggestions. While entering text using the Standard keyboard layout, if you tap any
word on the suggestion list, it is automatically added to the predictive text dictionary
if it was not in the dictionary already.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary >
tia
3. Enter the word to add, and then tap OK.
en
Editing or deleting a word in the predictive text dictionary
You can edit or remove words that you previously added to the predictive text
dictionary.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
on
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary.
§ To edit a word, tap the word itself.
§ To delete words from the dictionary, press
the words to remove and tap Delete.
and tap Delete. Then choose
TC
Backing up your personal dictionary to your storage card
If you have a storage card installed, you can back up the new words you’ve added to
the predictive text dictionary.
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Copy to storage card.
3. When prompted, tap OK.
146
Keyboard
Importing your personal dictionary from your storage card
1. From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Restore from storage
card.
09
/1
3. When prompted, tap OK.
Entering text by speaking
11
No time to type? Try speaking the words to enter them in most text fields that let you
use the onscreen keyboard.
20
§ First make sure to select the language you’ll be using in the Voice input & output
settings.
§ Since HTC Explorer uses Google’s speech-recognition service, you need to be
connected to the Internet to enter text by speaking.
tia
1. Press and hold the language key. HTC Explorer cues you to speak.
en
2. Tell HTC Explorer what you want to be typed in.
Setting the voice input language
, then tap Settings > Voice input & output >
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
Voice recognizer settings.
on
2. Tap Language, then choose the language you want.
TC
Available languages depend on the voice input languages supported by Google.
147
Keyboard
Entering text by tracing
/1
Trace keyboard in Settings > Language & keyboard > Touch Input > Trace
keyboard must be selected for you to use the Trace keyboard.
Instead of tapping the keys on the onscreen keyboard, you can "trace" to type words.
en
Editing text
tia
20
11
09
To trace, slide your finger on the onscreen keyboard to enter words. For example, if
you want to type “the”, put your finger on the “t” key, and then trace the word (by
sliding your finger) “the” on the onscreen keyboard.
fid
It's easy to cut, copy, and paste text using the keyboard.
Some apps may offer their own way of selecting or copying text.
on
Selecting text
Highlight the text that you want to copy or cut.
TC
1. Press and hold the text field that contains the text to select until the magnifier
appears.
2. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to a letter within the text that you
want to select.
148
Keyboard
3. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu then
pops up.
4. Do one of the following:
11
§ Tap Select all to select everything in the text field.
09
/1
§ Tap Select word. When the word where you’ve placed the text cursor is
highlighted, drag the start and end markers to select the text you want.
Copying and pasting text
20
1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy or Cut. The
selected text is then copied to the clipboard.
2. Press and hold a text field in the same or other app until the magnifier appears.
3. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to where you want to paste the text.
tia
4. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu then
pops up.
en
5. Tap Paste.
Adjusting input settings
fid
Open the Touch Input settings by doing one of the following:
, and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard
on
§ From the Home screen, press
> Touch Input.
§ On the onscreen keyboard, tap the language key (for example, tap
if you’re
currently using the English onscreen keyboard). Then on the International
keyboard options menu, tap Settings.
TC
You must have more than two keyboard languages selected before you can access
Touch Input settings using the language key.
Keyboard types
Select the keyboard layout to use.
International
keyboard
Add or remove languages from the onscreen keyboard
language list.
Bilingual prediction
Select a secondary keyboard language to use.
Text input
§ Turn on or off predictive text, spell correction, and word
completion.
§ Enable audible or vibration feedback when typing.
§ Calibrate the touch keyboard accuracy.
149
Keyboard
Learn how to use the onscreen keyboard with this interactive
tutorial.
Trace keyboard
Turn on Trace keyboard and set options when tracing to
enter text.
Personal dictionary
Add, edit, or remove words in the predictive text dictionary.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
09
/1
Tutorial
150
Internet connections
Internet connections
/1
Data connection
1. From the Home screen, press
11
Checking the data connection you're using
09
When you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, it will be automatically set up to use
your mobile operator's data connection (if the SIM card is inserted).
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
20
2. Tap Mobile networks > Network operators or Access Point Names.
Turning the data connection on or off
tia
Turning your data connection off can help save battery life and save money on data
charges. However, if you don’t have data connection turned on and you’re also not
connected to a Wi-Fi network, you won’t receive automatic updates to your email,
social network accounts, and other synchronized information.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
en
1. From the Home screen, press
fid
2. Select the Mobile network check box to turn on the data connection; clear the
check box to turn off the data connection.
Adding a new access point
on
Before you add another data connection, have the access point name and settings
(including username and password if required) from your mobile operator ready.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Mobile networks > Access Point Names.
TC
3. On the APNs screen, press
and then tap New APN.
4. On the Edit access point screen, enter the APN settings. Tap an APN setting
item to edit it.
5. Press
and then tap Save.
151
Internet connections
Enabling data roaming
Connect to your mobile operator’s partner networks and access data services when
you’re out of your mobile operator’s coverage area.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
09
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
Using data services while roaming will be costly. Check with your mobile operator
for data roaming rates before you use data roaming.
2. Tap Mobile networks, and then select the Data roaming check box.
11
Select the Data roaming sound check box if you’d like HTC Explorer to play a sound
so you’ll know when it’s connecting to a roaming network.
20
Wi-Fi
To use Wi-Fi, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot”. The availability
and strength of the Wi-Fi signal will vary depending on objects, such as buildings or
simply a wall between rooms, the Wi-Fi signal has to pass through.
tia
Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a wireless network
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
en
2. Select the Wi-Fi check box to turn Wi-Fi on.
HTC Explorer then scans for available wireless networks.
fid
3. Tap Wi-Fi settings.
Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
on
If the wireless network that you want is not listed, tap Add Wi-Fi network to
manually add it.
4. Tap the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to.
TC
If you selected a secured network, you'll be asked to enter the network key or
password.
5. Tap Connect.
When HTC Explorer is connected to the wireless network, the Wi-Fi icon
appears
in the status bar and tells you the approximate signal strength (number of bands that
light up).
The next time HTC Explorer connects to a previously accessed secured wireless
network, you won’t be asked to enter the key or other security information again,
unless you reset HTC Explorer to its factory default settings.
152
Internet connections
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS security
You may need to install a network certificate (*.p12) to HTC Explorer before you can
connect to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS authentication protocol.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
/1
2. From the Home screen, press
1. Save the certificate file to the root folder of the storage card.
3. Tap Install from SD card.
Checking the wireless network status
1. From the Home screen, press
11
5. Turn on Wi-Fi and connect to a wireless network.
09
4. Select the network certificate needed to connect to the EAP-TLS network.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
20
2. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi settings, and then tap the wireless
network that HTC Explorer is currently connected to.
A message box is then displayed showing the Wi-Fi network name, status, speed,
signal strength, and more.
en
tia
If you want to remove the settings for this network, tap Forget. If you want to
reconnect to a wireless network that you have removed, you'll need to choose the
wireless network from the list of available Wi-Fi networks again. If it is a secured
wireless network, you'll need to enter the wireless network credentials again.
fid
Connecting to another Wi-Fi network
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
on
2. Tap Wi-Fi settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi
networks section.
3. To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks, on the Wi-Fi screen, press
and then tap Scan.
TC
4. Tap another Wi-Fi network to connect to it.
Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)
Add, set up, and manage virtual private networks (VPNs) so you can connect and
access resources inside a secured local network, such as your corporate network.
Depending on the type of VPN you’re using at work, you may be asked to enter your
login credentials and install security certificates before you can connect to your
company’s local network. You can get this information from your network
administrator.
Also, HTC Explorer must first establish a Wi-Fi or data connection before you can
start a VPN connection.
153
Internet connections
Setting up secure credential storage
If your network administrator tells you to download and install security certificates,
you must first set up secure credential storage on HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
1. From the Home screen, press
3. Enter a new password for the credential storage.
09
4. Scroll down and confirm the password, and then tap OK.
/1
2. Tap Set password.
5. Select the Use secure credentials check box.
11
You can then download and install the certificates needed to access your local
network. Your network administrator can tell you how to do this.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Adding a VPN connection
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap VPN settings > Add VPN, and then tap the type of VPN you want to add.
4. Press
tia
3. Tap the VPN settings and set them up according to the security details your
network administrator gave you.
, and then tap Save.
en
The VPN is then added to the VPNs section of the VPN settings screen.
Connecting to a VPN
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap VPN settings.
on
3. In the VPNs section, tap the VPN that you want to connect to.
4. When asked, enter your log in credentials, and then tap Connect. When you’re
connected, the VPN connected icon
appears in the notification area of the
title bar.
TC
You can then open the web browser to access resources such as your corporate
network intranet.
Disconnecting from a VPN
1. Press and hold the title bar, and then slide down your finger to open the
Notifications panel.
2. Tap the VPN connection to return to the VPN settings screen, and then tap the
VPN connection to disconnect from it.
When HTC Explorer has disconnected from the VPN, the VPN disconnected icon
displayed in the notification area of the title bar.
is
154
Internet connections
Using HTC Explorer as a modem
(USB tethering)
No Internet connection available for your computer? No problem. Use the Internet
connection of HTC Explorer to connect to the Internet.
/1
§ You need your SIM card inserted on HTC Explorer to use the data connection.
09
§ To use HTC Explorer as a modem, you need to install HTC Sync on your computer
first.
11
§ You must have an approved data plan associated with your account from your
mobile service provider to use this service.
1. Make sure the data connection on HTC Explorer is turned on.
20
2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.
3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select USB tethering, and then tap
Done.
en
tia
Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internet
through a computer (Internet Pass-through)
fid
If you temporarily don’t have Internet access, you can still go online on HTC Explorer
by using your computer’s Internet connection.
on
Before you can use your computer as a modem, be sure to install HTC Sync on
your computer first.
1. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet.
TC
Two things to check for your computer’s Internet connection. One, you may need
to turn off your local network’s firewall. Two, if your computer connects to the
Internet via PPP (e.g. Dial UP, xDSL, or VPN), Internet Pass-through will only
support TCP protocol.
2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.
3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Internet pass-through, and then
tap Done.
155
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
/1
Bluetooth basics
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Select or clear the Bluetooth check box.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
Turning Bluetooth on or off
20
An even easier way to turn Bluetooth on or off is with the Bluetooth widget on the
Home screen.
tia
Changing the device name
Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to save battery power, or in places where using
a wireless device is prohibited, such as on board an aircraft and in hospitals.
The device name identifies HTC Explorer to other devices.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
en
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
fid
4. Tap Device name.
on
5. Enter the new name for HTC Explorer in the dialog box, and then tap OK.
Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit
TC
You can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo headset, or have hands-free
conversations using a compatible Bluetooth headset or car kit. It’s the same
procedure to set up stereo audio and hands-free.
§ For you to listen to music with your headset or car kit, the headset or car kit must
support the A2DP Bluetooth profile.
§ Before you connect your headset, you need to make it discoverable so
HTC Explorer can find it. You can find out how to do this by referring to your
headset manual.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
156
Bluetooth
4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.
5. Tap Scan for devices. HTC Explorer will start to scan for Bluetooth devices
within range.
/1
6. When you see the name of your headset displayed in the Bluetooth devices
section, tap the name. HTC Explorer then automatically tries to pair with the
headset.
7. If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode supplied with your headset.
11
09
The pairing and connection status is displayed below the hands-free headset or car kit
name in the Bluetooth devices section. When the Bluetooth headset or car kit is
connected to HTC Explorer, the Bluetooth connected icon
is displayed in the
status bar. Depending on the type of headset or car kit you have connected, you can
then start using the headset or car kit.
20
Reconnecting a headset or car kit
Normally, you can easily reconnect your headset by switching on Bluetooth on
HTC Explorer, and then turning on the headset. However, you might have to connect
manually if your headset has been used with another Bluetooth device.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
tia
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
en
4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.
5. Tap the headset’s name in the Bluetooth devices section.
fid
6. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234, or consult the headset/car
kit documentation to find the passcode.
TC
on
If you still cannot reconnect to the headset or car kit, follow the instructions in
Unpairing from a Bluetooth device on page 157, and then follow the steps under
Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit on page 155.
Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth
device
Disconnecting a Bluetooth device
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to disconnect.
4. Tap Disconnect.
157
Bluetooth
Unpairing from a Bluetooth device
You can make HTC Explorer forget its pairing connection with another Bluetooth
device. Doing so may require you to enter or confirm a passcode again if you want to
reconnect to the other device.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
09
3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to unpair.
11
4. Tap Disconnect & unpair, or tap Unpair if the Bluetooth device is currently not
connected to HTC Explorer.
Sending information using Bluetooth
20
You can use Bluetooth to send information from HTC Explorer to another Bluetooth
enabled device such as a phone or notebook computer. You can send the following
types of information, depending on the device you are sending to:
§ Audio files
en
§ Contacts
tia
§ Calendar events
§ Images and videos
fid
Before you begin, set the receiving device to discoverable mode. You may also
need to set it to “Receive Beams” or “Receive Files”. Refer to the device’s
documentation for instructions on receiving information over Bluetooth.
on
1. On HTC Explorer, open the app that contains the information or file you want to
send.
2. Follow the steps for the type of item you want to send:
Photos or videos
1. On the Gallery app, choose an album.
2. Tap
> Bluetooth.
3. Choose the photos and videos you want to share, and
then tap Next.
TC
Captured photo or After capturing, on the Camera preview screen, tap
video
and then tap Bluetooth.
Contact
1. On the People app, tap a contact to view the contact's
details.
2. Press
and then tap Send contact.
3. Tap the down arrow icon, and then select Bluetooth.
4. Choose which details to share, and then tap Send.
Bluetooth
Calendar
appointment or
event
In Day view, Agenda view, or Week view, press and hold
the event, and then tap Forward > Bluetooth.
Music track
1. With the track displayed on the Music app’s Now playing
screen, tap
> Share > Share file.
158
On the main Voice Recorder screen, tap
Bluetooth.
, and then tap
09
Voice recording
/1
2. Tap Bluetooth.
3. Turn on Bluetooth if you’re asked to do so.
5. Tap the name of the receiving device.
11
4. If you haven't paired with the receiving device before, tap Scan for devices.
20
6. If prompted, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receiving
device. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcode
on both devices.
7. On the receiving device, accept the file.
tia
Where sent information is saved
When you send information using Bluetooth, the location where it's saved depends on
the type of information and the receiving device.
fid
en
If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally added directly to the
corresponding application on the receiving device. For example, if you send a
calendar event to a compatible phone, the event is shown in that phone’s calendar
application.
If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it is normally saved in the
Bluetooth Exchange folder within your personal document folders.
on
§ On Windows XP, the path may be: C:\Documents and Settings\[your
username]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange
§ On Windows Vista, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents
TC
§ On Windows 7, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\My Documents
\Bluetooth Exchange Folder
If you send a file to another device, the saved location may depend on the file type.
For example, if you send an image file to another mobile phone, it may be saved in a
folder named “Images”.
Receiving information using Bluetooth
HTC Explorer lets you receive various files with Bluetooth, including photos, music
tracks, and documents such as PDFs.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.
, and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.
159
Bluetooth
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.
4. Select the Discoverable check box.
5. On the sending device, send one or more files to HTC Explorer. Refer to the
device’s documentation for instructions on sending information over Bluetooth.
09
You'll then get a Bluetooth authorization request.
/1
6. If asked, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receiving
device. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcode
on both devices.
11
7. If you want to automatically receive files from the sending device in future,
select the Always check box.
8. Tap Accept or OK.
20
9. When HTC Explorer receives a file transfer request notification, slide down the
Notifications panel, tap the incoming file notification, and then tap Accept.
10. When a file is transferred, a notification is displayed. To open the file
immediately, slide down the Notifications panel, and then tap the relevant
notification.
tia
When you open a received file, what happens next depends on the file type:
§ Media files and documents are usually opened directly in a compatible app. For
example, if you open a music track, it starts playing in the Music app.
en
§ For a vCalendar file, choose the calendar where you want to save the event, and
then tap Import. The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.
fid
§ For a vCard contact file, you can choose to import one, several, or all of those
contacts to your contacts list.
on
Adding the Bluetooth received folder to the Home screen
You can add a folder to the Home screen that shows all files you have received with
Bluetooth.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Personalize.
TC
2. On the Personalize screen, tap Folder > Bluetooth received.
3. Press and hold the Bluetooth received folder icon, and drag it to the Home
screen position you want.
To view the folder contents, tap the folder icon. To open a file, tap the file name.
160
Security
/1
Protecting your SIM card with a PIN
Security
09
Add another layer of security for HTC Explorer by assigning a PIN (personal
identification number) to your SIM.
1. From the Home screen, press
11
Make sure you have the default SIM PIN provided by your mobile operator before
continuing.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
20
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock, then select Lock SIM card.
3. Enter the default SIM card PIN, and then tap OK.
4. To change the SIM card PIN, tap Change SIM PIN.
tia
Restoring a SIM card that has been locked out
If you enter the wrong PIN more times than the maximum number of attempts
allowed, your SIM card will become “PUK-locked.”
en
You need a PUK code to restore access to HTC Explorer. This code may have been
provided by your mobile operator when you received your SIM card.
fid
1. On the Phone dialer screen, enter the PUK code, and then tap Next.
2. Enter the new PIN you want to use, and then tap Next.
on
3. Enter the new PIN again, and then tap OK.
TC
Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lock
pattern, PIN, or password
Protect your personal information and prevent others from using HTC Explorer
without your permission by setting a screen lock pattern, PIN or password.
Your screen lock will be asked every time HTC Explorer is turned on or when it’s idle
for a certain period of time.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Set up screen lock.
, and then tap Settings > Security.
161
Security
3. Tap one of the following:
Disable the screen lock you’ve previously created.
Pattern
Set a screen lock pattern by following the onscreen instructions.
PIN
Set a numeric password of at least four digits.
None
/1
Password Set an alpha-numeric password.
09
4. On the Security screen, tap Lock phone after, then specify the idle time you can
allow before the screen is locked.
11
You can also clear the Use visible pattern or Visible passwords on the Security
screen if you don’t want your screen lock to display as you enter it onscreen.
Changing your screen lock
, and then tap Settings > Security.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Change screen lock.
3. Enter your current screen lock to confirm that you want to change it.
en
tia
4. Choose a different screen lock type, then enter your new pattern, PIN, or
password. Or tap None if you don’t want to use a screen lock.
Forgot your screen lock pattern?
fid
If you’ve forgotten your screen lock pattern, you have up to five attempts to
try and unlock HTC Explorer.
on
If this fails, you can unlock HTC Explorer by entering your Google Account
user name and password.
1. On the unlock screen, enter your lock pattern.
TC
2. After the fifth attempt, when you’re asked to wait for 30 seconds, tap
OK.
3. If the display goes off, press the POWER button to turn the display back
on, and then unlock the screen.
4. Tap the Forgot pattern? button when it appears.
5. Enter your Google Account name and password, and then tap Sign in.
You’ll then be asked to create a new screen lock pattern. If you no
longer want to do so, tap Cancel.
162
Security
Encrypting data on HTC Explorer
You can encrypt data on HTC Explorer such as your online accounts, settings, and
other information.
, and then tap Settings.
1. From the Home screen, press
3. Under Internal storage, tap Storage encryption.
09
4. Set a password, and then tap OK. The encryption process starts.
/1
2. Tap SD & phone storage.
TC
on
fid
en
tia
20
11
If you want to stop encrypting new information on HTC Explorer, deselect the Storage
encryption checkbox.
163
Settings
Settings
From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
09
Control and customize phone settings on the Settings screen.
/1
Settings on HTC Explorer
Make HTC Explorer truly yours with the various personalization
options available.
Wireless &
networks
Set up wireless connections, such as Wi-Fi, data connection, and
Bluetooth, enable Airplane mode, and more.
Call
Set up call services such as voicemail, call forwarding, call waiting,
and caller ID.
Sound
§ Choose sounds to use for the ringtones and notifications.
20
11
Personalize
tia
§ Adjust media playback volume.
en
§ Set to lower the ring volume when you move HTC Explorer when
it’s ringing, make it ring louder when inside a bag or pocket, and
turn on the speakerphone when you flip it over.
Set up display settings such as automatic screen orientation,
brightness, screen timeout, and more.
fid
Display
Accounts &
sync
§ Log in or out of your social network accounts, Google Account,
and Exchange ActiveSync account.
on
§ Sign in or out of your HTCSense.com account.
TC
Location
§ You can also manage synchronization and other settings for your
accounts.
§ Select the sources to use when determining your location.
§ Select Phone finder so you can use HTCSense.com to locate
HTC Explorer.
Search
Select items to include when you do a search and set Google
search options.
Privacy
§ Choose to automatically back up some settings (e.g. Wi-Fi
passwords or Bookmarks) to Google servers using your Google
Account so you can restore them when needed.
§ If you don't want missed calls and your received text message
appear on the lock screen, clear the Display message text check
box.
164
Settings
Connect to PC
§ Set the default USB connection type to use whenever you
connect HTC Explorer to your computer.
§ Or, select the Ask me check box to set HTC Explorer to always
display the screen for selecting the USB connection type.
Set a screen lock, enable the SIM card lock, or manage the
credential storage.
Power
§ Turn on power saver to automatically switch to power saving
mode when the battery level goes down to the level that you set.
09
/1
Security
§ Manage running applications, move applications to or from the
storage card, check how much storage is used by apps, and install
or uninstall programs.
20
Applications
11
§ Another power saving option is to select Enable sleep mode. This
will turn off auto sync of data in your online accounts.
§ Choose how much free memory remains before you're notified
about low memory space.
§ Check the available space in the internal storage and your storage
card.
tia
SD & phone
storage
en
§ From this screen, be sure to unmount your storage card before
you remove it from HTC Explorer.
fid
§ Erase the storage card to start afresh and if you don't need to
keep the content. You need to unmount the storage card first
before you can erase it.
on
§ Clear out the cache used by apps, move apps or uninstall apps if
HTC Explorer is running low on memory.
TC
Date & time
§ You can also do a factory reset.
§ Set the date and time, time zone, and date or time format.
§ Choose the time and date formats that suit you.
Language &
keyboard
Set the operating system language and region. You can also set
onscreen keyboard options.
Accessibility
Use these settings when you’ve downloaded and installed an
accessibility tool, such as a screen reader that provides voice
feedback. You can turn accessibility functions or services on or off.
165
Settings
Set up the voice input options. Also, if you’ve installed a text-tospeech (voice data) application, use this to set the text-to-speech
settings.
About phone
§ Turn on or off scheduled checks for system software updates, or
manually check for updates.
Voice input &
output
/1
§ Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you're helping us know if
HTC Explorer encounters a technical problem.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Adjusting the screen brightness manually
11
Changing display settings
09
§ View different information about HTC Explorer, such as the
mobile network type, signal strength, battery level, and more.
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Display > Brightness.
3. Clear the Automatic brightness check box.
tia
4. Drag the brightness slider to the left to decrease or to the right to increase the
screen brightness.
en
5. Tap OK.
Adjusting the time before the screen turns off
fid
After a period of inactivity, the screen turns off to conserve battery power. You can
set the idle time before the screen turns off.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
on
2. Tap Display > Screen timeout.
3. Tap the time before the screen turns off.
TC
Turning automatic screen rotation off
By default, the screen orientation automatically adjusts depending on how you hold
HTC Explorer.
Automatic rotation is not supported in all application screens.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Display.
3. Clear the Auto-rotate screen check box.
166
Settings
Recalibrating the G-sensor
Recalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen orientation does not respond
properly to the way you hold HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings.
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
2. Tap Display > G-Sensor calibration.
3. Place HTC Explorer on a flat and level surface, and then tap Calibrate.
09
4. After the recalibration process, tap OK.
Keeping the screen on while charging HTC Explorer
1. From the Home screen, press
11
You can keep the screen from turning off while you’re charging HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings.
3. Select the Stay awake check box.
20
2. Tap Applications > Development.
Switching animation effects on or off
tia
You can turn off the animation or enable only some animations when switching
between screens.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
en
2. Tap Display > Animation.
fid
3. On the options menu, select the animation setting you want.
on
Changing sound settings
Switching between silent, vibration, and normal modes
Do one of the following:
TC
§ To change back from silent to normal mode, simply press the VOLUME UP
button.
§ To change back from vibration to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP button
twice.
§ From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings > Sound > Sound profile.
Enabling or disabling audible selection
You can choose to play a sound when you’re selecting items onscreen.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Sound.
3. Select or clear the Audible selection check box.
167
Settings
Lowering the ring volume automatically
HTC Explorer has a quiet ring feature that automatically lowers the ring volume when
you move it.
, and then tap Settings.
1. From the Home screen, press
3. Select or clear the Quiet ring on pickup check box.
09
Making HTC Explorer ring louder with Pocket mode
/1
2. Tap Sound.
, and then tap Settings.
20
1. From the Home screen, press
11
To help avoid missing incoming calls when HTC Explorer is in your pocket or bag, the
pocket mode feature gradually increases the ring volume and vibrates when you
receive a call. When not in your pocket or bag, HTC Explorer will ring at the normal
volume you set.
2. Tap Sound.
3. Select or clear the Pocket mode check box.
tia
Switching to speakerphone automatically
en
When you're on a call, you can switch to speakerphone by simply flipping
HTC Explorer over.
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Sound.
, and then tap Settings.
fid
3. Select or clear the Flip for speaker check box.
on
Changing the language
TC
When you turn HTC Explorer on for the first time, you’re asked to choose the
language you want to use. If you want, you can still change the language after you set
up HTC Explorer. Changing the language adjusts the keyboard layout, date and time
formatting, and more.
The languages available to choose from may depend on the version of HTC Explorer
you have.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Language & keyboard > Select language.
168
Settings
3. Tap the language and corresponding region you want to use.
4. Press
to return to the Home screen. The new language will be applied after a
few seconds.
/1
Optimizing battery life
1. From the Home screen, press
09
You can set HTC Explorer to automatically switch to power saver mode when the
battery level reaches a certain level.
, and then tap Settings.
11
2. Tap Power.
3. Tap Power mode > Economy.
20
4. Tap Turn power saver on at, and then select when to switch to power saver
mode.
5. Tap Economy mode settings, and then set and select the behavior when
HTC Explorer switches to power saver mode.
Switching to GSM network mode
tia
Switch to using GSM network if you’re not using a data connection to connect to the
Internet. Connecting to GSM network mode consumes less battery power.
en
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Network Mode.
fid
3. Tap GSM only.
Checking the power usage of applications
on
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
TC
2. Tap About phone > Battery > Battery use.
169
Settings
Scheduling HTC Explorer to switch to Sleep mode
Set the Sleep mode schedule on HTC Explorer so it doesn't consume too much
battery power when it's not plugged in at night.
, and then tap Settings.
09
1. From the Home screen, press
/1
Unlike the usual Sleep mode when you press the POWER button to turn off the
screen display, a scheduled Sleep mode turns off the Wi-Fi and data connections
during the Sleep mode schedule you defined.
2. Tap Power > Enable sleep mode.
11
3. Tap any of the following:
20
Automatic Select to automatically switch HTC Explorer to Sleep mode.
HTC Explorer adjusts its Sleep mode schedule over a period of
time around what it detects as your bedtime.
Select to specify the Sleep mode start and end time.
Never
Select to turn scheduled Sleep mode off.
tia
Manual
en
Managing memory
Checking how much phone memory is available for use
, and then tap Settings.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
on
2. Tap SD & phone storage. The available phone memory is displayed in the
Internal storage section.
Checking the available storage card space
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
TC
2. Tap SD & phone storage. The total and available storage card space is displayed
in the SD card section.
Making more storage space
Easily free up some storage by cleaning up the application cache, moving or
uninstalling apps, and deleting old mails and messages all in one go.
You cannot move or uninstall preinstalled apps.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap SD & phone storage > Make more space.
170
Settings
3. On the Clear caches screen, choose whether to clear the cache of rarely used
apps only or all apps, and then tap Next.
4. On the Application storage screen:
§ Tap Move apps to SD card if there are apps that you can transfer to the
storage card.
/1
§ Tap Uninstall apps if there are apps you'd like to remove.
5. Tap Next.
09
6. On the Mail & message storage screen:
11
§ Set fewer days of mails to download so that older mails will be removed
from the storage automatically.
§ Lower the number of text and multimedia messages per conversation.
7. Tap Finish.
1. From the Home screen, press
20
Clearing application cache and data
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.
tia
3. On the All tab, tap an application.
4. On the screen, tap Clear data and/or Clear cache.
en
Uninstalling third-party applications
You cannot uninstall applications that are preinstalled on HTC Explorer.
, and then tap Settings.
fid
1. From the Home screen, press
2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.
3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to uninstall.
on
4. Tap Uninstall.
Moving applications to or from the storage card
TC
Move downloaded applications to the storage card if the internal storage on
HTC Explorer is getting low. Or, if your storage card is getting full, you can also move
applications from the storage card to the internal storage.
You can only move applications that are not preinstalled on HTC Explorer.
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.
3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to move.
4. Tap Move to SD card or Move to phone.
171
Settings
Stopping running applications using Task Manager
Use Task Manager to free up memory by stopping running applications that you're
not currently using.
to the right of the application name to stop it.
/1
2. In the All applications list, tap
> Task Manager.
1. From the Home screen, tap
, and then tap Settings.
11
1. From the Home screen, press
09
Checking information about HTC Explorer
2. Tap About phone.
20
3. Select one of the following:
Enable or disable the automatic check feature for software
updates for HTC Explorer. You can also tap Check now to
manually check for software updates.
Tell HTC
Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you’re helping us
know if HTC Explorer encounters a technical problem. You
can also choose when you want to send error reports.
Network
Check information about your mobile network and its
service status.
en
tia
Software
updates
fid
Phone identity
TC
on
Battery
Check information about HTC Explorer and the SIM card
you’re using.
Check information about the battery such as its current
battery level, status, and what programs are using the
battery.
Hardware
information
Check the Wi-Fi MAC and Bluetooth addresses.
Software
information
Check the version and other information about the Android
platform being used by HTC Explorer. You can also check
the version of the web browser.
Legal
information
Read legal information from HTC and Google, and licenses
used by HTC Explorer.
172
Update and reset
Update and reset
/1
Software updates
11
09
From time to time, software updates for HTC Explorer may be available. HTC Explorer
can check and then notify you if there’s a new update. You can then download and
install the software update using the Wi-Fi or data connection. You can also manually
check if there's an available software update.
20
Depending on the type of update, the update may erase all your personal data and
customized settings, and also remove any applications you’ve installed. Make sure that
you’ve backed up the information and files you want to keep.
Checking and downloading software updates may incur extra data fees.
tia
Installing an update
en
When the Internet connection is on and there's a new update available, the system
update dialog box appears and guides you through the process.
1. If you don't see the dialog box, check for the update notification icon
status bar.
in the
fid
Slide open the Notifications panel, and then tap the update notification.
2. In the system update dialog box, choose what type of connection to use for
downloading the update.
on
Follow the onscreen prompts to start the download.
3. After the download is complete, tap Install now and then tap OK in the Install
system software update dialog box.
TC
Wait for the update to finish. HTC Explorer will then restart automatically.
Checking for updates manually
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap About phone > Software updates > Check now.
173
Update and reset
Restarting HTC Explorer
If HTC Explorer is running slower than normal, an application is not performing
properly, or HTC Explorer becomes unresponsive, try restarting HTC Explorer and see
if that helps solve the problem.
2. Unlock the display.
09
3. Press and hold the POWER button, and then tap Restart.
/1
1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on.
4. When asked to confirm, tap Restart.
20
Resetting HTC Explorer
11
If these steps don't work, you can remove and replace the battery, and then turn
HTC Explorer on to restart it.
Do a factory reset to return HTC Explorer to its original state before the first time you
turned it on.
fid
en
tia
If you’re passing HTC Explorer on to someone else or HTC Explorer has a persistent
problem that cannot be solved, you can perform a factory reset (also called a hard
reset). Factory reset is not a step to be taken lightly. It’ll permanently delete all your
data and customized settings, and will remove any applications you’ve downloaded
and installed. Be sure to back up any data and files you want to keep before you do a
factory reset.
Performing a factory reset via settings
The most convenient way to do a factory reset is via the settings.
on
1. From the Home screen, press
, and then tap Settings.
2. Tap SD & phone storage > Factory data reset.
3. Tap Reset phone, and then tap Erase everything.
TC
Performing a factory reset using hardware buttons
If you can’t turn HTC Explorer on or access settings, you can still perform a factory
reset by using the hardware buttons on HTC Explorer.
1. Remove the battery, wait for a few seconds, then reinsert the battery.
2. Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button, and then briefly press the POWER
button.
3. Wait for the screen with the three Android images to appear, and then release
the VOLUME DOWN button.
4. Press VOLUME DOWN to select FACTORY RESET, and then press the POWER
button.
174
Trademarks and copyrights
Trademarks and copyrights
HTC Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
©2011
/1
HTC, the HTC logo, the HTC quietly brilliant logo, HTC Explorer, HTC Sense, and HTC
Sync are trademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.
©2011
11
09
Google Inc. Used with permission. Google, the Google logo, Android, the
Android logo, Android Market, the Android Market logo, Google Apps, Google
Calendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google
Talk, Gmail, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.
20
Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Outlook, Windows Media, and Windows Vista are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
tia
This device contains Adobe® Flash® Player software under license from Adobe
Systems Incorporated. Copyright ©1995–2011 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
en
microSD is a trademark of SD Card Association.
Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.
fid
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc.
All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,
registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
TC
on
HTC shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein,
nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this material.
The information is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind and is subject to
change without notice. HTC also reserves the right to revise the content of this
document at any time without prior notice.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior written
permission of HTC.
175
Index
Index
09
3G 150
20
11
Airplane mode 48
Alarm 96
Android Market 93
Apps
- deleting 94
- installing 93, 138
TC
on
fid
en
tia
Back up contacts 66
Battery
- installing 13
- optimizing battery life 168
Bluetooth
- connecting a Bluetooth headset or
car kit 155
- disconnecting or unpairing 156
- sending information 157
- sharing music 92
- turning on or off 155
Browser
- bookmarks 53
- navigating and zooming 51
- opening a new window 51
- options 54
- using 50
- effects 80
- recording a video 80
- taking a photo 79
- zooming 79
Change phone language 167
Sound
- audible selection 166
- lowering ring volume
automatically 167
- Pocket mode 167
- switching profiles 166
- switching to speakerphone 167
Clock 95
Conference call 43
Contacts
- adding 63
- copying from SIM card 62
- deleting 67
Copying text 26
/1
Symbols
Calendar
- creating an event 122
- managing events 124
- reminders 126
- settings 126
- views 123
- widget 127
Call history 45
Camera
- basics 78
Data connection
- access point 150
- turning on or off 150
Delete apps 94
Delete contacts 67
Display
- adjusting screen brightness 165
- changing the time before the screen
turns off 165
- recalibrating G-sensor 166
- turning off screen rotation 165
Downloading
- from Web 52
- viewing downloads 53
Email 113
Exchange ActiveSync
- Out of office 121
176
Index
- sending a meeting request 121
- working with Exchange ActiveSync
email 120
Gallery
- about 82
- editing photos 84
- sending photos and videos 85
- sharing photos and videos 86
- viewing photos 83
- viewing photos in social networks 88
- watching video 84
Getting started 8
Gmail 112
Google Account 56
Google Maps 128
Keyboard
- copying and pasting text 148
- dictionary 145
- editing text 147
- entering text 143
- entering text by speaking 146
- predictive text 144
- selecting text 147
20
tia
en
fid
TC
on
Hands free 155
Hard reset 173
Headphones 155
Home dialing 46
Home screen
- about 17
- adding widgets 30
- extended 17
- rearranging items 32
- rearranging the home panels 33
HTC Clock
- Desk Clock 95
- setting an alarm 96
- World Clock 95
HTCSense.com 140
11
09
/1
Facebook
- sharing your location 75
Facebook for HTC Sense 73
Factory reset 173
Firmware 172
Flight mode 48
FM Radio 100
Icons
- notification icons 22
- status icons 21
Internet calling 44
Internet connection
- data connection 150
- Internet pass-through 154
- Tethering 154
- VPN 152
- Wi-Fi 151
Internet pass-through 154
Language 167
Leap view 18
Locations
- turning on location services 128
Mail
- adding a POP3/IMAP account 114
- adding an Exchange account 114
- deleting an email account 121
- managing email messages 117
- sending 117
- sorting email messages 116
- unified inbox 115
- working with Exchange ActiveSync
email 120
Making a call 38
Managing memory 169
Market 93
Master reset 173
Meeting request 121
Messages
- copying to the SIM card 109
Index
fid
en
Notifications
- icons 21
- panel 23
tia
TC
on
Online accounts
- about 56
- managing 57
Onscreen keyboard
- copying and pasting text 148
- dictionary 145
- editing text 147
- entering text 143
- entering text by speaking 146
- predictive text 144
- selecting text 147
- settings 148
Optimizing battery life 168
Pair a Bluetooth device 155
People
- adding a new contact 63
- deleting contacts 67
- editing a contact 67
09
/1
- filtering your contacts 61
- groups 69
- merging contact information 65
- searching for a contact 63
- widget 71
Phone calls
- calling a number in a message 40
- calling a number in an email 40
- calling using Wi-Fi 44
- making an emergency call 40
- receiving 41
- setting up a conference call 43
Phone information 171
Phone settings
- About phone 171
- Applications 169
- Display 165
- Language & keyboard 167
- Power 168
- SD & phone storage 169
- Sound 166
Phone updates 172
Photos
- copying to/from storage card 25
- editing 84
- sharing 86
- viewing 83
Playing music from the Lock screen 89
PUK (PIN Unblock Key) 160
11
- deleting 109
- deleting a conversation 110
- forwarding 107
- protecting from deletion 109
- viewing 106
microSD card 12
MMS 104
Modem
- USB tethering 154
- using your computer 154
Multimedia message 104
Music
- browsing the library 90
- copying music to storage card 25
- listening 89
- playing music from Lock screen 89
- playlist 90
- setting a song as ringtone 92
- sharing music using Bluetooth 92
- widget 90
20
177
Quick Settings 24
Radio 100
Record your voice 101
Ring volume
- lowering ring volume
automatically 167
- making your phone ring louder 167
Ringtone
- setting 92
Scenes 28
Screen
- adjusting screen brightness 165
Index
Updating phone software 172
Upgrade 172
USB 25, 154
tia
en
fid
on
TC
Tethering 154
Text message 103
Translate 50
09
/1
Videos
- recording 80
- sharing 86
- watching 84
Voice input 146
Voice Recorder 101
Volume
- adjusting during phone calls 19
- adjusting media 19
- adjusting ringer 19
VPN
- adding a connection 153
- connecting 153
11
- changing the time before the screen
turns off 165
- recalibrating G-sensor 166
- turning off screen rotation 165
SD card 12
Search 49, 50
Security
- changing your screen lock 161
- locking with a screen lock pattern,
PIN, or password 160
- locking your SIM card with a PIN 160
Settings
- About phone 171
- Applications 169
- Language & keyboard 167
- Power 168
- SD & phone storage 169
- Sound 166
Sharing
- games and apps 102
SIM card
- copying a message 109
- inserting 11
- removing 11
- SIM PIN 160
Sleep mode 20
Slideshow 83
Smart dial 39
SMS 103
Social networks
- adding 57
- viewing photos 88
Software update 172
Sound set 34
Speakerphone 43
Speed dial 39
Storage card
- copying files 25
- moving apps to the storage card 170
Sync
- online accounts 58
20
178
Wallpaper
- changing 29
Weather
- adding cities 98
- checking weather 98
Web browser 50
Wi-Fi
- calling 44
- connecting to another network 152
- network status 152
- turning on 151
Widgets
- adding 30
- changing settings 31
- removing 33
YouTube
- sharing videos 87

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Annotate, Fill forms, Extract
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : EN
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Create Date                     : 2011:09:16 15:53:30+08:00
Creator Tool                    : AH Formatter V5.1 MR2 (5,1,2010,0409) for Windows (x64)
Modify Date                     : 2011:09:16 16:11:36+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:09:16 16:11:36+08:00
Producer                        : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows (x64))
Trapped                         : False
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:f93a6c80-cd0f-47b6-aeb9-2ba6fbe532ee
Instance ID                     : uuid:a31bda26-ba4f-4194-a06c-5ca1d9ecb759
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 178
Creator                         : AH Formatter V5.1 MR2 (5,1,2010,0409) for Windows (x64)

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

HTC PJ03110 Smartphone User Manual 1 of 2

HTC Corporation Smartphone 1 of 2

Contents

user manual 1 of 2

user manual 1 of 2.

FCC ID Filing: NM8PJ03110

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation